HM 80166

System Administrator Guide
Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform G200, G400, G600, G800

Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform F400, F600, F800
MK-94HM8016-06
October 2016
© 2014, 2016 Hitachi, Ltd. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic
or mechanical, including copying and recording, or stored in a database or retrieval system for
commercial purposes without the express written permission of Hitachi, Ltd., or Hitachi Data Systems
Corporation (collectively “Hitachi”). Licensee may make copies of the Materials provided that any such
copy is: (i) created as an essential step in utilization of the Software as licensed and is used in no
other manner; or (ii) used for archival purposes. Licensee may not make any other copies of the
Materials. “Materials” mean text, data, photographs, graphics, audio, video and documents.
Hitachi reserves the right to make changes to this Material at any time without notice and assumes
no responsibility for its use. The Materials contain the most current information available at the time
of publication.
Some of the features described in the Materials might not be currently available. Refer to the most
recent product announcement for information about feature and product availability, or contact
Hitachi Data Systems Corporation at https://support.hds.com/en_us/contact-us.html.
Notice: Hitachi products and services can be ordered only under the terms and conditions of the
applicable Hitachi agreements. The use of Hitachi products is governed by the terms of your
agreements with Hitachi Data Systems Corporation.
By using this software, you agree that you are responsible for:
1. Acquiring the relevant consents as may be required under local privacy laws or otherwise from
authorized employees and other individuals to access relevant data; and
2. Verifying that data continues to be held, retrieved, deleted, or otherwise processed in
accordance with relevant laws.
Notice on Export Controls. The technical data and technology inherent in this Document may be
subject to U.S. export control laws, including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated
regulations, and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries. Reader agrees to
comply strictly with all such regulations and acknowledges that Reader has the responsibility to obtain
licenses to export, re-export, or import the Document and any Compliant Products.
Hitachi is a registered trademark of Hitachi, Ltd., in the United States and other countries.
AIX, AS/400e, DB2, Domino, DS6000, DS8000, Enterprise Storage Server, eServer, FICON,
FlashCopy, IBM, Lotus, MVS, OS/390, PowerPC, RS/6000, S/390, System z9, System z10, Tivoli,
z/OS, z9, z10, z13, z/VM, and z/VSE are registered trademarks or trademarks of International
Business Machines Corporation.
Active Directory, ActiveX, Bing, Excel, Hyper-V, Internet Explorer, the Internet Explorer logo,
Microsoft, the Microsoft Corporate Logo, MS-DOS, Outlook, PowerPoint, SharePoint, Silverlight,
SmartScreen, SQL Server, Visual Basic, Visual C++, Visual Studio, Windows, the Windows logo,
Windows Azure, Windows PowerShell, Windows Server, the Windows start button, and Windows Vista
are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Microsoft product screen shots are
reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
All other trademarks, service marks, and company names in this document or website are properties
of their respective owners.
2
Contents
Preface............................................................................................... 11
Intended audience................................................................................................. 12
Product version...................................................................................................... 12
Release notes........................................................................................................ 12
Changes in this revision.......................................................................................... 12
Related documents.................................................................................................12
Document conventions........................................................................................... 13
Conventions for storage capacity values...................................................................14
Accessing product documentation........................................................................... 15
Getting help...........................................................................................................15
Comments............................................................................................................. 16
1 System administration overview....................................................... 17

System management architecture........................................................................... 18
Ways to administer the storage system....................................................................18
Overview of Storage Advisor..............................................................................19
Unified management of block storage and file storage................................... 20
Dashboard..................................................................................................21
Inventory and resource information.............................................................. 25
Device Manager - Storage Navigator.................................................................. 26
Maintenance utility............................................................................................27
NAS Manager................................................................................................... 28
2 Preparing your management software.............................................. 31

Installing Storage Advisor....................................................................................... 32
Installing Storage Advisor with the application installer........................................32
Installing Storage Advisor with the virtual appliance............................................ 33
Installing Hitachi Storage Advisor in a DHCP environment.............................. 33
Installing Hitachi Storage Advisor in a static environment............................... 35
Changing the root password immediately after installation...................................38
Logging in to Storage Advisor............................................................................ 38
Logging in when Storage Advisor is not available................................................ 39
3
Generating and installing a signed SSL certificate................................................ 40
Using Device Manager - Storage Navigator...............................................................41
Setting up a management client........................................................................ 41
Requirements for management clients.......................................................... 41
Setting up TCP/IP for a firewall.................................................................... 44
Configuring the web browser....................................................................... 44
Installing Adobe Flash Player........................................................................46
Logging in to Device Manager - Storage Navigator.............................................. 46
Initial super-user login.................................................................................47
Normal login............................................................................................... 47
Changing your password..............................................................................49
Adding your SVP to the trusted sites zone for Windows Server computers....... 49
Onboarding and configuring a storage system.......................................................... 50
Overview..........................................................................................................51
Adding the first storage system..........................................................................51
Adding a fabric switch.......................................................................................52
Adding servers................................................................................................. 53
Creating parity groups.......................................................................................54
Using the maintenance utility.................................................................................. 56
Starting from Hitachi Command Suite.................................................................57
Starting from Hitachi Device Manager - Storage Navigator................................... 57
Accessing a storage system without management software....................................... 58
3 System configuration.......................................................................61
System administration tasks at a glance...................................................................62
System administration using Hitachi Storage Advisor.................................................63
Configure block storage.....................................................................................63
Enabling or disabling port security................................................................ 64
Adding a fabric switch................................................................................. 64
Creating parity groups ................................................................................ 67
Creating a pool........................................................................................... 76
Create and attach volumes to servers........................................................... 83
Managing storage systems...........................................................................86
Managing servers........................................................................................ 93
Managing volumes...................................................................................... 96
Configure file storage...................................................................................... 102
Managing file pools....................................................................................102
Managing virtual file servers.......................................................................106
Managing file systems................................................................................107
Managing shares and exports..................................................................... 109
System administration using Device Manager - Storage Navigator............................ 113
Setting storage system information.................................................................. 113
Backing up HDvM - SN configuration files......................................................... 114
Restoring HDvM - SN configuration files ...........................................................115
System administration using the maintenance utility............................................... 116
Changing the date and time.............................................................................116
Changing the controller clock settings......................................................... 116
Changing the SVP clock settings................................................................. 116
Changing network settings.............................................................................. 117
Setting up TCP/IP for a firewall...................................................................117
Enabling IPv6 communication.....................................................................117
4
Changing the administrator password...............................................................118
Creating a login message................................................................................ 119
Forcing the system lock to release....................................................................119
Registering the primary SVP host name............................................................ 120
System administration using NAS Manager............................................................. 121
Changing the system date and time of the NAS modules................................... 121
Miscellaneous system administration considerations................................................ 122
Report configuration tool................................................................................. 122
Prerequisites for the report configuration tool.............................................. 123
Installing the report configuration tool........................................................ 123
Using the report configuration tool..............................................................123
Modifying SVP port numbers............................................................................124
Viewing the port number used in SVP......................................................... 125
Effects of changing SVP port numbers.........................................................125
Changing the SVP port number.................................................................. 127
Initializing the SVP port number................................................................. 128
Reassigning an automatically assigned port number.....................................128
Initializing and reassigning an automatically assigned port number .............. 129
Changing the range of an automatically assigned port number..................... 130
Initializing the range of an automatically assigned port number.................... 131
Releasing HTTP communication blocking.......................................................... 132
Blocking HTTP communication to the SVP ........................................................132
4 User Administration....................................................................... 133

User administration for maintenance utility.............................................................134
Required roles for operating Maintenance Utility................................................134
Setting up user accounts................................................................................. 135
Disabling user accounts...................................................................................137
Removing user accounts..................................................................................141
Backing up user accounts................................................................................ 143
Restoring user account information.................................................................. 144
User administration for Device Manager - Storage Navigator....................................146
User administration overview........................................................................... 146
Workflow for creating and managing user accounts........................................... 146
Administrator tasks....................................................................................147
User tasks.................................................................................................147
Managing user accounts.................................................................................. 147
Creating user accounts.............................................................................. 148
Character restrictions for user names and passwords................................... 149
Changing user passwords...........................................................................151
Changing user permissions.........................................................................152
Enabling or Disabling user accounts............................................................ 153
Deleting user accounts...............................................................................154
Releasing a user lockout............................................................................ 154
Managing user groups.....................................................................................155
Roles........................................................................................................ 155
Built-in groups, roles, and resource groups..................................................156
Verifying the roles available to a user group................................................ 158
Checking if a role is available to a user group.............................................. 158
Creating a new user group......................................................................... 159
Changing a user group name..................................................................... 160
5
Changing user group permissions............................................................... 160
Changing assigned resource groups............................................................ 161
Deleting a user group................................................................................ 161
Using an authentication server and authorization server.................................... 162
Authentication server protocols...................................................................163
Authorization server requirements.............................................................. 164
Connecting two authentication servers........................................................ 164
Connecting authentication and authorization servers....................................165
Naming a user group in Device Manager - Storage Navigator........................165
Creating configuration files.............................................................................. 166
Creating an LDAP configuration file.............................................................166
Creating a RADIUS configuration file........................................................... 169
Creating a Kerberos configuration file..........................................................172
User Administration for NAS Manager.................................................................... 176
Administrator types and responsibilities............................................................ 176
Adding an SMU user (an administrator)............................................................ 177
Changing the password for a currently logged in user........................................180
Changing your own password.....................................................................181
Changing another user's password..............................................................182
Changing an SMU user profile.......................................................................... 184
SMU user authentication..................................................................................187
Active Directory user authentication............................................................188
Using Transport Layer Security (TLS) with Active Directory authentication..... 188
Configuring Active Directory servers............................................................189
Configuring Active Directory groups............................................................ 192
User authentication through RADIUS servers (HNAS server only).................. 196
Displaying list of RADIUS servers................................................................ 197
Adding a RADIUS server............................................................................ 198
Displaying details of RADIUS server............................................................ 200
5 Setting up security........................................................................ 203

Working with certificates.......................................................................................204
Managing HCS certificates............................................................................... 204
Registering HCS certificates........................................................................204
Deleting HCS certificates............................................................................ 204
Managing SSL certificates................................................................................ 205
Flow of SSL communication settings........................................................... 205
Creating a keypair..................................................................................... 206
Obtaining a signed certificate..................................................................... 208
Verifying and releasing an SSL certificate passphrase................................... 209
Converting SSL certificates to PKCS#12 format............................................210
Updating a signed certificate...................................................................... 210
Notes on updating a signed certificate for the service processor....................211
Returning the certificate to default..............................................................211
Selecting a cipher suite.............................................................................. 212
Problems with website security certificates.................................................. 213
Updating the certificate files............................................................................ 213
Configuring SMU security (NAS module only)..........................................................215
6
6 Alert notifications.......................................................................... 217
Viewing alert notifications..................................................................................... 218
Configuring alert notifications................................................................................218
General settings..............................................................................................219
Email settings................................................................................................. 220
Syslog settings................................................................................................220
SNMP settings................................................................................................ 222
Sending test messages......................................................................................... 222
Sending a test email message..........................................................................223
Example of a test email message................................................................223
Sending a test Syslog message........................................................................ 223
Sending a test SNMP trap................................................................................ 224
Using the Windows event log................................................................................ 224
Monitoring failure information in the Windows event log.................................... 224
Viewing the Windows event log....................................................................... 225
Output example of the failure information.........................................................225
7 License keys................................................................................. 229

Overview............................................................................................................. 230
License key types................................................................................................. 230
Using the permanent key.................................................................................230
Using the term key..........................................................................................231
Using the temporary key................................................................................. 231
Using the emergency key................................................................................ 231
Cautions on license capacities in license-related windows........................................ 232
Managing licenses................................................................................................ 232
Installing block and file licenses using NAS Manager..........................................233
Adding a license key.................................................................................. 233
Installing block licenses using maintenance utility..............................................235
Enabling a license........................................................................................... 235
Disabling a license.......................................................................................... 235
Removing a software license............................................................................236
Removing a Data Retention Utility license......................................................... 236
Examples of license information....................................................................... 237
License key expiration...........................................................................................238
8 Configuring audit logs....................................................................239

Audit log settings................................................................................................. 240
Setting up a syslog server................................................................................240
Exporting an audit log..................................................................................... 241
Send test message to syslog server..................................................................242
9 Managing storage system reports................................................... 243

About storage system reports................................................................................244
Viewing a Device Manager - Storage Navigator report............................................. 244
Viewing a report in the Reports window............................................................245
Creating a configuration report........................................................................ 245
Deleting a configuration report.........................................................................245
Collecting dump files using the Dump tool .............................................................246
7
A Raidinf command reference (obtaining configuration reports and tier
relocation logs)............................................................................. 249
raidinf command list and command description.......................................................250
raidinf -login........................................................................................................ 251
raidinf add report................................................................................................. 252
raidinf delete report..............................................................................................253
raidinf download report.........................................................................................254
raidinf get reportinfo.............................................................................................255
raidinf add relocationlog........................................................................................256
raidinf download relocationlog...............................................................................257
raidinf delete relocationlog.................................................................................... 258
raidinf get relocationloginfo...................................................................................258
raidinf -logout...................................................................................................... 259
raidinf -h............................................................................................................. 260
B Storage configuration reports......................................................... 261

Reports in table view............................................................................................ 262
CHAP Users report.......................................................................................... 262
Disk Boards report.......................................................................................... 263
Host Groups / iSCSI Targets report...................................................................264
Hosts report................................................................................................... 265
Logical Devices report..................................................................................... 266
LUNs report....................................................................................................268
MP Units report...............................................................................................268
MP Unit Details report..................................................................................... 269
Parity Groups report........................................................................................270
Physical Devices report....................................................................................271
Ports report.................................................................................................... 273
Power Consumption report.............................................................................. 275
Spare Drives report......................................................................................... 276
SSD Endurance report..................................................................................... 277
Storage System Summary report......................................................................278
Reports in graphical view...................................................................................... 282
Cache Memories report................................................................................... 283
Channel Boards report.....................................................................................285
Physical View report........................................................................................289
CSV files.............................................................................................................. 295
AllConf.csv......................................................................................................295
CacheInfo.csv.................................................................................................296
ChapUserInfo.csv............................................................................................296
ChaStatus.csv.................................................................................................297
DeviceEquipInfo.csv........................................................................................ 297
DkaInfo.csv.................................................................................................... 298
DkaStatus.csv.................................................................................................298
DkcInfo.csv.................................................................................................... 298
DkuTempAveInfo.csv.......................................................................................299
DkuTempInfo.csv............................................................................................ 300
DkuTempMaxInfo.csv...................................................................................... 302
DkuTempMinInfo.csv.......................................................................................303
ELunInfo.csv...................................................................................................304
8
EnvMonInfo.csv.............................................................................................. 306
FcSpNameInfo.csv.......................................................................................... 307
FcSpPortInfo.csv............................................................................................. 307
HduInfo.csv....................................................................................................308
IscsiHostInfo.csv.............................................................................................308
IscsiPortInfo.csv............................................................................................. 309
IscsiTargetInfo.csv.......................................................................................... 310
JnlInfo.csv......................................................................................................311
LdevCapaInfo.csv............................................................................................311
LdevCountInfo.csv.......................................................................................... 312
LdevInfo.csv...................................................................................................312
LdevStatus.csv................................................................................................315
LPartition.csv..................................................................................................315
LunInfo.csv.................................................................................................... 316
LunPortInfo.csv...............................................................................................317
MicroVersion.csv............................................................................................. 318
MlcEnduranceInfo.csv......................................................................................319
ModePerLpr.csv...............................................................................................320
MpPathStatus.csv............................................................................................320
MpPcbStatus.csv.............................................................................................321
PcbRevInfo.csv............................................................................................... 321
PdevCapaInfo.csv........................................................................................... 322
PdevInfo.csv...................................................................................................322
PdevStatus.csv............................................................................................... 324
PECBInfo.csv.................................................................................................. 324
PkInfo.csv...................................................................................................... 324
PpInfo.csv...................................................................................................... 326
SMfundat.csv..................................................................................................326
SsdDriveInfo.csv............................................................................................. 327
SsidInfo.csv....................................................................................................327
SysoptInfo.csv................................................................................................ 328
WwnInfo.csv.................................................................................................. 328
Glossary............................................................................................ 331
Index................................................................................................ 351
9
10
Preface
This document provides information and instructions to help you use the
maintenance utility and some of the functions in Device Manager - Storage
Navigator as needed to perform system administration tasks and change
settings for Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform G200, G400, G600, G800 or
Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform F400, F600, F800 storage systems. It
explains the GUI features and provides basic navigation information.
Please read this document carefully to understand how to use the software
described in this manual, and keep a copy for reference.
□ Intended audience
□ Product version
□ Release notes
□ Changes in this revision
□ Related documents
□ Document conventions
□ Conventions for storage capacity values
□ Accessing product documentation
□ Getting help
□ Comments
Preface 11
Intended audience
This document is intended for system administrators, Hitachi Data Systems
representatives, and authorized service providers who are involved in
installing, configuring, and operating Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform G200,
G400, G600, G800 or Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform F400, F600, F800
systems.
Readers of this document should be familiar with the following:

• Data processing and RAID storage systems and their basic functions.
• Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform G200, G400, G600, G800 or Hitachi Virtual
Storage Platform F400, F600, F800 storage systems.
• The operating system and web browser software on the SVP hosting the
Device Manager - Storage Navigator software.
• The Windows 7 operating system and the management software on the
management server.
Product version
This document revision applies to:
• VSP Gx00 models and VSP Fx00 models: firmware 83-04-0x or later
• SVOS 7.0 or later
Release notes
Read the release notes before installing and using this product. They may
contain requirements or restrictions that are not fully described in this
document or updates or corrections to this document. Release notes are
available on Hitachi Data Systems Support Connect: https://
knowledge.hds.com/Documents.
Changes in this revision

• Removed references to unsupported DBF2 drives.
• Updated available tasks in Administration tasks and tools table.
Related documents
The documents below are referenced in this document or contain more
information about the features described in this document.
• Product Overview, MK-92HM8051

• Hitachi Command Suite User Guide, MK-90HC172
• Hitachi Command Suite Installation and Configuration Guide, MK-90HC173
12 Preface
• Hitachi Audit Log User Guide, MK-94HM8028
• Encryption License Key User Guide, MK-92RD8009
• Performance Guide, MK-94HM8012
• Hitachi ShadowImage® User Guide, MK-94HM8021
• Hitachi SNMP Agent User Guide, MK-94HM8015
• Hitachi Device Manager - Storage Navigator Messages, MK-94HM8017
• Hitachi TrueCopy® User Guide, MK-94HM8019
• Hitachi Universal Replicator User Guide, MK-94HM8023
• Global-Active Device User Guide, MK-92RD8072
• Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform G200 Hardware Reference Guide,
MK-94HM8020
• Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform G400, G600 Hardware Reference Guide,
MK-94HM8022
• Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform G800 Hardware Reference Guide,
MK-94HM8026
• Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform F400, F600 Hardware Reference Guide,
MK-94HM8045
• Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform F800 Hardware Reference Guide,
MK-94HM8046
Document conventions
This document uses the following terminology conventions:
Convention Description
• Hitachi Virtual All of the following storage systems:

Storage Platform • Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform G200
Gx00 models • Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform G400
• VSP Gx00 • Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform G600
models • Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform G800
• Hitachi Virtual All of the following storage systems:

Storage Platform • Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform F400
Fx00 models • Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform F600
• VSP Fx00 • Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform F800
models
This document uses the following typographic conventions:
Bold • Indicates text in a window, including window titles, menus, menu options,
buttons, fields, and labels. Example:
Click OK.
• Indicates emphasized words in list items.
Italic • Indicates a document title or emphasized words in text.
Preface 13
• Indicates a variable, which is a placeholder for actual text provided by the

user or for output by the system. Example:
pairdisplay -g group
(For exceptions to this convention for variables, see the entry for angle
brackets.)
Monospace Indicates text that is displayed on screen or entered by the user. Example:
pairdisplay -g oradb
< > angle brackets Indicates variables in the following scenarios:

• Variables are not clearly separated from the surrounding text or from
other variables. Example:
Status-<report-name><file-version>.csv
• Variables in headings.
[ ] square brackets Indicates optional values. Example: [ a | b ] indicates that you can choose a,
b, or nothing.
{ } braces Indicates required or expected values. Example: { a | b } indicates that you
must choose either a or b.
| vertical bar Indicates that you have a choice between two or more options or arguments.
Examples:
[ a | b ] indicates that you can choose a, b, or nothing.
{ a | b } indicates that you must choose either a or b.
This document uses the following icons to draw attention to information:
Icon Label Description
Note Calls attention to important or additional information.
Tip Provides helpful information, guidelines, or suggestions for performing

tasks more effectively.
Caution Warns the user of adverse conditions and/or consequences (for

example, disruptive operations, data loss, or a system crash).
WARNING Warns the user of a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.
Conventions for storage capacity values

Physical storage capacity values (for example, disk drive capacity) are
calculated based on the following values:
14 Preface
Physical capacity unit Value
1 kilobyte (KB) 1,000 (10 3) bytes

1 megabyte (MB) 1,000 KB or 1,0002 bytes
1 gigabyte (GB) 1,000 MB or 1,0003 bytes
1 terabyte (TB) 1,000 GB or 1,0004 bytes
1 petabyte (PB) 1,000 TB or 1,0005 bytes
1 exabyte (EB) 1,000 PB or 1,0006 bytes
Logical capacity values (for example, logical device capacity) are calculated
based on the following values:
Logical capacity unit Value
1 block 512 bytes

1 cylinder Mainframe: 870 KB
Open-systems:
• OPEN-V: 960 KB
• Others: 720 KB
1 KB 1,024 (210) bytes
1 MB 1,024 KB or 1,0242 bytes
1 GB 1,024 MB or 1,0243 bytes
1 TB 1,024 GB or 1,0244 bytes
1 PB 1,024 TB or 1,0245 bytes
1 EB 1,024 PB or 1,0246 bytes
Accessing product documentation

Product user documentation is available on Hitachi Data Systems Support
Connect: https://knowledge.hds.com/Documents. Check this site for the
most current documentation, including important updates that may have
been made after the release of the product.
Getting help
Hitachi Data Systems Support Connect is the destination for technical support
of products and solutions sold by Hitachi Data Systems. To contact technical
support, log on to Hitachi Data Systems Support Connect for contact
information: https://support.hds.com/en_us/contact-us.html.
Hitachi Data Systems Community is a global online community for HDS

customers, partners, independent software vendors, employees, and
prospects. It is the destination to get answers, discover insights, and make
Preface 15
connections. Join the conversation today! Go to community.hds.com,
register, and complete your profile.
Comments
Please send us your comments on this document to [email protected].
Include the document title and number, including the revision level (for
example, -07), and refer to specific sections and paragraphs whenever
possible. All comments become the property of Hitachi Data Systems
Corporation.
Thank you!
16 Preface
1
System administration overview
This chapter provides a high-level view of system administration tasks for the
Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform G200, G400, G600, G800 or Hitachi Virtual
Storage Platform F400, F600, F800 storage systems. It describes:
• Software architecture and access to system administration tools from
management software (Hitachi Storage Advisor and Hitachi Command
Suite).
• System administration tasks for the VSP Gx00 models and VSP Fx00
models storage systems, including some with NAS modules installed to
provide native file functionality (VSP G400, G600, G800).
□ System management architecture
□ Ways to administer the storage system
System administration overview 17

System management architecture
The following figure shows a high-level view of the storage system
management software architecture. It shows the access points that a system
administrator can use to configure and manage the system settings.
Related tasks
• Accessing a storage system without management software on page 58
Ways to administer the storage system

The system administration tasks described in this guide apply to all VSP Gx00
models and Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform F400, F600, F800 storage
systems, including those with NAS modules.
Users with storage systems that do not have NAS modules use Hitachi
Storage Advisor (HSA), Device Manager - Storage Navigator, and the
maintenance utility to administer block operations. If your storage system
18 System administration overview

includes NAS modules, use NAS Manager to administer file operations, and
then use the maintenance utility to verify that the settings are synchronized
with block operations.
For more information about administration tasks for file operations, see the
following documentation:
• Storage Subsystem Administration Guide (MK-92HNAS012)

• Storage System User Administration Guide (MK-92HNAS013)
• File Services Administration Guide Hitachi Unified NAS Module and Hitachi
NAS Platform File Services Administration Guide (MK-92HNAS006)
• Server and Cluster Administration Guide (MK-92HNAS010)
• System Access Guide (MK-92HNAS014)
For more information about HSA, see the following documentation:
• Hitachi Storage Advisor Getting Started Guide (MK-94HSA001)

• Hitachi Storage Advisor RESTful API Reference Guide (MK-94HSA003)
• Hitachi Storage Advisor User Guide (MK-94HSA004)
You can also perform some administration tasks from a command line. For
information, see Command Control Interface User and Reference Guide
(MK-90RD7010) and the Command Control Interface Command Reference
(MK-90RD7009), which you can access from the Documentation page of NAS
Manager.
Overview of Storage Advisor

Hitachi Storage Advisor is a unified software management tool that reduces
the complexity of managing storage systems by simplifying the setup,
management, and maintenance of storage resources.
Storage Advisor reduces infrastructure management complexities and

enables a new simplified approach to managing storage infrastructures. It
provides intuitive graphical user interfaces and recommended configuration
practices to streamline system configurations and storage management
operations. You can leverage Storage Advisor to easily provision new storage
capacity for business applications without requiring in-depth knowledge of
the underlying infrastructure resource details. It provides centralized
management while reducing the number of steps to configure, optimize, and
deploy new infrastructure resources.
Some of the key Storage Advisor capabilities include:

• Simplified user experience for managing infrastructure resources. Visual
aids enable easy viewing and interpretation of key management
information, such as used and available capacity, and guide features to
help quickly determine appropriate next steps for a given management
task.
• Recommended system configurations to speed initial storage system setup
and accelerate new infrastructure resource deployments.

• Integrated configuration workflows with Hitachi recommended practices to
streamline storage provisioning and data protection tasks.
• Common, centralized management for supported storage systems.
• A REST-based API to provide full management programmability and control
in addition to unified file-based management support.
• Storage Advisor enables automated SAN zoning during volume attach and
detach. Optional auto-zoning eliminates the need for repetitive zoning
tasks to be performed on the switch.
Unified management of block storage and file storage

Storage Advisor can be used to onboard and configure both block storage and
file storage if NAS modules are included in the chassis of a supported storage
system.
Understand block and file storage

• Block storage:
In block storage, volumes of storage are created. A server-based operating
system can connect to each block of storage and control it as an individual
hard drive. Each storage block can be individually formatted with the
required file system, such as NTFS or VMFS. Block storage systems are
typically deployed in a Storage Area Network (SAN) environment.
From the dashboard of Storage Advisor, you can discover, register, and
onboard a block storage system.
• File storage:
Storage Advisor supports unified onboarding and configuration of file
storage in the form of NAS modules.
If a supported storage system includes NAS modules, the file storage is
automatically added with the block storage. Then file pools and other file
resources can be created in the Storage Advisor interface or by using the
API.
Adding block and file storage together

Storage Advisor enables you to add block and file storage in a single step.
The only requirements are the SVP IP address, user name, and password.
When the file storage is added, the cluster is automatically registered in
Storage Advisor.
Unified configuration
Once a storage system is onboarded, all block and file resources can be
configured and managed from a single Storage System page. File pool
creation workflow incorporates best practices that simplify workflow and
enhance usability. The file pools are used to easily create virtual file servers,
file systems, and shares and exports. File system creation automatically
mounts and formats the new file system.

Unified reporting
Capacity is reported for all aggregated storage systems in the dashboard.
Capacity is also displayed for each storage system in the Storage System
detail page.
Three views of capacity are available: file only, block only, or a unified view of
block and file.
Dashboard
Once a storage system has been onboarded to Storage Advisor, the
dashboard displays as soon as you log in. The Storage Advisor dashboard
provides the tools to easily configure, manage, and monitor storage systems.
From the Storage Advisor dashboard, you can access managed resources and
provision storage in the context of a given storage system or server. The
provided templates and configurations make it possible to quickly and easily
provision a storage system, without knowing the details of the underlying
hardware and software.
The top navigation menu provides access to Jobs and Monitoring pages. Links
to the following settings are available, based on the user role:
• Tier Management
• Security Settings
• SNMP Settings
• Change Local Password
The dashboard has three distinct sections:

• Resource side panel: The left pane provides quick access to review the
configuration of your storage systems, servers, and fabric switches. If the
storage system includes NAS modules, virtual file servers can also be
accessed.
• Alert tiles: Four alert tiles represent various aspects of the health of the
storage system. When Storage Advisor detects a problem with a storage
system environment, a number appears in the tile. The number indicates
the number of alerts for that aspect of the storage system. Click the alert
tile to go directly to a summary of the problems.
• Resource summary: The middle area, with the information gauge,
provides a summary of the capacity allocated from the registered storage
systems.
Resource side panel

The resource side panel enables quick access to storage systems and to
servers.
• Click Storage Systems to view and add storage systems.
• Click Servers to view and add servers.
• Click Fabric Switches to view and add fabric switches.
• Click Virtual File Servers to view and add virtual file servers. Displays if
the storage system includes NAS modules.
Alert tiles
Across the top of the dashboard are tiles that display alerts for storage
capacity, data protection, jobs, and hardware.
If a tile includes a circled check mark, there are no alerts for that part of the
storage system, and everything is functioning normally. A number in a red
circle within a tile indicates one or more problems with that part of the
storage system.
You can click a tile for Capacity Alerts, Data Protection Alerts, or Hardware
Alerts to view the summary for the category in the Monitoring tab.
The Jobs Alert tile displays the number of jobs in the last 24 hours with a
status of Failed or Success with Errors.
Resource summary
The circular information gauge, which shows information about the available
storage.
• If the storage systems include file storage, you can click Block or File
next to the information gauge to view a legend and capacity values for
either type of storage. Click Unified to view a legend and capacity values
for both block and file.
• For block-only storage systems, the numerical data for each capacity
parameter in the ring is displayed to the left of the information gauge.

• The number in the center of the rings shows the total usable capacity of all
storage systems. The total usable capacity is the capacity available from
all the parity groups across all storage systems.
If you do not have any parity groups configured on the storage system,
this number is zero and all other data points in the capacity visualization
are zero.
• The white, middle ring indicates the sum of all pool capacity available
across all storage systems. The light grey indicates the parity group
capacity that is not yet allocated to pools.
If you do not have any pools created, the white ring indicates zero. As you
create pools, this number increases to eventually become equal to the
total usable capacity when you have consumed all parity groups for pool
creation.
• The black, outer ring indicates the subscribed capacity, which is the sum of
all volumes created on storage pools. As you start creating volumes on
storage pools, the subscription starts to increase.
If volume allocation results in oversubscription, a thick line extends out to
the right from the top of the ring. This extended line is a key visual
indicator that helps track allocation oversubscription.
• The medium green ring indicates the storage utilization. As you create
volumes on the pools and start consuming capacity, the utilization of thin
pools increases and you will notice the value in green starting to increase.
If the Thin Used (medium green ring) starts to increase and get closer to
your total pool capacity, that indicates that the pools may be starting to fill
up.
• Physical capacity allocated to file pools is indicated by medium blue in the
File view and by light blue in the Unified view.
• File pool utilization is indicated by light blue in the File view and by light
green in the Unified view.
• File over-commit capacity is represented by dark gray.
If you notice the total pool capacity (white) and Thin used (light green)
values getting closer to total capacity, you may be running out of storage on
one or more storage systems and may need to add disks to increase storage
capacity. Review the information gauge for each storage system to identify
which storage system needs additional capacity.
The right side of the resource summary offers alternate views:

• Protection: is the breakdown of data protection metrics including a
representation of types of protected, unprotected, and secondary capacity
and gauge of the total percentage of capacity protected.
• Tier Breakdown: is a visualization of the amount of each tier that is
allocated to pools.

Analyzing data in the dashboard
The dashboard is a visual display of the important information needed to
analyze the overall capacity utilization and health of your storage system. It
provides visual indicators such as total usable capacity, current utilization,
data protection summary, and monitoring alerts.
Analyzing data shown in alert tiles

The alert tiles collectively present the health of the storage system
environment. In one glance you can verify that the overall health is sound if
you see no alerts on the alert tiles. This means that there are no capacity or
hardware issues in the environment, no failed jobs in the last 24 hours and
that the data protection is working without any issues.
If there are any alerts, you can drill down to the relevant alert page to
investigate the cause. Storage Advisor provides alerts for capacity utilization,
hardware, data protection, and jobs status.
Analyzing data in the information gauge

The information gauge provides a visual indication of the total capacity of all
storage systems managed by Storage Advisor.
The capacity indicated in the center of the ring is the total usable capacity
available via the configured parity groups. After you add a storage system
and configure parity groups, the total capacity indicator will show the
capacity from the newly added storage system. The Thin Used capacity
(green ring) indicates the total capacity that is currently being used. If the
usage is around 70-80% of the total capacity, you may receive capacity alerts
based on the thresholds set by your storage administrator. The default
thresholds are 70% and 80%, and can be changed during pool creation.
The white ring that provides a sum of capacities of all pools in the systems
should be closer to 100% capacity. This would mean that you are using your
entire parity group capacity by allocating it to pools. If the Thin Used capacity
in green ring nears the total capacity (white ring) then you may run out of
pool capacity soon. In such a case, expand the pool to consume more
capacity.

If you notice that the total pool capacity (white) and Thin used (light green)
values are getting closer to total capacity, you may be running out of disk
capacity on one or more storage systems and would need to add disk space
to increase storage capacity. Review the information gauge for each storage
system to identify which storage system needs additional capacity.
Capacity subscription beyond the total available capacity should not be an

issue if your thin capacity utilization is well within the total capacity.
Analyzing data protection metrics

The balance of your protected primary volumes and secondary volumes
depends on the number of copies you have chosen to maintain, and also on
the type of the data protection technology being used. If you choose to set
aside more volumes for data protection, then the overall usable capacity may
be affected. On the other hand, if you have a large amount of unprotected
data, you may want to consider data protection options.
Inventory and resource information

The inventory pages display details about the storage system resources in
Storage Advisor. These resources include storage systems, servers, ports,
and pools, volumes, parity groups, external parity groups (if the storage
system has external storage), and replication groups. If the storage system
has NAS modules, resources will also include file pools, virtual file servers,
file systems, and shares and exports. Common actions can be performed on
the inventory pages, such as the following:
• You can select one or more resources and delete them.
When you delete a storage system, you disassociate it from Storage
Advisor. When you delete a pool or volume, the resource is de-provisioned
and removed from the storage system.
• When a parity group is deleted, it is removed from the storage system and
the disks used to create the parity group are no longer in use. You can
delete the parity group if you want to reconfigure the storage system with
some other RAID configuration or simply decommission the array. If the
parity group is in use by a pool, the parity group deletion will fail.

• You can select one or more of the same type of resources and update their
properties. The properties that can be updated depend on the type of
resource.
• You can click a particular resource to see more details about it on its
resource detail page.
○ When you delete a block pool, the parity groups used by the pool will no
longer be in In Use status. The pool volumes on these parity groups will
be formatted and the parity group will eventually be in Available status.
○ When you delete a volume, the pool subscription will go down. Volume
deletion will fail if the volume participates in data protection or is
attached to a server.
○ When you delete a file pool, the underlying related block pool is deleted.
○ When you delete a server, the server is disassociated from Storage
Advisor. You will no longer be able to provision volumes to the server
(or its WWNs). Server deletion will fail if it has volumes attached to it.
Device Manager - Storage Navigator

Device Manager - Storage Navigator (HDvM - SN) is the element manager for
managing block operations on VSP G200, G400, G600, G800 and VSP F400,
F600, F800 storage systems. It is a factory-installed application that runs on
the service processor (SVP) connected to the storage system.
You can access Device Manager - Storage Navigator from the management
software to perform additional system administration tasks on your storage
system besides those available in the maintenance utility. In addition, you
can easily access advanced storage configuration options while performing
management operations with the management software.
In addition to the information in this guide, the HDvM - SN online help has
procedures for setting up and managing the storage system.

Maintenance utility
The maintenance utility allows you to perform administration tasks on VSP
Gx00 models or VSP Fx00 models. You can access this tool from either HDvM
- SN, SMU, or the management software.
You can use the maintenance utility to configure settings such as licenses,
syslog, alerts, and network configuration. As shown in the following figure,
these settings are available from the Administration navigation tree.

The maintenance utility online help provides procedural information for
supported storage system administration tasks. Links to storage system
tasks, search functions, and a glossary are included.
Note: Self-service features that are used to install and remove hardware
components and to update the firmware are currently available for use only
by customer support personnel or by authorized service providers.
NAS Manager
NAS Manager is the element manager for NAS modules. It is a factory-
installed application running on the NAS module.
NAS Manager provides a web-based interface for managing stand-alone or

clustered servers and their attached storage systems. This tool allows you to
perform most administrative tasks from any client on the network using a
network browser. To access NAS Manager, point your browser to the following
URL: https://<unified-management-IP-address>:20443. You can also
access NAS Manager from a command line interface. For information, see the
Command Line Reference, which is accessible through the Documentation
page of NAS Manager or the NAS Platform System Access Guide.

2
Preparing your management software
Use the information in this chapter to prepare the management software you
want to use to administer your storage system.
□ Installing Storage Advisor
□ Using Device Manager - Storage Navigator
□ Onboarding and configuring a storage system
□ Using the maintenance utility
□ Accessing a storage system without management software
Preparing your management software 31

Installing Storage Advisor
Storage Advisor is deployed on a virtual machine and accessed by a client
computer. Review the minimum requirements before installing.
Installing Storage Advisor with the application installer

You can install Storage Advisor on Linux, where Docker v1.11.2 is already
installed.
In order to enable maximum control of the environment, the application

installer does not include Docker, an operating system, or a VM.
Before you begin
The following are required:

• Root access to the operating system where Storage Advisor will be
installed.
• Docker v1.11.2 installed in a Linux environment.
• The recommended available space on the server at the time of installation
is 100 GB. This is due to the additional capacity required for the installer
file and Docker requirements for image installation. After installation is
complete, the required space is reduced to 40 GB.
• 16 GB RAM
Note: It is recommended that the location where Storage Advisor is installed

not include any other applications.
Procedure
1. On the Linux environment, configure the network interface that will be

used to access Storage Advisor.
Storage Advisor supports user interface and API access via an IPv4
address.
2. Copy the tar file installer.tar.gz from the installation media to any
folder in the Linux environment and unzip it.
3. Navigate to the installer script: HSA-2.1.0.xx-all-installer and
execute it.
At the prompts, enter the following:
1. Enter the username for the installer: Enter sysadmin
2. Enter the <users> password: Enter sysadmin
3. Enter host's IP: Enter the IP address that will be used to access
Storage Advisor. This IP address will also be used for SNMP
communications into the storage system.
The installation may take a few minutes. At completion, messages will

indicate the following:
32 Preparing your management software

• The application was successfully added.
• The API is ready.
• Any pre-existing app manager containers have been removed.
4. Set the SNMP IP address in Virtual Appliance Manager:
a. Open a browser and enter https://ip-address/vam in the address
bar.
• User name: sysadmin
• Password: sysadmin
b. In the Network tab, enter the SNMP IP address for the storage
system.
Troubleshooting the installation

If the installation fails, try the following:
• If the installation fails with the (401) error code, the user name and
password specified by the installer was incorrect. Retry the installation
and ensure that sysadmin is entered for both user name and password.
• Delete all Storage Advisor containers and images and start the installation
again.
• Check the Docker logs.
• Consult Docker documentation for more information on how to perform
these actions.
If the installation produces any warnings, they may point to the cause of the
problem. Correct any issues the installer identifies, delete any Storage
Advisor containers and images and start the installation again.
Next steps
Change the root password.
If required, you can generate and install a signed SSL certificate.
Installing Storage Advisor with the virtual appliance
Installing Hitachi Storage Advisor in a DHCP environment

If your environment includes DHCP servers, you can use the Virtual Appliance
Manager to set up your Storage Advisor server.
Before you begin
The initial setup of a discovered supported storage system has been

completed by an authorized service provider.

Procedure
1. From the installation media, deploy the Storage Advisor OVF to the ESXi
host.
2. Start the Storage Advisor virtual machine.
3. In the vSphere® client, wait for the System status to change to Online.
The status is just below the banner in the virtual machine console.
*****************************************
*****Hitachi Storage Advisor*****
*****************************************
System status: Online
Please wait for system to be online before using any
services.
4. Open a browser and enter https://ip-address/vam in the address bar.
User name: service

Password: Chang3Me!
5. Change your password.
a. Click and select Change password.
b. Enter your new password.
6. From the Virtual Appliance Manager menu, click Network to configure
the network settings.
a. (Optional) Enter the IP range in the Docker Subnet field in the

format ip-address\range. This is the specified range used by Storage
Advisor.

Note: If your data center is using the IP address scheme
172.17.*.*, make sure you provide another IP range that is not
currently used in your environment.
b. Set the host name for the virtual machine.

c. Set DHCP to On.
d. Enter the IP address of the Storage Advisor server.
e. Set Automatic DNS to On or Off.
If you set this to Off, enter the IP address of at least one DNS server.
f. Click Submit.
7. (Optional) From the Virtual Appliance Manager menu, click Time and add
Network Time Protocol (NTP) servers to the virtual machine.
Adding NTP servers verifies that the Storage Advisor servers are
synchronized with the storage system environment.
a. Click + to add a field for an NTP Server.

b. Enter the host name of the NTP server.
c. Click Submit.
Next steps
• Change the root password.
• Log in to Storage Advisor and onboard a storage system.
• Get a digitally signed SSL certificate from a trusted certificate authority
(CA) by sending the CA a certificate signing request (CSR). After you
obtain the signed certificate, you can import it to the server. By default,
the Storage Advisor installation package comes with a self-signed
certificate that you can use to initially log in to Storage Advisor.
Installing Hitachi Storage Advisor in a static environment

If you do not have a DHCP server, use the command line interface to indicate
the static IP address of the Storage Advisor server.

Before you begin
Procedure
1. From the installation media, deploy the Storage Advisor OVF to the ESXi
host.
2. Start the Storage Advisor virtual machine.
3. In the vSphere® client, wait for the System status to change to Online.
The status is just below the banner in the virtual machine console.
*****************************************
*****Hitachi Storage Advisor*****
*****************************************
System status: Online
Please wait for system to be online before using any
services.
4. Press Alt+F2.
5. Log in with the service account.
User name: service

Password: Chang3Me!
6. Enter the command ip-change.
The Change IP Address Utility opens.
7. Enter your settings at the prompts.
8. Reboot the VM to ensure that it has the IP address.
9. Open a browser and enter https://ip-address/vam in the address bar.
User name: service

Password: Chang3Me!
10. Change your password.
a. Click and select Change password.
b. Enter your new password.
11. From the Virtual Appliance Manager menu, click Network to configure
the network settings.

a. (Optional) Enter the IP range in the Docker Subnet field in the
format ip-address\range. This is the specified range used by Storage
Advisor.
Note: If your data center is using the IP address scheme

172.17.*.*, make sure you provide another IP range that is not
currently used in your environment.
b. Set the host name for the virtual machine.

c. Set DHCP to Off.
d. Enter the IP address of the Storage Advisor server.
e. Set Automatic DNS to On or Off.
If you set this to Off, enter the IP address of at least one DNS server.
f. Click Submit.
12. (Optional) From the Virtual Appliance Manager menu, click Time and add
Network Time Protocol (NTP) servers to the virtual machine.
Adding NTP servers verifies that the Storage Advisor servers are
synchronized with the storage system environment.

a. Click + to add a field for an NTP Server.
b. Enter the host name of the NTP server.
c. Click Submit.
Next steps
• Change the root password.
• Log in to Storage Advisor and onboard a storage system.
• Get a digitally signed SSL certificate from a trusted certificate authority
(CA) by sending the CA a certificate signing request (CSR). After you
obtain the signed certificate, you can import it to the server. By default,
the Storage Advisor installation package comes with a self-signed
certificate that you can use to initially log in to Storage Advisor.
Changing the root password immediately after installation

Change the root password immediately after installing Storage Advisor.
Procedure
1. Either open an SSH connection to the VM or open the VMware console

and press Alt+F2 to reach the console.
2. Login as root account using the default password:
3kO$Pe9dJyjy29HAi2mS
3. Run the command passwd root in the terminal.
4. Enter the new password when prompted.
Logging in to Storage Advisor

Log in and verify that the installation is successful by accessing the Storage
Advisor web interface from a browser.
Procedure
1. Open a web browser.

2. Enter the URL for Storage Advisor in the address bar:
https://ip-address:port-number
where:
• ip-address is the IP address of the Storage Advisor server.
• port-number is the port number of the Storage Advisor server. The
default port number is 443.
3. In the login window, log in to Storage Advisor.
User name: sysadmin

Password: sysadmin
Logging in when Storage Advisor is not available

For the Virtual Storage Platform F400, F600, F800, Virtual Storage Platform
G200, G400, G600, G800, and Virtual Storage Platform G1000 storage
systems, if Storage Advisor is not available and you have an administrator
login account with the required permissions, you can log in directly to Device
Manager - Storage Navigator.
Before you begin

• You are managing VSP Fx00 models, VSP Gx00 models, VSP G1000, VSP
G1500, or VSP F1500 storage systems.
• You must have an administrator login account with the required
permissions. For information about creating user accounts in Hitachi
Device Manager - Storage Navigator, see the System Administrator Guide
for your storage system.
Procedure
1. Start a web browser.

2. Enter the URL:
• For VSP G1000, VSP G1500, or VSP F1500 storage systems, enter:
https://IP-address-or-host-name-of-the-SVP/sanproject/
emergency.do
• For VSP G200 storage systems, enter: https://IP-address-or-
host-name-of-the-SVP/dev/storage/8320004XXXXX/emergency.do
(where the model number is '8320004' and '4XXXXX' indicates the
system serial number)
• For VSP G400, G600 storage systems and VSP F400, F600 storage
systems, enter: https://IP-address-or-host-name-of-the-
SVP/dev/storage/8340004XXXXX/emergency.do (where the model
number is '8340004' and '4XXXXX' indicates the system serial
number)
• For VSP G800 and VSP F800 storage systems, enter: https://IP-
address-or-host-name-of-the-SVP/dev/storage/8360004XXXXX/
emergency.do (where the model number is '8360004' and '4XXXXX'
indicates the system serial number)

3. The following actions might be required to open the login dialog box,
depending on your environment:
• If a message indicates that the enhanced security configuration is
enabled on the computer, select In the future, do not show this
message and click OK.
• If the SVP is set to support SSL-encrypted communication and security
messages appear, make sure the certificate is correct and follow the
instructions in the dialog box.
• If a messages indicates that certain web sites are blocked, make sure
you have added the SVP to the trusted sites zone.
4. Enter the user ID and password for the account.
5. Click Log In.
6. If the Security Information dialog box appears, click Yes.
7. If an Adobe Flash Player local storage area pop-up dialog box appears,
click Allow to open the Device Manager - Storage Navigator main
window. The cache function of Flash Player optimizes the process of
Device Manager - Storage Navigator. Denying the request might reduce
processing speed.
Result
You are successfully logged in to Device Manager - Storage Navigator.
Note: If the login process fails three times by using the same user ID, Device
Manager - Storage Navigator will stop responding for one minute. This is for
security purposes and is not a system failure. Wait, and then try again.
Generating and installing a signed SSL certificate

By default, a self-signed certificate is used by the server. SSL certificates are
used to verify the user's identity and to enhance security on the server. You
can get a digitally signed SSL certificate from a trusted certificate authority
(CA) by sending a certificate signing request (CSR). After you obtain the
signed certificate, you can import it to the server.
The following is a sample procedure for generating and installing a signed

SSL certificate. The process of obtaining a certificate may be different within
each organization.
Procedure
1. Open the virtual machine console and log in with the service account.
2. Start the openssl program:
openssl req –nodes –x509 -newkey rsa:2048 -sha1 -keyout /etc/
nginx/certificates/server.key -out /etc/nginx/certificates/
server.crt
The system returns the message Generating a 2048 bit RSA

private key.
3. Provide the information as prompted.

• Country Name (two-letter code)
• State or Province Name (two-letter code)
• Locality name (City)
• Organization Name (Company)
• Organizational Unit Name (Section or department)
• Common Name (Your name or the server host name)
• Email Address
4. When you receive the CRT file, send it to a certificate authority to obtain
an SSL certificate.
If you need help with this step, consult with your Hitachi Data Systems
representative or authorized service provider.
5. Open a browser and enter the Virtual Appliance Manager URL in the
address bar.
For example, https://ip-address/vam
6. Click Advanced.
7. Click the Certificate Settings tab.
8. Import the certificate into the server.
a. Open the signed certificate (received from the certificate authority) in
a text editor.
b. Open the private key file (generated in step 2) in a text editor.
c. Copy the certificate file contents into the Certificate text box.
d. Copy the private key file contents into the Private Key text box.
e. Click Submit.
Using Device Manager - Storage Navigator

To configure the storage system using Hitachi Device Manager - Storage
Navigator, set up a client computer, and then log in to Hitachi Device
Setting up a management client

The Device Manager - Storage Navigator administrator is responsible for
setting up the web client on management clients. This includes the following:
• Ensuring that management clients can access and use Device Manager -
Storage Navigator.
• Configuring the server if you use a physical or virtual server running
Windows as a management client.
Requirements for management clients

This topic explains the requirements for management clients on supported
versions of Windows and UNIX/Linux operating systems.

General requirements
• An SVP, required for system maintenance, must be installed on the storage
system. Device Manager - Storage Navigator connects to the SVP through
a TCP/IP network.
• Several storage systems can be managed by one management client.
Device Manager - Storage Navigator must be set up for each storage
system.
• A maximum of 32 management clients (Device Manager - Storage
Navigator) can access the same SVP concurrently.
Requirements for Windows-based computers
Note: The combinations of operating system, architecture, browser, Java

Runtime Environment, and Adobe Flash Player described below are fixed
requirements. Using other combinations or versions might produce
unpredictable results such as the inability to operate program windows.
Therefore, contact customer support to use other combinations or versions.
To see the latest platform listed in the applicable product documents, visit our
web site from the following URL: https://knowledge.hds.com/Documents.
Hardware requirements
Item Requirement
Processor (CPU) Pentium 4 640 3.2 GHz or better
(Recommended: Core2Duo E6540 2.33 GHz or better)

Memory (RAM) 2 GB or more
Recommended: 3 GB
Available storage space 500 MB or more
Monitor True Color 32-bit or better
Resolution: 1280 x 1024 or better

Keyboard and mouse You cannot use the mouse wheel feature.
Ethernet LAN card for TCP/IP network 100BASE-TX
1000BASE-T
Software requirements
Java Runtime
Operating system1 Architecture Browser Adobe Flash Player2
Environment (JRE)
Windows 7 SP1 32 bit or 64 bit Internet Explorer 11.03 JRE 7.0 Update 67 14.0
Windows 8.1 32 bit or 64 bit Internet Explorer 11.03 JRE 7.0 Update 67 14.0
Google Chrome 48.0 or JRE 8.0 Update 71 20.0
later

Java Runtime
Operating system1 Architecture Browser Adobe Flash Player2
Environment (JRE)
Windows 8.1 64 bit Internet Explorer 11.03 JRE 7.0 20.0
64 bit Internet Explorer 11.03 JRE 7.0 21.0

64 bit Google Chrome JRE 7.0 or later Installed as a plug-in
of Web browser
Windows 10 64 bit Internet Explorer 11.03 JRE 7.0 20.0
64 bit Internet Explorer 11.03 JRE 7.0 21.0
64 bit JRE 7.0 or later Installed as a plug-in
of Web browser
Windows Server 64 bit Internet Explorer 11.03 JRE 7.0 Update 67 14.0
2008 R2 (SP1)
2012 SP1
2012 R2 SP1
Notes:
1. If the SVP supports Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6), you can specify IPv6 addresses.
2. Use Adobe Flash Player with the same architecture (32 bit or 64 bit) as the browser.
3. Only the latest version of Internet Explorer active on each OS is supported, according to Microsoft support
policy.
Note: To use Device Manager - Storage Navigator secondary windows, first

install Java Runtime Environment (JRE).
Requirements for UNIX/Linux-based computers
Note: The combinations of operating system, architecture, browser, Java

Runtime Environment, and Adobe Flash Player described below are fixed
requirements. Using other combinations or versions might produce
unpredictable results such as the inability to operate program windows.
Therefore, contact customer support to use other combinations or versions.
To see the latest platform listed in the applicable product documents, visit our
web site from the following URL: https://knowledge.hds.com/Documents.
Hardware requirements
Item Requirement
Processor (CPU) Pentium 4 640 3.2 GHz or better
(Recommended: Core2Duo E6540 2.33 GHz or better)

Memory (RAM) 2 GB or more
Recommended: 3 GB
Available storage space 500 MB or more

Item Requirement
Monitor Resolution: 1280 x 1024 or better
Keyboard and mouse You cannot use the mouse wheel feature.
Ethernet LAN card for TCP/IP network 100BASE-TX
1000BASE-T
Software requirements
Java Runtime
Operating system Architecture Browser1 Adobe Flash Player2
Environment (JRE)
Solaris 10 32 bit Firefox 3.6.28 3 JRE 6.0 Update 20 10.3

Firefox 31 JRE 7.0 Update 67 11.2
Red Hat Enterprise 64 bit Firefox 3.6.28 3 JRE 6.0 Update 20 10.3
Linux AS version 6.2
Firefox 35 JRE 7.0 Update 67 11.2
Notes:
1. IPv6 HTTPS connections from Firefox are not supported.
2. Use Adobe Flash Player with the same architecture (32 bit or 64 bit) as the browser.
3. Device Manager - Storage Navigator supports Firefox 3.6.28, but the maintenance utility does not.
Note: To use Device Manager - Storage Navigator secondary windows, first

install Java Runtime Environment (JRE).
Setting up TCP/IP for a firewall

To connect the management client and the SVP through a firewall, configure
the firewall so that the TCP/IP port for the protocol you use becomes
available.
When attaching Device Manager - Storage Navigator to multiple storage

systems, the installer must log in to the SVP of each storage system using
separate Device Manager - Storage Navigator sessions and separate web
browser instances.
For details about setting up the SVP, see the Hardware Installation and
Reference Guide for your storage system.
Configuring the web browser

To configure the client web browser, note the following:
• The browser must allow first-party, third-party, and session cookies.
• Pop-up blocker and plug-ins must be disabled.
Consult your browser's documentation for instructions.

Configuring Internet Explorer for Device Manager - Storage
Navigator
You must set up Internet Explorer on the management client to access
Device Manager - Storage Navigator.
Before you begin

• The management client must be connected to the network via LAN.
• The version of Adobe Flash Player specified in the management client
requirements must be installed.
Procedure
1. From the Internet Explorer menu, click Tools > Internet Options.
2. Enable cookies.
a. On the Privacy tab, click Advanced.
b. In the Advanced Privacy Settings window, specify the following:
• Select Override automatic cookie handling.
• For First-party Cookies, select Accept.
• For Third-party Cookies, select Accept.
• Select Always allow session cookies.
c. Click OK to close the Advanced Privacy Settings window.
3. Allow pop-up windows.
For Internet Explorer 10:
a. On the Privacy tab, clear the check box for Turn on Pop-up
Blocker, and then click Close.
For other versions of Internet Explorer:
a. On the Privacy tab, click Pop-up Blocker Settings.
b. In Address of website to allow, enter the IP address or host name
of the SVP, click Add, and then click Close.
4. Click OK to close the Internet Options window.
5. If any third-party add-ons block pop-up windows, configure them to
allow pop-ups.
Configuring Firefox for Device Manager - Storage Navigator

You must set up Firefox on the management client to access Device Manager
- Storage Navigator.
Before you begin

• The management client must be connected to the network via LAN.
• The version of Adobe Flash Player specified in the management client
requirements must be installed.
Procedure
1. From the menu, click Tools > Options.

2. Enable cookies.

a. On the Privacy tab, select History > Firefox will > Use custom
settings for history.
b. Specify the following:
• Select Accept cookies from sites.
• For Accept third-party cookies, select From visited.
3. Allow pop-up windows.
a. On the Privacy tab, click Pop-ups > Exceptions.
b. Enter the IP address or host name of the SVP, and then click Allow.
c. If any third-party add-ons block pop-up windows, configure them to
allow pop-ups.
Installing Adobe Flash Player

Adobe Flash Player must be installed on the management client.
To install the latest Adobe Flash Player, download the installer from http://
get.adobe.com/flashplayer/.
To install earlier versions, search for "Archived Flash Player versions" on the
Adobe Systems Incorporated website.
Note:
• There are two versions of Windows Flash Player: ActiveX for Internet
Explorer and Plugin for other than Internet Explorer. Choose the Flash
Player installer that is appropriate for your browser.
• Adobe Flash Player might be installed with Internet Explorer. If so, you can
perform Windows Update to install the latest version.
• You can also download an earlier version from Microsoft Security Advisory
(2755801).
Procedure
1. Launch the web browser that you normally use and go to the Adobe
website http://www.adobe.com.
2. Scroll upward as needed to display the top of the Adobe web page.
3. In the Adobe search box in the upper right corner of the web page (not
the browser search box) enter archived Adobe Flash Player and click
Search.
4. In the search results, select Archived Adobe Flash Player versions.
The Archived Adobe Flash Player version web page on the Adobe website
opens.
5. Scroll down to the list of archived Adobe Flash Player versions, select the
archived version you want, download the installer, and then run it.
Logging in to Device Manager - Storage Navigator

There are two types of logins to Device Manager - Storage Navigator:
• One-time only initial login by the administrator or super-user who logs in
first to create other user accounts.

• Normal login allows users to perform only tasks related to initial settings
such as account management or software application management. When
the initial settings are complete, use Hitachi Command Suite or Storage
Advisor to configure the storage system.
Initial super-user login

This login procedure is for the super-user who logs into Device Manager -
Storage Navigator for the first time and sets up the user accounts. The
super-user has a built-in ID which includes all permissions, and a default
password.
Procedure
1. Call your local service representative to obtain the super-user ID and

default password.
2. In your web browser, specify the URL for your SVP:
https://IP-address-or-host-name-of-SVP/sanproject/
To change the port number of the protocol from the initial value (443),
specify the following URL:
https://IP-address-or-host-name-of-SVP:port-number-of-the-
protocol/
3. Log in with the superuser ID and password.
4. To prevent unauthorized use of the superuser account, change the
password immediately after you log in. Click Settings > User
Management > Change Password to change your password.
Normal login
Normal login allows you to perform only the following:
• User management
• License management
• Creating a login message
• Editing advanced system settings
When the initial settings are complete, use Hitachi Command Suite or
Storage Advisor to configure the storage system.
Procedure
1. In your web browser, specify the following URL:

https://IP-address-or-host-name-of-SVP
If you changed the port number of the protocol HTTP from the initial
value (443), specify the following URL:
https://IP-address-or-host-name-of-SVP:port-number-of-the-
protocol-HTTPS/

If the loading window displays in Device Manager - Storage Navigator,
wait until the service status changes to Ready (Normal). At that time,
the login window displays automatically. The following is an example of
the loading window.
enabled on the management client, select In the future, do not
show this message and click OK.
• If a message indicates that certain web sites are blocked, follow
instructions in Adding your SVP to the trusted sites zone for Windows
Server computers on page 49.
• If multiple storage systems are connected, a window which allows
selection of the storage system is displayed. Select the storage system
you want to connect.
3. When the Storage Device List window opens, select the storage system.
The Device Manager - Storage Navigator login window appears.
4. Type the user ID and password.
5. Click Login.
7. If a local storage area pop-up dialog box of Adobe Flash Player Setting
appears, click Allow to open the Device Manager - Storage Navigator
main window. The cache function of Adobe Flash Player optimizes the
process of Device Manager - Storage Navigator. Denial of the request
might delay the processing speed of Device Manager - Storage
Navigator.

Note: If login fails three times with the same user ID, Device
Manager - Storage Navigator stops responding for one minute.
This is for security purposes and is not a system failure. Wait, then
try again. The roles and resource groups for each user are set up
ahead of time and will be available to you when you log in to
Device Manager - Storage Navigator. If the roles or resource
allocations for your username are changed after you log in, the
changes will not be effective until you log out and log back in
again. When you use a web browser for a long period of time,
memory is heavily used. We recommend closing or logging out of
Device Manager - Storage Navigator after you are finished using it.
Changing your password

After the administrator gives you a user ID and password, you should change
the password after you log in.
Procedure
1. Log in to Device Manager - Storage Navigator with the user ID and

password given to you by the administrator.
2. Click Settings > User Management > Change Password to change
your password.
Adding your SVP to the trusted sites zone for Windows Server computers
If you are using Device Manager - Storage Navigator on a Windows Server
computer, the following message may appear during login. If it does, you
must add the SVP to the trusted sites zone.
The message below may appear differently depending on the Windows

version you are using.

Procedure
1. Click Add in the message dialog box. The Trusted Sites dialog box
opens.
2. In Add this web site to the zone, enter the URL of the SVP that you
want to log in to. For example, if the host name is host01, the URL is
http://host01. If the IP address is 127.0.0.1, the URL is http://
127.0.0.1.
3. Click Add to add the URL of the SVP to the web sites list.
4. Click Close to close the dialog box.
Onboarding and configuring a storage system

Onboarding a storage system is the process of associating it with Storage
Advisor. After the storage system is onboarded, manage it from the Storage
Advisor dashboard.
If the storage system includes NAS modules, the file storage is automatically
added with the block storage.
Storage Advisor requires access to all resources groups on the storage

system so that the workflows function correctly. Verify that the service
processor user name used to onboard a storage system in Storage Advisor
has access to all custom resource groups and meta resource groups

Overview
Onboarding a storage system in Storage Advisor is more than adding a
storage system to a list. At least one fabric switch and server must be added
for the storage system to be able to provision volumes to the server.
In the following workflow, the recommended path is marked by the solid

arrows. The dashed arrows indicate the optional paths. Before a storage
system is available for use in the network, all of the tasks in the workflow
must be complete.
Adding the first storage system

You must onboard a storage system the first time you start Storage Advisor.
Before you begin
Storage Advisor requires access to all resources groups on the storage

system so that the workflows function correctly. Verify that the service
processor (SVP) user name used to onboard a storage system in Storage
Advisor has access to all custom resource groups and meta resource groups.
If a storage array includes block storage and NAS modules, the file storage is
automatically added with the block storage. Then file pools and other file
resources can be created in the Storage Advisor web interface or by using the
API.
You can add up to eight VSP Gx00 or VSP Fx00 storage systems at once by
specifying an SVP IP address that has multiple storage systems. Storage
systems with different credentials cannot be added in the same operation.

Procedure
1. On the Storage Advisor dashboard, click the plus sign (+) to add a
storage system.
2. Enter values for the following parameters on the Add Storage System
page.
• SVP IP Address: Enter the IP address of the external service
processor for the storage system you want to discover.
• User name and password: Log in as a user that has administrator
privileges on this storage system. For example, you can log in as the
user maintenance.
3. Click Submit.
4. (Optional) Onboard other storage systems.
Result
The Jobs tab is updated with the job called Create Storage System. If
multiple storage systems are being added, there will be a job for each one.
Wait a while for the storage system to be added. Refresh the Jobs tab to
verify that storage system is onboarded.
Next steps
• Verify the storage system initial settings.
• Create parity groups.
Note: Parity groups are created by a service representative. Parity

groups for a Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform G1000 storage system
are created outside of Storage Advisor.
Adding a fabric switch

You can add a fabric switch after onboarding a storage system. Add, update,
and delete fabric switches in the Storage Advisor interface.
After a fabric switch is added, you can choose to auto-create zones during
volume provisioning. A fabric switch is required for any operations that use
auto-select, such as host group creation and auto-selection of ports while
attaching volumes to servers.
Before you begin

• Verify that servers and ports are connected according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
• Verify that there is an active zone set with at least one dummy zone
available.
• The Storage Advisor server is connected to the same IP network and has
access to SNMP broadcast of Fibre Channel switches.

• Verify the required information about the fabric switch: Virtual Fabric ID
(required only for Cisco switches), Fabric Switch Type, Fabric Switch IP
Address, Port Number, Username, and Password.
• Verify that you have the Admin role for the fabric switch.
Procedure
1. On the Storage Advisor dashboard, select Fabric Switches to open the

Fabric Switches page.
2. Click the plus sign (+) to open the Add Fabric Switches page.
3. Enter the following information from the configuration of the switch you
are adding:
• Virtual Fabric ID: For Cisco switches, the VSAN ID. Not applicable to
Brocade switches.
• Fabric Switch Type: Select Brocade or Cisco.
• Fabric Switch IP Address
To add or update a core switch, use the Management IP address of the
switch or the Active CP IP address.
• Port Number
• Username
• Password
4. Click Submit.
Result
A job is created to add the fabric switch.
Adding servers

Add servers so you can attach volumes. You can add multiple server
parameters from a file, or add one server at a time.
There are two methods of adding servers:

• Manually add information for one server at a time.
• Import a CSV (comma-separated values) file with information for one
server in each row.
The CSV file must have the following headings, in the order specified:
Name, Description, IPAddress, OSType, WWNs (comma separated list of
WWNs). All fields are required except Description and IPAddress. Valid
OSType values are as follows:
• AIX
• HP_UX
• LINUX
• NETWARE
• OVMS
• SOLARIS
• TRU64
• VMWARE
• VMWARE_EX
• WIN
• WIN_EX
Procedure
1. On the Storage Advisor dashboard, click Servers. Then click the plus
sign (+) to open the Add Server page.
2. On the Add Server page, do one of the following:
• Click the upper plus sign (+) to browse for the CSV file or drag the file
to the plus sign. The values from the file will populate the page.
• Click the plus sign (+) in the table to add a row and enter a Name,
Description (optional), IP Address (optional), OS Type, and WWN.
You can add more servers by clicking the plus sign.
3. Click Submit to add the servers.
Result
A job is started to add the servers.
Next steps
Create volumes and attach them to the server.
Creating parity groups
Note: Parity groups for VSP G1000 storage systems are created outside
Storage Advisor by an authorized service representative.

Before you begin
• Complete the initial setup of any discovered supported storage system.

• Register the storage system for which you will create a parity group.
• Verify the target storage system name.
• Verify the total capacity that you expect to use. Plan to use all of the
available disks in the system when you create parity groups.
Procedure
1. On the Storage Advisor dashboard, select Storage Systems in the

resource side panel to see the inventory of registered storage systems.
2. Click a storage system to create and configure the parity groups for it.
3. Click Parity Groups to see the inventory of all parity groups in the
storage system.
4. Click the plus sign (+). In the Create Parity Groups window, review the
list of unused disk types in the storage system. This information is
grouped by disk type, disk speed, and disk capacity, and includes the
following details:
• Number of available disks.
• Available spares detected for each disk type, disk speed, and capacity.
• Number of new or additional spares to reserve. This calculation is
based on the total spares needed based on recommended best
practices, and the number of existing spares in the system.
• The recommended RAID configuration for the disk type.
• The number of parity groups that can be created.
• The total usable capacity that is available based on the number of
parity groups and the RAID configuration.
5. Choose one of the following options:

• Accept the recommended RAID configuration, which uses the full
capacity of the installed drives.

• Change the RAID configuration or create fewer parity groups. If you
make changes, you might not use the full capacity of the installed
drives.
6. (Optional) Click Encryption ON if you want to use encryption.
Prerequisites for enabling encryption:
• The storage system must have an Encryption Disk Board.
• Encryption License Key must be installed.
• The Key Management Server must be configured on the SVP.
Note: Encryption cannot be disabled in Storage Advisor.
7. Click Submit.
Result
A job is started to create the parity group for the storage system. This job
includes the following tasks:
• Identifies the appropriate number and position for the spare disk.
• Assigns a spare disk.
• Creates the required number of parity groups for the requested RAID
layout.
• Creates and quick formats the necessary volumes on the parity group so
that it is ready for pool creation.
• The job may create sub-jobs when multiple parity groups are being
created. Each sub-job will show the status of the parity groups being
created.
Note: If you are creating parity groups for the entire array, it may take
several hours before the storage system is configured.
Next steps
• Create a pool.
• Create and attach volumes.
Note: For further information, access Help from within the Storage Advisor
web interface.
Using the maintenance utility

To configure the storage system using the maintenance utility, start the
maintenance utility from Hitachi Command Suite or Hitachi Device Manager -
Storage Navigator.

Note:
• Click in the window to see the help menu for the description of the
Maintenance Utility.
• To display the Help, the settings for enlarging and reducing the display
might not be reflected in the help window depending on the type or
version of browser.
Starting from Hitachi Command Suite
Procedure
1. Start Hitachi Command Suite.

2. In the Hitachi Command Suite main window, click the Resources tab,
and then click Storage Systems from the tree view.
3. Expand the tree, and then right-click a storage system and click Other
Functions.
4. In Hitachi Device Manager - Storage Navigator, click the Maintenance
Utility menu, and then click Hardware to start the maintenance utility.
Starting from Hitachi Device Manager - Storage Navigator

Procedure
1. Launch a web browser from the console PC connected to the SVP, and
then start Device Manager - Storage Navigator.
2. Enter the following URL in the address field of your browser, and then
press the Enter key: http://[IP address of SVP]/module/sn2/0/
index.do
3. In the Storage Device List window, click the picture of the registered
storage system.
4. Log in to Device Manager - Storage Navigator.
5. On the Maintenance Utility menu, click Hardware.
6. Select the pull-down menu for the part that needs to be replaced (see
the following table).
Pull-down menu Parts to be replaced
Cache Memory replacement/installation for Cache memory installed on controller 1.

CTL1...
Cache Memory replacement/installation for Cache memory installed on controller 2.

CTL2...
Other hardware maintenance... Component other than a controller, fan, and

LAN blade.
Accessing a storage system without management software

You can use the administrator account created during the initial setup to use
HDvM - SN temporarily to access the storage system. You can then perform
critical storage management operations during a planned maintenance
activity or an unexpected downtime on the management server.
Before you begin

• You must have an administrator login account with the Storage
Administrator (initial configuration) role. For information about creating
user accounts, see Creating user accounts on page 148 in this manual,
and the Hardware Reference Guide for your system model.
• Adobe Flash Player must be configured on the client to use HDvM - SN.
Note: To obtain the administrator login information, contact customer

support.
Procedure
1. Start a web browser.

2. Enter the following URL:
• For the VSP G200 storage system, enter:

https://IP-address-or-host-name-of-the-SVP/dev/storage/
8320004XXXXX/emergency.do (where the model number is '8320004'
and '4XXXXX' indicates the system serial number)
• For VSP G400, G600 and VSP F400, F600 storage systems, enter:
• For VSP G800 and VSP F800 storage systems, enter:
enabled on the computer, select In the future, do not show this
message and click OK.
• If a messages indicates that certain web sites are blocked, make sure
you have added the SVP to the trusted sites zone.
4. Enter a user ID and password for the account.
5. Click Log In.
7. If an Adobe Flash Player local storage area pop-up dialog box appears,
click Allow to open the Device Manager - Storage Navigator main
window.
The cache function of Adobe Flash Player optimizes the process of Device
Manager - Storage Navigator. Denial of the request might reduce
processing speed.
Note: If the login process fails three times with the same user ID,
Device Manager - Storage Navigator will stop responding for one
minute. This is for security purposes and is not a system failure.
Wait, and then try again.
Related tasks
• System management architecture on page 18

3
System configuration
This chapter provides instructions to manage the system configuration.
□ System administration tasks at a glance
□ System administration using Hitachi Storage Advisor
□ System administration using Device Manager - Storage Navigator
□ System administration using the maintenance utility
□ System administration using NAS Manager
□ Miscellaneous system administration considerations
System configuration 61
System administration tasks at a glance
The following table summarizes key system administration tasks. The tool
used to perform these tasks depends on whether the storage system contains
NAS modules.
Table 1 System administration tasks at a glance
Block-only storage
Block and file storage systems (NAS
Task systems (no NAS
modules installed)
modules installed)
• Set IPv4 and IPv6 Maintenance utility IP addresses cannot be added, deleted,
network settings and set or modified in the NAS Manager. To
HTTP blocking See Changing network
change these addresses, use the
settings on page 117
maintenance utility.
• Set system clock (date Maintenance utility NAS Manager

and time)
See Changing the date See Changing the system date and time
and time on page 116 of the NAS modules on page 121
• Configure audit log Maintenance utility NAS Manager

settings
See Audit log settings on See the File Services Administration
page 240 Guide (MK-92HNAS006) and the Server
and Cluster Administration Guide
(MK-92HNAS010)
• Configure alert Maintenance utility NAS Manager

notifications
See Alert notifications on See the Server and Cluster
page 217 Administration Guide (MK-92HNAS010)
• Changing link N/A NAS Manager

aggregation
See the Network Administration Guide
(MK-92HNAS008)
• Change administrator Maintenance utility NAS Manager

password
• Edit the login message See System configuration See the Network Administration Guide
• Select the SSL cipher on page 61 (MK-92HNAS008)
suite
• Update certificate files
• Force the system lock to
release
• User administration - Device Manager - Storage NAS Manager

add, manage, and Navigator
delete storage system See User Administration for NAS
users See User administration Manager on page 176
• Manage user groups for Device Manager -
Storage Navigator on
page 146
• Registration Device Manager - Storage NAS Manager to register the service.

Navigator to register the
See the Server and Cluster
Administration Guide (MK-92HNAS010)
62 System configuration
Block-only storage
Block and file storage systems (NAS
Task systems (no NAS
modules installed)
modules installed)
service processor host

name.
See Registering the

primary SVP host name on
page 120
• Change storage system Device Manager - Storage N/A

information Navigator
See Setting storage

system information on
page 113
• Manage SSL certificates: Device Manager - Storage N/A

create keypairs, obtain, Navigator
update, and return
certificates, verify and See Managing HCS
release passphrases certificates on page 204
• Manage HCS certificates Device Manager - Storage N/A

Navigator
See Managing HCS

certificates on page 204
• Manage HDvM - SN Device Manager - Storage NAS Manager

configuration files Navigator
See the Server and Cluster
See Backing up HDvM - Administration Guide (MK-92HNAS010)
SN configuration files on
page 114
• Manage authorization Device Manager - Storage N/A

and authentication Navigator
servers
See Using an
authentication server and
authorization server on
page 162
• Create LDAP, RADIUS, Device Manager - Storage NAS Manager

and Kerberos Navigator
configuration files See the Server and Cluster
See Authentication server Administration Guide (MK-92HNAS010)
protocols on page 163
• Installing licenses Maintenance utility NAS Manager

• Enabling and disabling
licenses See License keys on See License keys on page 229
• Removing licenses page 229
System administration using Hitachi Storage Advisor

Configure block storage
Use Storage Advisor to configure the block storage.
Enabling or disabling port security
Before a host storage domain (HSD) can be created on a port, port security
must be enabled. By default, security is disabled on supported storage
systems. If port security is disabled Storage Advisor will not select the port
for HSD creation. If you select a port that has security disabled, you are
limited to the default host group. If the user manually selects the port with
security disabled, the host group will be created.
Procedure
1. On the Storage Advisor dashboard, click Storage Systems to see the

inventory of storage systems and capacity information.
2. Click a storage system to see its configuration of pools, ports, volumes,
and parity groups.
3. Click Ports to see the configured storage ports for the storage system.
4. Select one or more ports and click Enable/Disable Security to open
the Update Storage Port page.
5. For a VSP G1000 storage system, you can update port attributes by
selecting one of the following:
• Target: Fibre target port
• Initiator: MCU initiator port
• RCU Target: RCU target port
• External: External initiator port
6. Click Enable Security or Disable Security and then click OK.
A job is started to update the port security.
Modfying port attributes in Storage Navigator

You can open the Ports inventory page in Hitachi Storage Navigator by
clicking the icon ( ) to launch Storage Navigator and view the Ports Ports/
Host Groups/iSCSI tab. From there, you can view and modify port
attributes.
For more information, refer to the System Administrator Guide
Note: Any changes you make in Storage Navigator may not be reflected in
Storage Advisor for a few minutes.
Adding a fabric switch

You can add a fabric switch after onboarding a storage system. Add, update,
and delete fabric switches in the Storage Advisor interface.
After a fabric switch is added, you can choose to auto-create zones during
volume provisioning. A fabric switch is required for any operations that use
auto-select, such as host group creation and auto-selection of ports while
attaching volumes to servers.
Before you begin

• Verify that servers and ports are connected according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
• Verify that there is an active zone set with at least one dummy zone
available.
• The Storage Advisor server is connected to the same IP network and has
access to SNMP broadcast of Fibre Channel switches.
• Verify the required information about the fabric switch: Virtual Fabric ID
(required only for Cisco switches), Fabric Switch Type, Fabric Switch IP
Address, Port Number, Username, and Password.
• Verify that you have the Admin role for the fabric switch.
Procedure
1. On the Storage Advisor dashboard, select Fabric Switches to open the

Fabric Switches page.
2. Click the plus sign (+) to open the Add Fabric Switches page.
3. Enter the following information from the configuration of the switch you
are adding:
• Virtual Fabric ID: For Cisco switches, the VSAN ID. Not applicable to
Brocade switches.
• Fabric Switch Type: Select Brocade or Cisco.
• Fabric Switch IP Address
To add or update a core switch, use the Management IP address of the
switch or the Active CP IP address.
• Port Number
• Username
• Password
4. Click Submit.
Result
A job is created to add the fabric switch.
Supported fabric switch models

Storage Advisor supports a variety of Brocade® and Cisco® fabric switches.
System requirements for Brocade switches
Model Fiber OS version Type
300 71
7.0
7.1
7.2
5300 64
7.0
7.1
7.2
6505 118
7.0
7.1
7.2
6510 109
7.0
7.1
7.2
6520 133
7.0
7.1
7.2
7800 83
7.0
7.1
7.2
DCX 8510-4 121

7.0
7.1
7.2
DCX 8510-8 with firmware v6.4 120

7.0
7.1
7.2
System requirements for Cisco switches

Storage Advisor supports the Cisco MDS 9000 Series of switches.
Cisco MDS NX-OS Release 6.2(9) or later is required.
Creating parity groups

Parity groups are the basic units of storage capacity. Creating parity groups
converts the raw disk capacity in your storage system into usable capacity.
Storage Advisor parity group concepts

Storage Advisor provides a simple one-click method of parity group creation
that is based on best practices applicable to the disks in the storage system.
An advanced method of parity group creation is also available. You can

choose to use the advanced method if there is not a need to rely on best
practices.
Note: Parity groups on VSP G1000 storage systems cannot be created in

Storage Advisor. They are created by an authorized service representative.
They can be initialized in Storage Advisor. Encryption can be enabled in
Creating parity groups in Storage Advisor also creates LDEVs that can be
consumed for pool creation.
Encryption can be enabled during parity group creation if prerequisites are

met, including a storage system with an Encryption Disk Board.
Normal practice is to use all available disk capacity when creating parity
groups to ensure that all of the storage system capacity is usable. There can
be exceptions to this practice; for example:
• If the entire capacity of the storage system is not needed.
• If there is a need to create fewer parity groups in order to reserve more
disks as spares.
Viewing parity groups

Access the Parity Groups page by clicking Storage Systems on the dashboard
and then clicking a storage system tile. Click the Parity Groups tile.
A summary of parity groups includes disk type, number of parity groups,

capacity, and available spares, all sorted by disk type.
• You can click Manage Spare Disks to open the Disk Management page
and set free disks as spare disks, or spares as free disks.
Note: Not available for VSP G1000.
• Click any parity group tile to view its details.

• Click the plus sign (+) to open the Create Parity Groups page.
When you open the Create Parity Groups page, the basic method is
selected by default. Encryption can be enabled using either method.
○ Basic option: Creating a parity group using the basic option requires no
input, but you can change the RAID type or the number of parity
groups. Storage Advisor applies recommended best practices for
creating these parity groups.
○ Advanced option: The advanced option allows the user to fully configure
the RAID layout of the parity group by selecting the specific disks to
assign for parity group creation.
Enabling Parity Group encryption in Hitachi Storage Navigator

You can open the Parity Groups inventory page in Hitachi Storage Navigator
by clicking the icon ( ) to launch Storage Navigator in order to enable parity
group encryption.
Creating parity groups, basic method

The following procedure describes the basic option for creating a parity group
and enabling encryption.
Note: Parity group creation on VSP G1000 storage systems is performed

outside Storage Advisor by an authorized service representative. Encryption
can be enabled (if prerequisites are met) in Device Manager - Storage
Navigator.
Before you begin
• Register the storage system.

• Identify the target storage system name.
• Identify the total capacity that you expect to use. Plan to use all of the
available disks in the system when you create parity groups.
Procedure
1. On the Storage Advisor dashboard, select Storage Systems in the

resource side panel to see the inventory of registered storage systems.
2. Click a storage system to create and configure the parity groups for it.
3. Click Parity Groups to see the inventory of all parity groups in the
storage system.
4. Click the plus sign (+). In the Create Parity Groups window, review the
list of unused disk types in the storage system. This information is
grouped by disk type, disk speed, and disk capacity, and includes the
following details:
• Number of available disks.
• Available spares detected for each disk type, disk speed, and capacity.
• Number of new or additional spares to reserve. This calculation is
based on the total spares needed based on recommended best
practices, and the number of existing spares in the system.
• The recommended RAID configuration for the disk type.
• The number of parity groups that can be created.
• The total usable capacity that is available based on the number of
parity groups and the RAID configuration.
5. Decide if the recommended RAID configuration for each disk type is

acceptable. Choose one of the following options:
• Accept the recommended RAID configuration, which uses the full
capacity of the installed drives.
• Change the recommended RAID configuration or create fewer parity
groups. Storage Advisor shows the number of parity groups that can
be created for the new RAID configuration and the corresponding
usable capacity.
7. Click Submit.
Result
A job is started to create the parity group for the storage system. This job
includes the following tasks:
• Identifies the appropriate number and position for the spare disk.
• Assigns a spare disk.
• Creates the required number of parity groups for the requested RAID
layout.
• Creates and quick formats the necessary volumes on the parity group so
that it is ready for pool creation.
• The job may create sub-jobs when multiple parity groups are being
created. Each sub-job will show the status of the parity groups being
created.
Next steps
• Check the status of the parity group creation job by clicking Jobs.
Note: Parity group creation may take a long time.
Creating parity groups or hot spares, advanced method

The advanced option enables users to configure parity groups that are not
based on the provided best practices.
The advanced option allows you to fully configure the RAID layout of the
parity group by selecting the specific disks and hot spares to assign for parity
group creation.
Note: Parity groups on VSP G1000 storage systems cannot be created in

Storage Advisor. They are created by an authorized service representative.
They can be initialized in Storage Advisor. Encryption can be enabled in
Procedure
1. On the dashboard, click Storage Systems and click a storage system

tile.
2. Click Parity Groups to open the Parity Groups page and click the plus
sign to open the Create Parity Groups page.
3. Click Advanced.
4. Select a RAID Type and a RAID Layout.
RAID Type RAID Layout
RAID5 3D+1P, 4D+1P, 6D+1P, 7D+1P

RAID6 6D+2P, 12D+2P, 14D+2P
RAID1+0 2D+2D

6. Choose available disks. Select enough disks to match the RAID Layout.
7. Click Submit.
Result
A job is started to create the parity group for the storage system.
Next steps
• Check the status of the job by clicking Jobs.
Note: Parity group creation may take time.
• Create a pool.
Managing free and spare disks
You can set free disks to spare and spare to free.
Note: Disk management is not available for VSP G1000 storage systems.
If you choose to use the basic method to create parity groups, Storage
Advisor will automatically review the available spare disks and allocate more
spare disks if needed.
If you choose to create parity groups using the advanced method, you should
review the number of spare disks in the parity groups inventory summary. If
you want to assign more or fewer spare disks, use disk management.
Procedure
1. On the dashboard, click Storage Systems.

2. Click a storage system tile and click Parity Groups.
3. Click Manage Spare Disk to open the Disk Management page and
view disks not being used in any parity group.
4. Click Disks to Set to Free or Disks to Set to Spare and select one or
more disks. Selecting Disks to Set to Spare will reserve the disks as a
spare disks and they cannot be used for parity group creation. Selecting
Disks to Set to Free will unallocate the spare disks and return then to the
pool of available disks.
5. Click Submit.
Parity groups inventory

After parity groups are created, they are displayed for each storage system.
To view parity groups for a storage system, click Storage Systems on the
dashboard and click a storage system tile to view the associated parity
groups, pools, volumes, and ports. Click Parity Groups to open the Parity
Groups page.
You can perform the following actions on this page:
• If there are hardware alerts related to the parity groups, you can click the
Hardware Alerts tile to view details for different types of components on
the Monitoring page for the storage system.
• To assign free and spare disks, click Manage Spare Disks to open the Disk
Management page.
Note: Disk management is not available for VSP G1000 storage

systems.
• Select one or more parity groups and do one of the following:

○ To initialize parity groups, click Initialize Parity Groups.
You can create and initialize pool volumes on a parity group if pool
volumes have not been created. You can also format any pool volumes
that are in blocked state. You can initialize parity groups in the following
conditions:
○ – When the parity group either does not have any pool volumes or at
least one of the pool volumes is in Blocked state. In this case, you
will notice that the parity group status is Uninitialized.
– When the pool volumes on the parity group do not account for the
entire parity group capacity and there are unused partitions on the
parity group. In this case you will notice that the parity group status
is Available but the available capacity is much less than the total
capacity. This is supported only when the parity group status is
Available or Uninitialized.
○ To delete the parity group, click Delete. When you delete a parity group,
it is removed from the storage system and the disks used to create the
parity group are no longer in use. You can delete the parity group if you
want to reconfigure the storage system with some other RAID
configuration or simply decommission the array.
Note: The following parity groups cannot be deleted:

• Parity groups on VSP G1000, VSP G1500, or VSP F1500
storage systems
• Parity groups that contain NAS boot volumes.
○ To enable compression on parity groups, click Enable Compression on

Parity Groups. Compression can be enabled for parity groups on FMD
DC2 disks in Available state.
After compression is enabled, the status of the parity group is
AVAILABLE_PHYSICAL.
Note: Parity groups that contain NAS boot volumes cannot be

compressed.
• Click the plus sign (+) to create a new parity group.
Note: Parity groups on a VSP G1000 storage system are created

outside Storage Advisor by an authorized service representative.
• Use the filters to view the status of parity groups. Click a filter to apply it
and click it again to remove it.
○ AVAILABLE: Parity group is not being used for any storage pools. It is
available for pool creation.
○ AVAILABLE_PHYSICAL: Parity group is not being used for any storage
pools. Compression is enabled on the parity group and physical capacity
of the parity group is available for pool creation. Not applicable to parity
groups that are not enabled for compression.
○ FORMATTED: At least one of the pool volumes in the parity group is
being formatted. The full format takes longer than a quick format
because the service processor fully scans the hard drive.
○ QUICK_FORMATTING: At least one of the pool volumes in the parity
group is being formatted using the quick format method. To make the
formatting process quick, the drive is not fully checked, the files are still
there, and the volume could be re-built to gain access to the files again.
○ IN_USE: Parity group is being used by a storage pool.
○ UNINITIALIZED: The parity group either has no volumes or at least one
of the pool volumes is in Blocked status, or one or more partitions is
uninitialized and has a size greater than 16,787,456 blocks.
○ UNSUPPORTED_ATTACHED: At least one of the pool volumes has a path
to a storage port.
○ UNSUPPORTED_INACCESSIBLE_RESOURCE_GROUP: Parity group and at
least one of its pool volumes are in different resource groups and user
does not have access to one of the resource groups.
Note: If the storage system includes NAS modules, a parity group is

reserved for NAS firmware. Physical volumes are created on the parity group
and provisioned to NAS modules outside of Storage Advisor by an authorized
service provider. The parity group displays in the parity group inventory with
the status UNSUPPORTED_ATTACHED.
External parity groups inventory

External parity groups are parity groups in a storage system that is
connected to a storage system that has been onboarded in Storage Advisor.
You can display a list of external parity groups in a storage system that has
been registered with Device Manager - Storage Navigator.
You can access the External Parity Groups page by clicking the External Parity
Groups tile on the detail page for a storage system. If the storage system has
no external parity groups, the tile does not display.
External parity groups are not available for deletion, initialization, or

compression.
If external parity groups have been used to create a pool (outsideStorage

Advisor), you can use their capacity to create volumes in Storage Advisor.
Enabling accelerated compression in Storage Advisor

Accelerated compression can be enabled for parity groups on FMD DC2 drives
that are part of VSP Gx00 models, VSP Fx00 models and VSP G1000 storage
systems. It enable users to realize more virtual capacity than the actual
usable capacity.
Note: Accelerated compression is not compatible with encryption. If a parity

group is encrypted when created, the data cannot be compressed.
Storage Advisor only uses the physical capacity of the FMD DC2 parity groups
for which write is assured.
Accelerated compression is enabled in the Advanced tab of the Create Parity

Groups page.
When you create pools, you can select capacity from compression-enabled
parity groups by selecting the AVAILABLE_PHYSICAL status.
After creating a pool with capacity from a parity group that is enabled for
accelerated compression, you can view the following in the detail page for the
pool:
• Expansion Rate: The ratio of the total capacity of FMD DC2 pool volumes
with respect to the total capacity of FMD DC2 pool volumes assured for
writing.
• Compression rate: The ratio of data size compression.
• Savings %: Displays the percentage of the capacity reduced by data
compression with respect to the used capacity before the data
compression. This will not display a value until data is compressed.
If the savings percentage for a pool is not high enough, you can provision
additional pool volumes to the pool from the parity groups using FMD DC2
drives.
Accelerated compression is enabled in the Parity Groups inventory page.
Creating a pool
Use the basic option to take advantage of tiers that are based on best
practices.
If you want more flexibility and do not need to take advantage of best
practices, you can use the advanced option to select specific parity groups.
You cannot create pools on external parity groups. They must be created
outside Storage Advisor.
Note: The following types of pools are identical:
Thin = HDP (Dynamic Provisioning), which is functionality that allocates

virtual volumes to a host and uses the physical capacity that is necessary
according to the data write request.
Tiered = HDT (Dynamic Tiering), which is used with Dynamic Provisioning

and places data in a hardware tier according to the I/O load. For example, a
data area that has a high I/O load is placed in a high-speed hardware tier,
and a data area that has a low I/O load is placed in a low-speed hardware
tier.
Snap = HTI (Thin Image), which stores snapshot data in pools. A pool
consists of multiple pool-VOLs. The pool-VOLs contain the snapshot data. A
pool can contain up to 1,024 pool-VOLs.
Pools inventory
Access the Pools page to add, update, and delete pools.
From the dashboard, click Storage Systems and then click a storage system
tile to view parity groups, pools, volumes, and ports.
Click Pools to view the inventory of pools.
Note: If there are external pools (on external storage), they display in Pools
inventory, but they cannot be added, updated, or deleted.
View pool details in either a tile view or a list view. Capacity utilization is
represented by a color bar:
• Green Below 70%.
• Orange From 70% to 80%.
• Red Over 80%.
A key in a tile or row indicates that the pool is encrypted.
FMD DC2 Compression status indicates whether a pool is using a parity group
that is enabled for accelerated compression.
The following actions are available on this page:

• Click Open the Pools page in Storage Navigator to open the Pools page of
Storage Navigator in a separate browser window.
• Select a pool and click Edit to update it in the Update Storage Pool page.
• Select one or more pools and click Delete to delete the pools. Deleted
pools are de-provisioned and removed from the storage system.
• Click the plus sign (+) to add a pool in the Create Pool page.
Opening the Pools inventory page in Hitachi Storage Navigator
You can open the Pools inventory page in Hitachi Storage Navigator by
clicking the icon ( ) to launch Storage Navigator and:
• Shrink or restore a HDP/HDT pool
• View the Tier properties of the HDT Pool
• Update the Monitoring Mode of the HDT pool (Manual Tier management)
• Start or stop the monitoring of the HDT pool (Manual Tier management)
• Start or stop tier relocation on the HDT pool (Manual Tier management)
Creating a pool, basic method

Use the basic method of pool creation to create pools based on best
practices.
Before you begin
Create and configure parity groups on the storage system.
You need a minimum of four parity groups of the Bronze, Silver, or Gold tiers,
or one parity group of the Platinum tier to create a pool using the basic
method. Otherwise, you can use the advanced method of pool creation.
License requirements:
• For a Tiered pool: Dynamic Tiering
• For a Thin pool: Dynamic Provisioning
• For a Snap pool: Thin Image
• For active flash: active flash
Procedure

inventory of registered storage systems.
2. Click a storage system to create a pool for it.
3. Click Pools.
4. Click the plus sign (+) to open the Create Pool page.
By default, the Basic option is selected.
5. Enter a Pool Label.
Pool labels can contain only alphanumeric characters, hyphens, and
underscores. Initial hyphens are not allowed.
6. In the Select capacity from Tiers to Allocate to Pool pane, you can
choose storage from 1, 2, or a maximum of 3 tiers (Platinum, Gold,
Silver, or Bronze).
• If you select only one tier, you can use the Intend to use for Snap?
toggle to decide whether to use Snap pools.
○ Click Yes to create Snap pools.
Note: Use this option if you want to use data protection to

create snapshots. You can also create a pool for snapshots
later by returning to the Create Pool page.
○ Click No to create Thin pools.

• If you select 2 or 3 tiers, the system creates Tiered pools.
Table 2 Tier Definitions
Pool Tier Description
Platinum SSD, FMD, and FMD DC2

Gold SAS 15 k
Silver SAS 10 k
Bronze SAS 7.2 k
7. Click a selected tier to view the available storage capacity and select a
capacity size.
8. Click Tier Management to see the disk type, capacity, and speed of
each pool category.
9. Review the high and low pool utilization thresholds, for watermarks or
warnings, and the subscription limit. The thresholds will serve as the
Warning and Critical thresholds for monitoring capacity. Adjust the
thresholds if needed. Select the Subscription Limit % checkbox to set
the limit to Unlimited.
Note: Subscription Limit % is not applicable to Snap pools.
10. Click Submit.
Result
A job is started to allocate the storage capacity and create the pool.
Next steps
• Check the status of the pool creation job by clicking Jobs.
• Create a volume.
How Storage Advisor calculates pool sizes for the basic method of pool creation
Storage Advisor incorporates best practices to calculate the best pool sizes
based on the media available in the storage system. When the basic pool
creation option is used, pool size is determined as follows:
• Storage Advisor identifies all the parity groups of the same disk type, disk
capacity, disk speed, RAID type and layout and determines the available
capacity of their usable LDEVs. Only parity groups in the Available and
Quick Formatting states are eligible for pool creating using the basic
method.
• Storage Advisor then uses combinations of these parity groups where four
or more parity groups of the Bronze, Silver, or Gold tiers can be added
together, or there is a parity group of the Platinum tier, to compute various
possible pool sizes that can be created for the combination of disk type,
disk capacity, disk speed, RAID type and layout.
Note: If your parity groups do not meet these requirements, you

can only use the advanced method of pool creation.
• Based on the Storage System model, Storage Advisor determines the

maximum pool size.
• Storage Advisor then displays the pools in increasing order of pool size.
Creating a pool, advanced method

You can use the advanced method of pool creation to select parity groups
filtered by disk type, speed, layout, and RAID level. This method does not
employ best practices.
Note: Mixing different disk types in a Thin pool is not recommended. If you
choose to create such a pool, Storage Advisor identifies the tier in this pool
as "mixed".
Before you begin
Create and configure parity groups on the storage system.
License requirements:
• For a Tiered pool: Dynamic Tiering
• For a Thin pool: Dynamic Provisioning
• For a Snap pool: Thin image
• For active flash: active flash
Procedure

inventory of registered storage systems.
2. Click a storage system to create a pool for it.
3. Click Pools.
4. Click the plus sign (+) to open the Create Pool page and click
Advanced.
5. Enter a Pool Label.

Pool labels can contain only alphanumeric characters, hyphens, and
underscores. Initial hyphens are not allowed.
6. Click the Type list and choose one of the following; Thin, Tiered, or
Snap.
7. Choose whether to enable active flash. Active flash enablement requires
capacity from the Platinum tier.
8. Click Tier Management to see the definitions of disk type, capacity, and
speed of each pool category.
9. Select one or more parity groups to use to create the pool. You can scroll
through the parity groups to use search and filter functions.
• For a Snap pool, select one or more parity groups with identical disk
types.
• For a Thin pool, select one or more parity groups with identical disk
types.
• For a Tiered pool, select one or more parity groups with two or three
disk types.
Storage Advisor shows the total size of the pool using the selected parity
groups.
10. Set the utilization thresholds, or use the default threshold settings. The
subscription limit can be set above 100%. Select the Subscription Limit
% checkbox to set the limit to Unlimited.
The thresholds are used as the Warning and Critical thresholds for
Capacity Monitoring.
11. Click Submit.
Result
A job is started to allocate the storage capacity and create the pool.
Next steps
• Check the status of the pool-creation job by clicking Jobs.
• Create volumes.
Pool details
To access pool details, click Storage Systems. Then click a storage system to
view all resources. Click Pools and then click a pool tile.
Note: A External pool cannot be edited or deleted.
On the pool details page, you can do the following:

• View the attributes of the pool.
• View a graph of utilization and thresholds.
• If the pool is based on a parity group using accelerate compression (FMD
DC2 Compression), you can also view compression details, including
expansion ratio and compression ratio.
• View volumes carved from the pool and perform operations on them.
Operations available include deletion, updating, attaching and detaching to
and from servers, protecting, unprotecting, and restoring. Click a volume
in tile or list view to open the detail page for the volume.
The Provisioning Status can be any of the following:
• Attached: the volume is attached to a server.
• Unattached: the volume is not attached to a server.
• Unmanaged: the volume has only a LUN path associated. For example,
a volume may be attached to a server that is not known to Storage
Advisor.
• If the volume uses compression or deduplication and compression, you can
view the compression ratio and deduplication ratio.
• Delete the pool.
• Edit the pool configuration by clicking the pencil icon to open the Update
Storage Pool page.
Once a pool is created, you can edit the pool label or expand the pool.
Basic and advanced options, similar to those for pool creation, are
available for pool expansion. The basic option includes choices for a new/
expanded pool size based on the current set of parity groups in the pool.
You can choose to expand an existing tier in the pool or add a new tier to
the pool. If you add a tier to a thin pool, it will be expanded and converted
into a tiered pool. Using the advanced option enables you to add more
parity groups to the pool and increase capacity.
Note: To expand a Thin pool, you must add a parity group of the
same RAID layout, the same disk type, the same RAID level, and
the same disk speed.
Click Submit to update the window and start a job that will update the
pool.
Create and attach volumes to servers

You can create volumes and attach them to servers and then apply data
protection in a single workflow by first selecting a server.
Creating volumes to attach to servers

Start the create-and-attach workflow by selecting a server and creating
volumes.
When you create volumes in Storage Advisor you can:

• Create multiple volumes of the same size or different sizes at the same
time.
• Select the specific pool for volume creation or let Storage Advisor
automatically select the best pool based on utilization.
• Specify a common label and starting label suffix for identical volumes that
are the same size and have the same pool requirement.
Before you begin

• Create pools.
• Add servers.
Procedure
1. On the Storage Advisor dashboard, click Servers to see the inventory of

servers.
2. Do one of the following to open the Create Volumes page:
• Select a server, click Attach Volumes, and select Create, Attach,
and Protect Volumes.
• Click a server tile to open the Server <ID> details page. Click the
cylinder icon ( ) in the upper right area and select Create and
Attach Volumes.
3. Configure volumes for the specified storage system.

You can switch to another storage system by using the drop-down
Storage System list.
a. Select the number of volumes.
b. Enter the volume label and select a suffix for it.
c. Select the size.
d. Select the volume unit: GB, TB, or PB.
e. Select the pool type: Thin or Tiered.
f. For a Thin pool, select the tier: Platinum, Gold, Silver, or Bronze.
If the storage system has available capacity from external storage,
you can also select the External tier.
g. (Optional) Select the pool from the list of available pools. The default
selection is Auto Selected, which means that Storage Advisor selects
the best pool for provisioning the volume based on utilization and tier
requirements.
4. Click the plus sign if you want to create more volumes in another row.
5. Click Next to be directed to attach volumes to the selected servers.
Attaching newly-created volumes to servers
Storage Advisor provides options as part of the attachment of the new
volumes to a single server or multiple servers.
Procedure
1. The Host Mode is set by default to the server operating system. You can
make a selection if needed.
The server OS Type is provided when the server is added to Storage
Advisor.
2. By default, the Host Mode Option will depend on the Host Mode
selection.
Default values are set only for VMWARE EX and WIN EX host modes.
The default for all other Host Modes is none.
Storage Advisor identifies all host groups containing any of the server
WWNs. If all of those host groups have the same host mode and host
mode options, those settings are prepopulated with the same settings in
the host groups.
3. Select the LUN Alignment.
By default, Storage Advisor uses the LUN number that is common to the
servers. If attachment is to only one server, this setting has no effect.
4. The Auto Create Zone is set to No by default. You can set it to Yes to
automatically create zones.
5. Click Next to view options for creating and editing LUN paths.
6. In the Create Paths panel, you can view servers and their WWNs, along
with ports on the storage system. The following options are available for
managing LUN paths:
• Existing paths are populated as follows: all existing host groups with
one or more server WWN and the exact same host mode and host
mode options selected on the Attach Settings panel are populated as
paths.
To prevent the volume from being added to an existing path, click the
path to highlight it and click Delete Selected.
• Click Suggest to populate automatically selected paths. By default,
the least-used ports are selected.
• To manually create a path, click a WWN and a port to connect them
with a blue connector line. Click the connector again and then click
Delete Selected to delete the connection.
7. When you are satisfied with the paths, click Next to view options for
protecting volumes.
Managing storage systems

Access the storage system details page for an overview of registered storage
systems. If you need to configure the storage system, you will need to access
the service processor with Device Manager - Storage Navigator.
Storage system inventory

From the dashboard, click Storage Systems to access the Storage Systems
page for an overview of registered storage systems.
The Storage Systems page includes a summary section identical to the
summary on the dashboard. This includes monitoring tiles, capacity summary
and data protection summary.
You can search for a specific storage system by searching for its serial
number in the search box. You can also use various filters to find a specific
storage systems.
From the storage systems page you can view and manage individual storage
systems.
View storage system details in either a tile view or a list view. Capacity
utilization is represented by a color bar:
• Green: Below 70%.
• Orange: From 70% to 80%.
• Red: Over 80%.
The following actions are available:

• Click a storage system to view details in the Storage System <serial
number> page, where you can also access and manage the associated
parity groups, pools, volumes, and ports.
• To delete a storage system, select it and click Delete .
• To edit the user name and password for a storage system, select it and
click Edit to open the Update Storage System <serial number> page.
Storage system details

View details about a storage system and access resources.
On the dashboard, click Storage Systems and then click a Storage System
<serial number> tile.
On a storage system detail page, you can do the following:
• Click Delete to delete the storage system. This action is available only to
users with the SystemAdministrator role.
• Click Edit to update the storage system user name and password. This
action is available only to users with the SystemAdministrator role.
• Click Settings in the upper-right corner to launch either of the following:
○ Device Manager - Storage Navigator to perform any advanced storage
management operations that are not available in Storage Advisor.
○ If the storage system includes optional NAS modules, you can launch
NAS Manager to perform operations that are not available in Storage
Advisor.
• Review the information gauge regarding available capacity in storage
system.
• Use the Alerts tiles to access alerts related to the storage system.
• Click Review Tiered Categories to open the Tier Management page to view
and edit tier categories.
•
Field Description
Model Model name of the storage system.
S/N Storage system serial number.
FW Version Firmware version.
HORCM Version 01-33-03/06
Field Description
A data replication component residing on the

server.
Cache Capacity Total cache capacity configured on the storage

system.
Unused Disks Disks that are not assigned as hot spares or

used to create parity groups.
Unused Disk Capacity Total unused capacity of all disks.
SVP IP Address Address of the service processor on the

storage system.
Maintenance Utility IP Addresses 1 and 2 Configured automatically when the storage

system is onboarded.
• View attributes about the storage system, including information that

Storage Advisor discovered about the system, such as model, serial
number, and SVP IP address.
• If you notice that the number of unused disks and unused disk capacity is
too high, it implies that you have additional raw capacity in the system
that can be converted into usable capacity by creating parity groups. Click
Create Parity Groups to configure unused disks into parity groups.
• View the total and unused disk capacity for the different pool tiers.
• Click Review Tiered Categories to open the Tier Management page, where
you can view the tier definitions and edit their names.
• Click a tile in the lower portion of the page to display the details for parity
groups, pools, volumes, or ports for the storage system.
Using Device Manager - Storage Navigator for advanced storage configuration
Device Manager - Storage Navigator is the element manager for a supported

storage system block module. It is a factory-installed application running on
the SVP, which is directly connected to the storage system. You can access
Device Manager - Storage Navigator from the Storage System details page
for advanced configuration options while performing management operations
such as remote replication, volume migration, and resource group
management with Storage Advisor.
Note: If you use Device Manager - Storage Navigator to manage resource

groups, make sure that the user who adds storage systems in Storage
Advisor has access to all custom resource groups and meta resource groups.
Use the Device Manager - Storage Navigator online help to obtain procedure
information for advanced storage configuration tasks.
Accessing Device Manager - Storage Navigator
Launch Device Manager - Storage Navigator or from the Settings menu
available in the Storage System details page. In the login dialog, use the user
account assigned to you by your security administrator. The tasks that you
can do on the system depend on the user role assigned to the user groups to
which you belong.
In the login dialog, use the user account assigned to you by your security
administrator. The tasks that you can do on the system depend on the user
role assigned to the user groups to which you belong. Security administrators
with view and modify privileges are responsible for setting up user accounts
in Device Manager - Storage Navigator.
Refer to the Roles table for roles that are available for use in Device Manager
- Storage Navigator and the permissions that each role provides to the users.
Roles
The following table shows all the roles that are available for use and the
permissions that each role provides to the users. You cannot create a custom
role.
Role Capabilities
Security Administrator • Viewing information about user accounts and encryption settings
(View Only) • Viewing information about the encryption key in the key SVP
Security Administrator • Configuring user accounts
(View & Modify) • Creating encryption keys and configuring encryption settings
• Viewing and switching where encryption keys are generated
• Backing up and restoring encryption keys
• Deleting encryption keys backed up in the key SVP
• Viewing and changing the password policy for backing up encryption keys on the
management client
• Connection to the external server
• Backing up and restoring connection configuration to the external server
• Configuring the certificate used for the SSL communication
• Configuring the fibre channel authentication (FC-SP)
• Configuring resource groups
• Editing virtual management settings
• Setting reserved attributes for global-active device
Audit Log Administrator • Viewing audit log information and downloading audit logs
(View Only)
Audit Log Administrator • Configuring audit log settings and downloading audit logs
(View & Modify)
Storage Administrator • Viewing storage system information
(View Only)
Storage Administrator • Configuring settings for storage systems
(Initial Configuration) • Configuring settings for SNMP
• Configuring settings for e-mail notification
• Configuring settings for license keys
• Viewing, deleting, and downloading storage configuration reports
• Acquiring all the information about the storage system and updating Device
Manager - Storage Navigator window by clicking Refresh All
Role Capabilities
Storage Administrator • Configuring settings for CLPR

(System Resource • Configuring settings for MP unit
Management) • Deleting tasks and releasing exclusive locks of resources
• Configuring LUN security
• Configuring Server Priority Manager
• Configuring tiering policies
Storage Administrator • Configuring caches
(Provisioning) • Configuring volumes, pools, and virtual volumes
• Formatting and shredding volumes
• Configuring external volumes
• Configuring Dynamic Provisioning
• Configuring host groups, paths, and WWN
• Configuring Volume Migration except splitting Volume Migration pairs when using
CCI
• Configuring access attributes for volumes
• Creating and deleting quorum disk used with global-active device
• Creating and deleting global-active device pairs
Storage Administrator • Configuring monitoring
(Performance Management) • Starting and stopping monitoring
Storage Administrator • Performing pair operations for local copy
(Local Copy) • Configuring environmental settings for local copy
• Splitting Volume Migration pairs when using CCI
Storage Administrator • Remote copy operations in general
(Remote Copy) • Operating global-active device pairs (except for creation and deletion)
Support Personnel (Vendor Configuring the SVP
Only) • Normally, this role is for service representatives.
Support Personnel (User) • Viewing storage system status
• Installing OS security patches
• Updating operating systems
• Performing basic maintenance
Using NAS Manager for advanced file storage configuration
NAS Manager is the element manager for NAS modules. It is a factory-

installed application running on the NAS modules. You can access NAS
Manager from the Storage System details page for advanced configuration
options while performing management operations such as data protection,
server settings and network configuration.
Use the NAS Manager online help to obtain procedure information for
advanced file storage configuration tasks.
Accessing NAS Manager
Launch NAS Manager from the Settings menu available in the Storage
System details page. In the login dialog, use the user account assigned to
you by your administrator. The tasks that you can do on the system depend
on your user role.
Refer to the Administrator types and responsibilities list for roles that are
available for use in NAS Manager and the permissions that each role provides
to the users.
Administrator types and responsibilities
This section describes the types of NAS storage system administrators and
defines their expected roles in managing the system and the associated
storage subsystems.
• Global Administrators can manage everything in the system: file
systems, file services, or file system related features and functions,
storage devices and their components. Also, the Global Administrator
creates and manages SMU user profiles (Server Administrators, Storage
Administrators, Server+Storage Administrators, and other Global
Administrators). Global Administrators also control what servers and
storage devices each administrator can access.
• Storage Administrators manage storage devices, as specified in the
administrator profile created by the Global Administrator.
Storage Administrators can manage only storage devices and their
components (racks, physical disks, SDs, and storage pools). Storage
Administrators cannot manage file systems, file services, or file system
related features and functions, and they cannot manage users.
• Server Administrators manage servers and clusters, as specified in the
administrator profile created by the Global Administrator. Server
Administrators cannot manage storage devices.
Server Administrators can manage file systems and file services such as
CIFS Shares, NFS Exports, and they can manage file system related
features and functions such as snapshots, quotas, and migration policies
and schedules.
• Server+Storage Administrators manage servers, clusters, and storage
devices, as specified in the administrator profile created by the Global
Administrator.
Server+Storage administrators can manage everything Server
Administrators and Storage Administrators can manage: file systems, file
services, or file system related features and functions, and they can also
manage storage devices and their components.
All administrators can connect to the NAS storage system through NAS
Manager, the browser-based management utility provided by the system
management unit (SMU). Additionally, Global Administrators can connect to
the SMU command line interface (CLI).
Note: Server Administrators, Storage Administrators, and Server+Storage

Administrators are not able to access all of the NAS Manager pages that a
Global Administrator can access.
Tier management
The Tier Management page displays the tier definitions. You can edit the tier
names (Platinum, Gold, Silver, Bronze, and External).
Access the Tier Management page in one of these ways:

• Click Settings and select Tier Management.
• In the detail page for a storage system, click Tier Management.
Updating a storage system

Update the user name and password for a storage system. This action
requires the SystemAdministrator role be assigned to the user.
Procedure
1. Access the Update Storage System <serial number> page one of

these ways:
• On the Storage Systems page, select a storage system and click
Edit.
• On the Storage System <serial number> page, click Edit.
2. Edit the Username or Password and click Submit.
Managing servers
Storage Advisor supports provisioning storage to a group of server WWNs by
allowing logical servers to be managed by Storage Advisor. Once servers are
onboarded in Storage Advisor, storage volumes can be provisioned to the
servers by creating Host Storage Domains and optionally creating zones to
provide a path between the storage volume and server.
Adding servers
Add servers so you can attach volumes. You can add multiple server
parameters from a file, or add one server at a time.
There are two methods of adding servers:

• Manually add information for one server at a time.
• Import a CSV (comma-separated values) file with information for one
server in each row.
The CSV file must have the following headings, in the order specified:
Name, Description, IPAddress, OSType, WWNs (comma separated list of
WWNs). All fields are required except Description and IPAddress. Valid
OSType values are as follows:
• AIX
• HP_UX
• LINUX
• NETWARE
• OVMS
• SOLARIS
• TRU64
• VMWARE
• VMWARE_EX
• WIN
• WIN_EX
Procedure
1. On the Storage Advisor dashboard, click Servers. Then click the plus
sign (+) to open the Add Server page.
2. On the Add Server page, do one of the following:
• Click the upper plus sign (+) to browse for the CSV file or drag the file
to the plus sign. The values from the file will populate the page.
• Click the plus sign (+) in the table to add a row and enter a Name,
Description (optional), IP Address (optional), OS Type, and WWN.
You can add more servers by clicking the plus sign.
3. Click Submit to add the servers.
Result
A job is started to add the servers.
Next steps
Create volumes and attach them to the server.
Server inventory
The Servers page displays all servers and includes a graphic summary based
on operating systems.
To find the server you are looking for, you can either search by server ID or
narrow down the list of servers using filters available.
You can click server tiles on this page to access details of individual servers
and manage their volumes.

• To add a server, click the plus sign (+) to open the Add Servers page.
• You can select one or more servers and perform the following actions:
○ Click Delete to delete the server.
○ Click Edit to update server parameters.
○ Click Create and Attach Volumes to use the provided workflow to create
new volumes, attach them to the server, and optionally, protect the
volumes.
○ Click Attach Existing Volumes to attach existing volumes to the server.
Server details
The Server details page provides you all the details about the server as well
as a list of volumes, if any, attached to the server.
This page also shows path details for every volume attached to the server,
including the storage ports and server WWNs used to create HSDs as well as
the host mode options set up on the HSD.
You can perform server actions such as removing the server, editing the
server or provisioning volumes to server by attaching existing volumes or
creating and attaching new volumes.
You can perform volume operations such protecting or detaching volumes.
On the dashboard, click Servers to open the Servers inventory page. Then
click a server tile to open the Server <ID> detail page for the selected server.
You can perform the following actions at the server level:

• Click Delete to remove the server.
• Click Edit to update server parameters.
• Click the cylinder icon ( ) and select one of the following:
○ Attach Existing Volumes to attach volumes to the server.
○ Create and Attach Volumes to create volumes and attach them to the
server.
The following actions are available for volumes:

• If there is a Data Protection Failed alert, you can click it to see failed data
protection jobs on the Data Protection Monitoring page.
• Click Edit to rename a volume on the Update Volume page. If the volume
is unprotected, you can also update the size.
• Click Detach Volumes to detach volumes from the server.
Before confirming, you can choose whether to remove SAN zones.
• Click Protect Volumes to protect volumes using Storage Advisor data
protection technologies.
• Click Unprotect Volumes to remove data protection applied to volumes.
• Click Restore Volumes to restore from a backup.
Updating a server
You can change the parameters for an existing server.
Before you begin
Detach all volumes from the server. If you want to remove a WWN, detach all
volumes using the WWN.
Procedure
1. From the dashboard, click Servers to open the inventory of servers.

2. Click server you want to update to open the server details page.
3. Click the pencil icon to open the Update Server page.
4. Edit the parameters and click Submit.
Managing volumes
A volume is a single accessible storage area, created in a pool within a parity
group on a storage system. Create a volume and manage its properties with
Storage Advisor
About capacity saving

Capacity saving reduces the used capacity of volumes.
Hitachi Storage Advisor allows you to use capacity saving when you create or
update a volume.
A capacity saving volume is a dynamically provisioned volume (DP-Vol) that

is capable of compression or both deduplication and compression.
When you create a capacity saving volume, HSA first creates a deduplication
system data volume. This volume is used internally by the storage system,
does not contain user data, and cannot be accessed by hosts.
Storage Advisor offers the following capacity saving options:

• Compression
Compression allows you to reduce the used capacity of your volume.
• Deduplication and compression
Deduplication identifies duplicate data blocks in order to remove
redundancy and is done in addition to data compression.
• No
No data compression or deduplication is done.
Creating volumes
Create volumes for a registered storage system so you can attach them to a
server.
When you create volumes in Storage Advisor you can:

• Create multiple volumes of the same size or different sizes at the same
time.
• Select the specific pool for volume creation or let Storage Advisor
automatically select the best pool based on utilization.
• Specify a common label and starting label suffix for identical volumes that
are the same size and have the same pool requirement.
• Set up compression, or deduplication and compression for the volume.
Before you begin

• Create pools.
• Add servers (optional).
Procedure

inventory of storage systems and capacity information.
2. Click a storage system to see its configuration of servers, pools, ports,
volumes, and parity groups.
3. Click Volumes to see the inventory of configured volumes for the
storage system.
4. Click the plus sign (+) to open the Create Volumes page.
5. Configure volumes for the specified storage system.
a. Enter the volume label (required) and select a suffix for it.
b. Select the number of volumes.
c. Select the size.
d. Select the volume unit: GB, TB, or PB.
e. Select the pool type: Tiered or Thin.
f. For a Thin pool, select the Tier.
If the storage system has available capacity from external storage,
you can also select the External tier.
g. If you select Thin pools, you can select Compression, Deduplication
and Compression, or No from the Capacity Saving drop down list.
h. (Optional) Select the pool from the list of available pools. The default
selection is Auto Selected, which means that Storage Advisor selects
the best pool for provisioning the volume based on utilization and tier
requirements.
6. Click the plus sign to move the configured volume to the lower portion of
the Create Volumes page.
A blank row appears at the top of the page where you can create more
volumes.
7. Click Submit.
Result
A job is started to create the volumes and add them to the volume inventory
for the storage system.
Next steps
• Check the status of the volume-creation job by clicking Jobs.
• Attach volumes to a server.
Attaching existing volumes to a server

If there are volumes that have not been attached to servers, you can use this
procedure to attach them.
Before you begin

• Enable security on ports.
• Add servers.
• Create volumes.
Procedure
1. To select volumes and servers, do one of the following:

• On the Volumes inventory page for a storage system, select one or
more volumes and click Attach Volumes to select servers on the
Attach Volumes page.
• On the Servers inventory page, select one or more servers and click
Attach Volumes to select volumes on the Attach Volumes page.
• On the detail page for a pool, select one or more volumes and click
Attach Volumes to select servers on the Attach Volumes page.
2. Click Next to view options for attaching existing volumes.
3. The Host Mode is set by default to the server operating system. You can
make a selection if needed.
The server OS Type is provided when the server is added to Storage
Advisor.
4. By default, the Host Mode Option will depend on the Host Mode
selection.
Default values are set only for VMWARE EX and WIN EX host modes.
The default for all other Host Modes is none.
Storage Advisor identifies all host groups containing any of the server
WWNs. If all of those host groups have the same host mode and host
mode options, those settings are prepopulated with the same settings in
the host groups.
5. Select the LUN Alignment.
By default, Storage Advisor uses the LUN number that is common to the
servers. If attachment is to only one server, this setting has no effect.
6. The Auto Create Zone is set to No by default. You can set it to Yes to
automatically create zones.
7. Click Next to view options for creating and editing LUN paths.
8. In the Create Paths panel, you can view servers and their WWNs, along
with ports on the storage system. The following options are available for
managing LUN paths:
• Existing paths are populated as follows: all existing host groups with
one or more server WWN and the exact same host mode and host
mode options selected on the Attach Settings panel are populated as
paths.
To prevent the volume from being added to an existing path, click the
path to highlight it and click Delete Selected.
• Click Suggest to populate automatically selected paths. By default,
the least-used ports are selected.
• To manually create a path, click a WWN and a port to connect them
with a blue connector line. Click the connector again and then click
Delete Selected to delete the connection.
9. When you are satisfied with the paths, click Submit.
Update a volume
You can expand an unprotected volume and rename any volume.
Procedure
1. Navigate to details for a single volume in one of these ways:

• From the dashboard, click Storage Systems and then click a storage
system tile to view its resources. Click Volumes and then click the
volume tile for the volume you want to update.

• From the dashboard, click Servers and then click a server tile to view
its volumes. Click a volume tile for the volume you want to expand.
2. On the Volume <ID> page click Edit to open the Update Volume page.
Note: To reset a volume to the default settings, click Reset.
3. You can rename the volume, and if it is unprotected, you can change the
size by clicking the right, left, up, and down arrows next to the volume
size.
4. Toggle Compression and Deduplication to enable the desired capacity
saving type.
Toggle
Capacity saving type Toggle compression
deduplication
Deduplication and compression ON ON

Compression only ON OFF
Disable capacity saving OFF OFF
5. Click Submit
Result
A job is started to update the volume.
Volumes inventory
The Volumes page enables you to filter, sort, and edit volumes for a single
storage system, and to select volumes for data protection.
Access the inventory of volumes for a storage system to gain insight into
volume size, data protection and utilization. You can also create volumes,
attach existing volumes and perform data protection operations.
View volume details in either a tile view or a list view. Capacity utilization is
represented by a color bar:
• Green: Below 70%.
• Orange: From 70% to 80%.
• Red: Over 80%.
Note: Volumes labeled HSA-reserved are created automatically when file

pools are created and no operations can be performed on them in Storage
Advisor.

• If there are Data Protection Alerts, click the tile to view the alerts in the
Monitoring tab.
• Click the plus sign (+) to add volumes on the Create Volumes page.
• Click a volume to view details and attach, update or delete the volume.

• Select a volume and click Edit to update the volume by editing the name.
If the volume is unprotected you can also expand the capacity.
• Select one or more volumes to perform one of the following actions:
○ To delete volumes, click Delete. When you delete a volume, it is de-
provisioned and removed from the storage system.
○ To attach existing volumes to one or more servers on the Attach
Volumes page, click Attach Volumes.
○ To apply data protection on the Protect Volumes page, click Protect
Volumes.
○ To suspend data protection, click Suspend.
○ To resume data protection following suspension, click Resume.
○ To unprotect a volume, select it and click Unprotect.
Note: A volume in an "External" replication group cannot be

unprotected.
○ To restore a secondary volume to the primary volume, click Restore to

open the Restore Volume page.
Opening the Volume inventory page in Hitachi Storage Navigator

You can open the Volume inventory page in Hitachi Storage Navigator by
clicking the icon ( ) to launch Storage Navigator and:
• Create a Command Device from a volume
• Restore a blocked volume
• Migrate a volume from one pool to another
Configure file storage

To configure file storage, begin by creating file pools and virtual file servers.
You need both to create file systems.
Then create file systems and use them to create shares and exports that you
can use to offer storage to users.
Managing file pools

Storage Advisor employs the following best practices in file pool creation:
• For creation of the related block pool, use of RAID6 with a minimum of
four parity groups for SAS or one parity group for SSD, FMD, or FMD DC2.

Note: This best practice is highly recommended. If capacity is
chosen from non-conforming parity groups during file pool creation,
a warning displays.
• Creation of a Thin pool that comprises each selected tier (either one or
two).
• Minimum disk requirements for file pool creation:
○ 24 disks for SAS 10K, 15K
○ 48 disks for SAS 7.2K
○ 8 disks for FMD, FMD DC2, SSD
When a user creates a file pool in Storage Advisor, the system automatically
performs the following operations:
1. Identifies parity groups.
2. Creates a block pool.
3. Creates volumes and attaches them to NAS modules.
4. Configures volumes as system drives.
5. Creates a file pool.
File pool inventory

Access the File Pools page from the detail page for a storage system.
Use this page to view file pool information in a tile or list view, and to delete
or expand existing pools, as well as to create new pools.

The colored bars display used capacity, physical capacity allocated for use on
the underlying block storage, and the file over-commit capacity. The over-
commit capacity reflects the amount by which the file pool is over-
subscribed.
Each tile or list row shows whether the file pool is tiered, it's File Pool Label,
and capacity utilization.

• Create a new file pool by clicking the plus (+) sign to open the Create File
Pool page.
• Delete one or more file pools by selecting them and clicking Delete.
• Add capacity by selecting a file pool and clicking Expand to open the
Expand File Pool page.
• Open the File Pool detail page for the file pool by clicking a File Pool Label.
• Click a HDP Pool [ID] link in a tile to open the detail page for the
underlying block storage pool.
Creating file pools

Create file pools to create file systems.
Before you begin
The minimum disk requirements are:

• 24 disks for SAS 10K, 15K
• 48 disks for SAS 7.2K
• 8 disks for FMD, FMD DC2, SSD
Onboard a storage system and create parity groups.
Note: Parity groups are created by a service representative.
Procedure
1. On the File Pools page, click the plus (+) sign to open the Create File
Pool page.
2. Enter a label for the file pool.
3. In the Select Capacity for New File Pool pane, choose storage from
one or two tiers. For a tiered pool, select Platinum and one other tier.
Note: Best practices suggest that file over-commit capacity should

be an estimated 200%. Best practices also include using RAID 6,
with a minimum of four parity groups for SAS drives or one parity
group for SSD, FMD, or FMD DC2 drives. If another RAID layout is
selected, a warning displays.

The information gauge displays the total capacity, with the physical block
capacity and estimated over-commit capacity also detailed.
The Estimated Max Potential: in IOPS displays after each type of

capacity is selected.
Table 3 Tier Definitions
Pool Tier Description
Platinum SSD, FMD, FMD DC2

Gold SAS 15 k
Silver SAS 10 k
Bronze SAS 7.2 k
4. (Optional) Adjust the Utilization Thresholds.

5. Click Submit.
A job is added to create the file pool.
File pool details

Access the File Pool details page by clicking a File Pool Label in the File
Pools page.
Use this page to view details about a file pool and to manage file systems in
the pool.
You can search for a specific file system by searching for its File System Label
in the search box. You can also use the Free Space and File Systems Size
filters to find specific file systems, or filter by virtual file server.
View file system information in either a tile view or a list view, including
capacity utilization and whether or not the file system is mounted.
Capacity utilization is represented by a color bar in each tile.

• Delete the file pool by clicking Delete.
• Expand the file pool by clicking Expand to open the Expand File Pool page.
• View details of an underlying block pool by clicking an HDP pool link in the
file pool tile.
• Add a file system by clicking the plus (+) sign to open the Create File
System page.
• Delete one or more file systems by selecting them and clicking Delete.
• Edit a file system by selecting it and clicking Edit to open the Update File
System page where you can change the label or expand the file system.
• Select a file system and mount or unmount it.
Expanding a file pool

File pool capacity may need to be expanded when the used capacity
approaches the capacity of the underlying block pool.
You can also relabel a file pool or change utilization thresholds.
To access the Expand File Pool page do one of the following:

• In the File Pools page, select a file pool and click Expand.
• In any file pool detail page, click Expand.
Procedure
1. To expand the file pool, select capacity from one of the tiers.
An untiered file pool cannot be expanded into a tiered file pool.
2. If you want to change the file pool label, enter it in the File Pool Label
field.
3. If you want to change utilization thresholds, use the sliders.
4. Click Submit.
The job is added to the Jobs page.
Managing virtual file servers
Virtual file server inventory

Access the Virtual File Servers page from the dashboard or from the detail
page for a storage system.
Use this page to view information about virtual file servers in a tile or list
view. Use the filters to show only offline or online virtual file servers, or filter
by blade number.

• Open the Create Virtual File Server page by clicking the plus (+) sign.
• Open the Virtual File Server detail page, where you can delete, edit, and
enable or disable the virtual file server by clicking the virtual file server
label in any tile or list row.
• Open the storage system detail page by clicking the Storage System [ID]
link in any tile or list row.
• Delete one or more virtual file servers by selecting them and clicking
Delete.
• Change the label for a virtual file server by selecting it and clicking Edit to
access the Update Virtual File Server page.
• You can also Delete, Enable, or Disable by selecting a virtual file server
and clicking the applicable icon.
Creating a virtual file server

Create virtual file servers so you can create file systems.

Before you begin
• Configure ports.
• Obtain the required IP address and subnet mask information for the virtual
file server.
Procedure
1. On the Virtual File Servers page, click the plus sign (+) to open the
Create Virtual File Server page.
2. Enter a label for the virtual file server.
3. Enter the IP address (ipv4 or ipv6) for the virtual file server.
4. Enter the subnet mask for the virtual file server.
5. Select the cluster node Gigabit Ethernet port to which the IP address for
the virtual file server is assigned.
6. Click Submit.
A job is added on the Jobs page to create the virtual file server.
Virtual file server details

Access the Virtual File Server detail page from the Virtual File Servers page.
Use this page to manage a virtual file server's file systems.

• Open the storage system detail page by clicking a Storage System [ID].
• Select a file system in either the list or tile view and do one of the
following:
○ Delete the file system by clicking Delete.
○ Expand a file system or change the label on the Update File System
page by clicking Edit.
○ Click Mount or Unmount to mount or unmount the file system.
○ Open the File System detail page by clicking a file system.
○ Open the detail page for the underlying file pool by clicking the File Pool
link in a tile.
Managing file systems
File system inventory

Access the File Systems page from the detail page for a storage system. Use
this page to view information about file systems in a list or tile view, and to
manage file systems.
You can search for a specific file system by searching for its file system label
in the search box. You can also use the Free Space and File Systems Size
filters to find specific file systems, or filter by virtual file server.

View file system details in either a tile view or a list view, including capacity
utilization and whether or not the file system is mounted.
Capacity utilization is represented by a color bar in each tile.

• View details of a file system by clicking the file system label in a tile or row
to open the File System detail page.
• Add a file system by clicking the plus (+) sign to open the Create File
System page.
• Delete one or more file systems by selecting them and clicking Delete.
• Edit a file system by selecting it and clicking Edit to open the Update File
System page.
• Select a file system and Mount or Unmount it.
• View details of the underlying pool by clicking a File Pool label in a tile.
• View details of the related virtual file server by clicking the VFS label in a
tile.
Creating file systems

Create file systems so that you can create shares on Windows and exports on
Linux.
Before you begin
Create file pools and virtual file servers.
Procedure
1. Click the plus sign (+) on the File Systems page to open the Create
File System page.
2. Select a virtual file server.
a. Enter a label up to 255 alphanumeric characters.
b. Select a format:
• 4K: This choice is best for small block random applications (Virtual
Server / Virtual Desktops / Databases).
• 32K: This choice is best for large block sequential applications
(Video, Media, Images) or when the file system is hosted on NL-SAS
drives.
3. Enter capacity up to 1PB.
4. Select a pool and click Submit.
A job is added to the Jobs page to create the file system.
File system details

Access the File System detail page from the File Systems page.

Use this page to create and manage shares and exports. You can also view
information about a file system and access the associated file pool and virtual
file server.

• Delete the file system by clicking Delete.
• Update label and capacity by clicking Edit to open the Update File System
page.
• Mount or Unmount the file system by clicking Mount or Unmount.
• Access the file pool where the file system was created by clicking the File
Pool [ID] link in the tile.
• Access the virtual file server where the file system was created by clicking
the virtual file server label in the tile.
• Create a share or export by clicking the plus sign (+) to open the Create
Shares/Exports page.
• Delete a share or export by selecting it and clicking Delete.
• Update a share or export by selecting it and clicking Edit to open the
Update Share or Update Export page.
Updating a file system

Update a file system to re-label or expand it.
Procedure
1. On the File Systems page, select a file system and click Edit to open
the Update File System page.
2. You can change the file system label, the capacity, or both.
• To edit the label, enter changes in the label field.
• To change the capacity, enter it and select a new unit of measure, if
necessary.
3. Click Submit.
The new job is added to the Jobs page.
Managing shares and exports

Shares enable file sharing in Windows and exports enable file sharing in
Linux.
Shares and exports inventory

Access the inventory of shares and exports in the detail page for a storage
system to view information about existing shares and exports in a tile or list
view.
Use this page to add, edit, and delete shares and exports. You can also
access related resources.

• To add a share or export, click the plus sign (+) to open the Create
Shares/Exports page.
• To delete a share or export, select a tile and click Delete.
• To edit a share or export, select a tile and click Edit to open the Update
Export page or the Update Share page.
• Click File System label in a tile to open the detail page for the file system
where the share or export was created.
• Click VFS label in a tile to open the Virtual File Server detail page where
the file system was created.
Creating shares and exports

Create shares and exports to offer storage capacity to users.
Procedure
1. Access the Create Shares/Exports page by clicking the plus sign (+)
on the Shares/Exports page.
2. Enter a File System Path and a Share/Export Label.
3. Select a File System.
4. Create a share by selecting Windows or create an export by selecting
Linux.
5. Click Submit.
A job to create the share or export is added to the Jobs page.
Export details
Access the detail page for an export to review internal and external paths and
to edit the export.
The following controls are available:

• Delete the export by clicking Delete.
• Edit the export by clicking Edit to open the Update Export page.
• Access the file system where the export was created by clicking File
System.
VFS.
Updating an export
You can update an export to change the file system path and access
configuration.
Procedure
1. Access the Update Export page by clicking Edit in an Export detail

page.

2. (Optional) Enter a new path in the File System Path field.
3. (Optional) In the Access Configuration field, enter IP addresses, host
names, or the NIS netgroups of the clients who are allowed to access the
NFS export (up to 5957 characters).
If the system has been set up to work with a name server, you can enter
the NIS netgroup to which the clients belong, or the client's computer
name rather than its IP address (not case sensitive).
You can also specify the required flavors of NFS security in a colon-
separated list using the option (sec=<list>).
The supported flavors are:

• none - Connect as a null user
• sys - The traditional security flavor used by NFS, users are not
authenticated by the server
• krb5 - Kerberos authentication
• krb5i - Kerberos authentication with per-messaging integrity
• krb5p - Kerberos authentication with per-message privacy
For example: 10.1.*.*(sec=sys:krb5:krb5i)
See the mount-point-access-configuration man page for further

information.
4. Click Submit to save any changes.
A job is added to the Jobs page to update the export.
Share details
Access the detail page for an share to review internal and external paths and
to edit the export.
The following controls are available:

• Delete the share by clicking Delete.
• Edit the share clicking Edit to open the Update Share page.
• Access the file system where the export was created by clicking the File
System label.
the VFS label.
• Add an existing Account Domain user group to the share by clicking the
plus sign (+) to open the Create Groups page.
Adding existing account domain groups to a share
You can add an existing account domain group to a share. This enables you
to change users permissions when they access the share.
Before you begin
The account domain group and CIFS setup must already exist.

Procedure
1. On the detail page for a share, click the plus sign (+) to open the Create
Groups page.
2. In the Group Name field, type in a user group name from the account
domain.
3. Choose permissions; Full Control, Change, or Read.
4. Click Submit.
A job is started to add the group to the share.
Updating a share
You can update a share to change the file system path, permissions, and
access configuration.
Procedure
1. Access the Update Share page by clicking Edit in a Share detail page.
2. (Optional) Enter a new path in the Modify File System Path field.
3. (Optional) In the Access Configuration field, enter IP addresses of the
clients who can access the share (up to 5,957 characters allowed in this
field).
What to type Means Example
Blank or * Partial addresses All clients can access the 10.168.*.* Clients with
using wildcards. share. matching addresses can
access the share.
Specific addresses Only clients with the specified 10.168.20.2
IP address can access the
share.
Specific address range Only clients with an IP 10.168.20.0/16
address within the specified IP
address range (10.168.20.0
to 10.168.20.255) can access
the share.
Partial addresses using Clients with matching 10.168.*.*
wildcards addresses can access the
share.
Permisssions
What to type Permissions granted
(rw) read-write
(ro) read only
Note: The order in which you specify the entries is important. Take
the following two lines:
• *(ro)
• 10.1.2.38(rw)

The first grants read-only access to all clients, whereas the second
grants read/write access to the specified client. The second line is
redundant, however, as the first line matches all clients. You must
transpose the lines to grant write access to 10.1.2.38. Examples:
• 10.1.2.38(ro) grants read-only access to the client whose IP
address is 10.1.2.38.
• 10.1.2.0/24(ro) grants read-only access to all clients with an IP
address in the range 10.1.2.0 to 10.1.2.255
• 10.1.*.*(rw) grants read-write access to all the matching
clients.
4. (Optional) Select the supplied Everyone group and select permissions.

5. Click Submit to save any changes.
A job is added to the Jobs page to update the share.
System administration using Device Manager - Storage

Navigator
Setting storage system information

You can set the name, contact information, and location of the storage
system.
Caution: When changing a setting more than once, ensure that the current
setting is complete before changing it again. Otherwise, only the new change
will be applied, and the result might be different from what you expected.
Procedure
1. In the Device Manager - Storage Navigator Storage Systems tree,

select the storage system.
2. From Settings, click Environmental Settings > Edit Storage
System.
3. Enter the items that you want to set.
You can enter up to 180 alphanumeric characters (ASCII codes)
excluding several symbols (\ , / ; : * ? " < > | & % ^). Do not use a
space at the beginning or the end.
4. Click Finish.
5. In the Confirm window, check the settings and enter a task name in
Task Name.
6. Click Apply. The task is now registered. If the Go to tasks window for
status check box is checked, the Task window opens to show the status
of the task.

Backing up HDvM - SN configuration files
Before replacing an SVP, you must make a backup copy of the Device
Manager - Storage Navigator configuration files on the SVP. You can then use
the backup copy to restore the configuration file if it becomes necessary, or
to configure a replacement SVP if one fails.
To back up the Device Manager - Storage Navigator configuration files on the

SVP, download them to a folder that you specify.
The following configuration items can be backed up and restored. Before you
create the backup, ensure that the settings are correct.
• Device Manager - Storage Navigator environment parameters
• Authentication server connection settings
• Key management server connection settings
• Password policy when backing up the management client encryption key
• Display settings (table width) for each Device Manager - Storage Navigator
user
• Device Manager - Storage Navigator login warning messages
• Device Manager - Storage Navigator task information
• SMI-S application settings
• SSL certification for HTTPS/SMI-S/RMI
Before you begin

• You must have the Storage Administrator (Initial Configuration) role to
perform this task.
• You must be logged into the SVP.
Procedure
1. Copy the backup file to any folder in the SVP.

2. Open a command prompt window with administrator permissions.
3. Enter the following command:
C:\MAPP\wk\Supervisor\MappIniSet\MappBackup.bat absolute-
path-of-backup-file
Note:
• The backup file must be in .tgz format.
• A space is required between MappBackup.bat and the path to
the backup file.
4. A completion message displays. Click any key to continue.

5. Close the command prompt window.

Tip:
• If you do not specify a folder in which to save the file, the
system automatically creates a default file in the following
location:
SVP-root\wk\Supervisor\MappIniset
\LogsyyyyMMddHHmmss.tgz
where yyyyMMddHHmmss is the year, month, date, and time
that the file was created.
• The backup file is compressed and uses the .tgz format. Use a
tool that supports tar and gzip to extract the data from the .tgz
file.
6. Save the backup file to another computer or external memory device

such as a USB flash memory or hard drive.
Related tasks
• Restoring HDvM - SN configuration files on page 115
Restoring HDvM - SN configuration files

You can use a saved copy of a configuration file to restore the active
configuration file if it becomes necessary, or to configure a replacement SVP
if one fails.
Before you begin

perform this task.
• The SVP is configured so that the service does not start automatically
when starting the system. See the Hardware Reference Guide for your
storage system model for information about the SVP configuration method.
Procedure
1. Close all Device Manager - Storage Navigator sessions.

C:\MAPP\wk\Supervisor\MappIniSet\MappRestore.bat absolute-
path-of-backup-file
Note:
• The backup file must be in .tgz format.
• A space is required between MappRestore.bat and the path to
the backup file.
4. A completion message displays. Click any key to continue.

6. Set the service to run automatically when starting the SVP. Then reboot
the SVP.
Related tasks
• Backing up HDvM - SN configuration files on page 114
System administration using the maintenance utility

Changing the date and time
To keep the date and time on the storage system controller, the SVP, and NAS
modules in sync, you must change the date and time settings on all. This
section includes procedures to change all settings.
Changing the controller clock settings

Complete the following steps to change the date and time on the storage
system controller.
Before you begin

• You must have the Storage Administrator (View & Modify) role to perform
this task.
Procedure
1. In the maintenance utility Administration tree, select Date & Time.

The current settings are displayed.
2. Click Set Up.
3. Change the settings as needed, and either click Apply to save them, or
click Cancel to close the window without saving the changes.
Changing the SVP clock settings

Complete the following steps to change the Windows 7 date and time on the
SVP.
Before you begin

• The management console is connected to the LAN 2 port on the SVP.
• The console has established a remote desktop connection with the SVP.
• The management utility window is displayed on the console.
On the management console that is connected to the SVP:
Procedure
1. On the Windows 7 desktop, click Start > Control Panel.

2. Click Clock, Language, and Region.
3. Click Date and Time.

4. Click Change date and time. The Date and Time Settings window
opens.
5. Set the date and time, then click OK to save the settings and close the
window.
Changing network settings

This section explains how to change the IPv4 and IP6 settings on the SVP to
match the settings on the storage system, and how to change network
permissions.
Setting up TCP/IP for a firewall

To connect the management client and the SVP through a firewall, configure
the firewall so that the TCP/IP port for the protocol you use becomes
available.
When attaching Device Manager - Storage Navigator to multiple storage

systems, the installer must log in to the SVP of each storage system using
separate Device Manager - Storage Navigator sessions and separate web
browser instances.
For details about setting up the SVP, see the Hardware Installation and
Reference Guide for your storage system.
Enabling IPv6 communication

You should assign the SVP the same type of IP addresses (IPv4 or IPv6) that
are used on the storage system. You must also configure the client
computers with the same IP version that you assign to the SVP. In addition,
use the same communication options for both the management client and the
SVP.
If you use IPv6 to display the Device Manager - Storage Navigator main
window when both IPv4 and IPv6 are available, IPv6 addresses are displayed
in the Device Manager - Storage Navigator secondary window but IPv4
communication is actually used.
The following topics provide brief instructions on configuring IPv6

communication.
Changing network communication settings

This procedure explains how to configure a management client to use IPv6
for communication with an SVP.
Procedure
1. In the maintenance utility, click Administration to expand the

Administration navigation pane.
2. Click Network Settings.
The Network Settings window displays the current network settings
and permissions.
3. In the Network Settings window, click Set Up Network Settings.

The Network Settings dialog box displays the current settings for the
Mac address, IPv4 and IPv6 settings, and the network connection mode
for both controllers 1 and 2. It also displays the current settings for the
maintenance port and the storage system internal network.
4. Change the settings as needed and click Apply.
The dialog box closes and returns you to the Network Settings window.
Changing network permissions

This procedure explains how to block or allow HTTP blocking.
Procedure
1. In the maintenance utility, click Administration to expand the

Administration navigation pane.
2. Click Network Settings. The Network Settings window displays the
current network settings and permissions.
3. In the Network Settings window, click Set Up Network Permissions.
4. To enable HTTP blocking, click Enable. To disable HTTP blocking, click
Disable.
5. Click Apply. The dialog box closes and returns you to the Network
Settings window.
Changing the administrator password
Before you begin

• You must have the Storage Administrator (View & Modify) role to complete
this procedure.
Procedure
1. In the maintenance utility Menu navigation tree, click System

Management.
2. Click Change Password.

3. Enter your current password and a new password. Enter the password
again in the Re-enter Password field.
4. Click Finish.

Creating a login message
When users log in to the maintenance utility, they will see a login message.
You can use the login banner message to inform users of specific system
conditions, user requirements, or to provide other information that users may
need to manage the system.
Before you begin
You must have the Storage Administrator (View & Modify) role to complete
this procedure.
Procedure

Management.
2. Click Edit Login Message.

3. Enter a message to be displayed at the time of login. The message can
contain up to 2,048 characters. A line break is counted as one character.
4. Click Apply to save the message and close the dialog box.
Forcing the system lock to release

When a user locks the system, other users cannot log in or access the
system. This feature can be used to ensure that no changes to the system
can be made while maintenance or upgrade procedures are in process.
Caution: Before using this feature, ensure that releasing the system lock will
not cause system problems due to processes that are currently running.
Releasing the system lock can terminate a process before it completes and
possibly leave the system in an unknown state. Check with any users that are
logged on. Wait until their processes are complete before releasing the
system lock.

Before you begin
this procedure.
Procedure

Management.
2. Click Force Release System Lock.

3. A warning message is displayed. Verify that releasing the lock will not
cause data loss or other problems. To release the system lock, click OK.
Click Cancel to close the dialog box without releasing the system lock.
Registering the primary SVP host name

You must register the primary SVP host name before completing any of the
following tasks.
• Specify a host name instead of an IP address when accessing Device
• Obtain the public key certificate for SSL-encrypted communication from
the CA (Certificate Authority). You must register the server name as the

host name to the DNS server or the hosts file. The server name is entered
in the certificate as a common name.
Enter the SVP host name and IP address in the DNS server or the hosts
file of the management client. You can register any host name to the DNS
server or the hosts file, but there are restrictions on the letters you can
use for the host name.
• DNS setting: You must register the IP address and host name of the SVP
to the DNS server that manages the network to which the SVP is
connected.
• Hosts file setting: You must enter the IP address and host name of the
SVP to the hosts file of the management client. The general directory of
the hosts file is:
○ Windows 7: C:\Windows\System32\drivers\etc\hosts
○ UNIX: /etc/hosts
System administration using NAS Manager
Changing the system date and time of the NAS modules

Use the following instructions to change the system date and time.
When the system date and time are set by NAS Manager, they are also
reflected in the system date and time of the storage system.
Tip: See the Hitachi NAS Platform Server and Cluster Administration Guide
for more details about changing the system date and time of the NAS
modules.
Procedure
1. Log on to NAS Manager

2. Click Server Settings.
3. Click Date and Time in the Server Settings window.

4. In the Date and Time window, set date and time.
When using NTP server:
a. Select a time zone in Time Zone field.
b. Enter the IP address or the name of the NTP server in NTP Server
IP/Name field, and then click add.
When using the Active Directory server, enter the IP address or the
name of the NTP server.
When setting without using the NTP server:
a. Enter time in Time field.
b. Enter date in Date field.
5. Confirm the settings and click apply.
Tip: You are not required to enter Time and Date because the
settings are acquired from the NTP server.
6. Click OK.
The window changes to the Login window a few minutes later.
Miscellaneous system administration considerations
Report configuration tool

Complete the following instructions to install the report configuration tool.

Prerequisites for the report configuration tool
You need the following items to install the report configuration tool:
• A Windows computer running Windows Server 2003, Windows Server
2008, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS 5.0, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS 4.0 on
EM64T, or Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS 5.0 on EM64T
You can set both an IPv4 address and an IPv6 address for the computer on
which the report configuration tool is installed. You can also connect the
management client to the SVP over an IPv4 proxy server. When you use
the proxy server, specify a name and a port number of the proxy server as
the HTTP_PROXY environment variable on the computer. For example:
SET HTTP_PROXY=http://proxy.xx.co.jp:8080
• A user account for exclusive use of the report configuration tool
To use the report configuration tool, you must create a user account that is
used exclusively for raidinf commands. Assign the storage administrator
role (initial configuration) only to this user account.
For information on user accounts, see Creating user accounts on
page 148.
• The report configuration tool installation software
The report configuration tool is available on the software installation
media.
Installing the report configuration tool
Procedure
1. Insert the software installation media into a drive.

2. On the media, navigate to the /program/Config_Report_CLI/Win32
folder and double-click setup.exe for Windows. Follow the instructions
on the screen. If you are not using Windows, navigate to /program/
Config_Report_CLI/RIinstsh.
3. When prompted, enter the name of the directory in which to install the
report configuration tool. The installer continues until the tool is installed.
Note: The directory where the report configuration tool is installed

is not specified as an application path on Windows. When
necessary, specify the directory as the application path.
Using the report configuration tool

You can use the report configuration tool to create up to 20 configuration
reports and then view or download them.
The list of commands for creating reports is located in Raidinf command

reference (obtaining configuration reports and tier relocation logs) on

page 249. Creating a configuration report on page 245 describes how to
create a configuration report without using raidinf commands.
Modifying SVP port numbers

You can change SVP port numbers to any arbitrary number. This is optional.
You can also initialize the settings to the original status by initializing the port
number.
For SVP firmware 83-03-01-XX/00 or later, some ports are automatically

assigned unused port numbers.
You can change the automatically assigned port numbers:

• To check automatically assigned port numbers, see Viewing the port
number used in SVP on page 125.
• To change an automatically assigned port number, see Reassigning an
automatically assigned port number on page 128.
• To return a port to its automatically assigned port number, see Initializing
and reassigning an automatically assigned port number on page 129.
• To change the range of port numbers used for automatic assignment, see
Changing the range of an automatically assigned port number on
page 130.
• To return the range of port number for automatic assignment to its original
range, see Initializing the range of an automatically assigned port number
on page 131.
Note: Perform this task only if an SVP port number is used by another
application.
You need to verify the effects before you modify an SVP port number. See
Effects of changing SVP port numbers on page 125.
The following table describes the port number key names and the initial value
of the port number.
Port number key Corresponding SVP

Protocol Initial port number
name software version
MAPPWebServer HTTP 80 83-01-20-XX/00 or later
MAPPWebServerHttps HTTPS 443 83-01-20-XX/00 or later
RMIClassLoader RMI 51099 83-01-20-XX/00 or later
RMIClassLoaderHttps RMI (SSL) 5443 83-01-20-XX/00 or later
RMIIFRegist RMI 1099 83-01-20-XX/00 or later
PreRMIServer RMI 51100 83-01-20-XX/00 or later
Automatically 83-03-01-XX/00 or later

assigned
DKCManPrivate RMI 11099 83-01-24-XX/00 or later

Port number key Corresponding SVP
Protocol Initial port number
name software version
SLP SLP 427 83-01-24-XX/00 or later
SMIS_CIMOM SMI-S 5989 83-01-20-XX/00 or later

assigned
CommonJettyStart HTTP 8080 83-01-24-XX/00 or later
CommonJettyStop HTTP 8210 83-01-24-XX/00 or later
RestAPIServerStop HTTP 9210 83-01-24-XX/00 or later
DeviceJettyStart HTTP 8081 83-01-24-XX/00 or later

assigned
DeviceJettyStop HTTP 8211 83-01-24-XX/00 or later

assigned
Viewing the port number used in SVP

You can view the port number used in SVP.
Procedure
1. Open the Windows command prompt as administrator on the SVP.

2. Move the current directory to the directory where the tool is located (for
example: C:\MAPP\wk\Supervisor). Execute the following command:
C:MAPP\wk\Supervisor\MappIniSet\MappPortRefer.bat serial-number
(optional)
Note: A space is required between MappPortRefer.bat and serial-

number.
If you omitted the serial number, information of every storage system

that is registered in the Storage Device List window is displayed.
For the port on which the port number information is not allocated, Not
Defined is displayed and a completion message displays.
3. Press any key to acknowledge the message and close the message box.
4. Close the Windows command prompt.
Effects of changing SVP port numbers

Set the firewall settings of the management client according to new SVP port
numbers.
The following table describes the effects for each port number.

User reference guide on
Port number key name Effects
changing the SVP port number
MAPPWebServer Changes the method to specify See Logging in to Device

URL for Device Manager - Manager - Storage Navigator on
MAPPWebServerHttps Storage Navigator login page 46.
In Hitachi Command Suite: Hitachi Command Suite
Installation and Configuration
You must change the HCS port
number to be the same number. Guide
RMIClassLoader None None
RMIClassLoaderHttps Report configuration tool See Raidinf command reference

(raidinf commands) (obtaining configuration reports
and tier relocation logs) on
When you login to Device page 249.
Manager - Storage Navigator by
using raidinf command, you
must specify the IP address and
new port number of the SVP.
RMIIFRegist When you execute the Export Performance Guide

Tool command, you must (Performance Monitor, Server
specify the IP address and new Priority Manager)
port number of the SVP for IP-
sub-command.
In Hitachi Command Suite: Hitachi Command Suite
Installation and Configuration
You must change the HCS port
Guide
number to the same number.
PreRMIServer None None
DKCManPrivate None None
SLP You must change the SMI-S Hardware Reference Guide for
port number to the same your storage system
number.
SMIS_CIMOM You must change the SMI-S Hardware Reference Guide for
port number to the same your storage system
number.
If the storage system is
83-03-01-XX/00 or later, check
the port number which is used
after registering the storage
system. For detail, see Viewing
the port number used in SVP on
page 125.
CommonJettyStart None None
CommonJettyStop None None
RestAPIServerStop None None
DeviceJettyStart None None
DeviceJettyStop None None

Changing the SVP port number
You can change the SVP port number to any arbitrary number. After changing
the port number, the SVP will be restarted.
Before you begin

• Remote desktop connection from the management client to SVP has been
performed.
• The range of the available port number is from 1 to 65535. Make sure the
new port number is not duplicated with the number used in another
application.
• You can enter multiple instances of port-number-key-name and port-
number. For example:
MappSetPortEdit.bat MAPPWebServer 81 MAPPWebServerHttps 444
• The management file of the SVP port number is stored in the following
location:
path-to-tool\mpprt\cnf\mappsetportset.properties
Note:
• Do not change the management file of the port number.
• Close the management file of the port number while executing the
command for changing or initializing.
• If the SVP software version of the registered storage system does not
support changing the port number, update the SVP software.
• Port numbers 1 to 1023 are reserved for other application programs, so do
not use these numbers. If you use these numbers and encounter a
problem, change the number to 1024 or higher.
• The following port numbers cannot be used for MAPPWebServer or
MAPPWebServerHttps:
2049, 4045, 6000
Procedure
1. Close all Device Manager - Storage Navigator sessions on the SVP.

example, C:\MAPP\wkSupervisor). Execute the following command:
C:MAPP\wk\Supervisor\MappIniSet\MappSetPortEdit.bat port-
number-key-name port-number
Note:
• A space is required between MappSetPortEdit.bat and port-
number-key-name.

• A space is required between port-number-key-name and port-
number.
4. A service restart message box displays, followed by a completion

message box. Press any key to acknowledge the message and close the
message box.
Initializing the SVP port number

You can initialize the SVP port settings and restore to the original status.
After initializing the port number, the SVP will be restarted.
To initialize the automatically assigned port number: See Initializing and

reassigning an automatically assigned port number on page 129
Before you begin
Remote desktop connection from the management client to SVP has been
performed.
Procedure

2. Open the Windows command prompt on the SVP.
example, C:\MAPP\wk\Supervisor\MappIniSet). Execute the following
command:
C:MAPP\wk\Supervisor\MappIniSet\MappSetPortInit.bat
4. An initialization confirmation message box displays.
If you want to continue, enter Y, and then press the Enter key. If you
want to cancel the task, enter N, and then press the Enter key.
5. A service restart message box displays, followed by a completion
message box. Press any key to acknowledge the message and close the
message box.
Reassigning an automatically assigned port number

You can reassign the port number that is automatically assigned to the
storage system.
If the port number assigned to the storage system is used in another

application, the port number is reassigned. Also, if you disabled the
automatic assign, this deletes the unnecessary port number that is already
assigned.
Caution:

• Stop the storage system service before reassigning. If you did not stop
before reassigning, stop the storage system service in Storage Device List
window, then start the service.
• The port for DeviceJettyStart and DeviceJettyStop that is assigned when
starting the storage system service cannot be reassigned.
• If you disable the function which is using the port, this deletes the port
number that is already assigned.
Procedure
1. Logout from Device Manager - Storage Navigator on the storage system

that you want to reassign.
2. Stop the service of the storage system that you want to reassign.
example, C:\MAPP\wk\Supervisor). Execute the following command:
C:MAPP\wk\Supervisor\MappIniSet\MappPortManageRenum.bat serial-
number (optional)
Note: A space is required between MappPortManageRenum.bat

and serial-number.
If you omitted the serial number, it is executed for the storage system of
83-03-01-XX/00 or later that is registered in the Storage Device List
window.
5. A confirmation message box displays.
If you want to continue, enter Y, and then press the Enter key. If you
want to cancel the task, enter N, and then press the Enter key.
8. Start the service of the storage system which is reassigned.
Initializing and reassigning an automatically assigned port number

You can initialize the port number that is automatically assigned to the
storage system.
Caution:
• Stop the service of the storage system which has the status Ready in the
Storage Device List window before initializing.
• If you did not stop before initializing, execute Reassigning an automatically
assigned port number on page 128.
Procedure
1. Logout from Device Manager - Storage Navigator.

2. Stop the service of all the storage systems which have the status Ready
in the Storage Device List window.
C:MAPP\wk\Supervisor\MappIniSet\MappPortManageInit.bat
• If you want to continue, enter Y, and then press the Enter key.
• If you want to cancel the task, enter N, and then press the Enter key.
7. Reassign the port number.
C:MAPP\wk\Supervisor\MappIniSet\MappPortManageRenum.bat serial-
number (optional)
Note: A space is required between MappPortManageRenum.bat

and serial-number.
If you omitted the serial number, the batch file is run for the storage
system of 83-03-01-XX/00 or later which is registered in Storage
Device List window.
10. Reassign the port number for all the registered storage systems by
executing Steps 7 through 9.
12. Start the service of the storage system.
Changing the range of an automatically assigned port number

You can change the range of the port number that is automatically assigned
to the storage system.
Procedure

C:MAPP\wk\Supervisor\MappIniSet\MappPortRangeSet.bat port-
number-key-name port-number-range
Note:
• A space is required between MappPortRangeSet.bat and port-
number-key-name.

• A space is required between port-number-key-name and port-
number-range.
The following table shows the port number key name and initial value of
the port number range which can be changed. Port 0 is not assigned.
Port number key name Initial value of port number Remark

range
PreRMIServer 51100 to 51355 None
SMIS_CIMOM 5989 to 6244 None
DeviceJettyStart 48081 to 48336 None
DeviceJettyStop 48411 to 48666 None
unavailable 1 to 1023 Port number that is not used
in automatic assign
• The valid range of the port number is between 1 and 65535. Use a
port number that is not used in another service.
• Port numbers between 1 and 1023 are reserved for the other
applications. If you exclude a number between 1 and 1023 from the
setting value of unavailable, the port numbers might not operate
normally.
• The following can be used for the port number range:
Numbers, space, symbols (, -) and rm
• You can specify multiple port-number-key-name and port-number-
range.
For example: MappPortRangeSet.bat PreRMIServer 51200-55000
SMIS_CIMOM 5989-6244,8000
Initializing the range of an automatically assigned port number

You can initialize the range of the port number that is automatically assigned
to the storage system.
Procedure

C:MAPP\wk\Supervisor\MappIniSet\MappPortRangeInit.bat

Releasing HTTP communication blocking

If the web server supports SSL (HTTPS), you can use the HTTP setting tool to
release a block to the HTTP communication port as needed.
Before you begin

perform this task.
Procedure

C:\MAPP\wk\Supervisor\MappIniSet\MappHttpRelease.bat
4. A completion message box displays. Press any key to acknowledge the
message and close the message box.
Blocking HTTP communication to the SVP

If the web server supports SSL (HTTPS), you can use the HTTP setting tool to
block or allow access to the HTTP communication port as needed.
Before you begin

perform this task.
Procedure

C:\MAPP\wk\Supervisor\MappIniSet\MappHttpBlock.bat

4
User Administration
This chapter describes various user roles, permissions, and groups available
to manage your storage system.
□ User administration for maintenance utility
□ User administration for Device Manager - Storage Navigator
□ User Administration for NAS Manager
User Administration 133

User administration for maintenance utility
The maintenance utility allows you to set up and manage user accounts.
Required roles for operating Maintenance Utility

You can control the availability of using each operation window of
Maintenance Utility for a user by registering the user in the user group and
assigning them with the appropriate role.
The following table lists the required roles for using specific Maintenance
Utility operation windows.
Maintenance Utility operation window Required role name
Initial Setting Wizard Storage Administrator (Initial Configuration)
Set Up System Information Storage Administrator (Initial Configuration)
Firmware Support Personnel or User Maintenance*
User Administration Security Administrator (View & Modify)
Alert Notifications Storage Administrator (Initial Configuration)
Set Up Date & Time Storage Administrator (Initial Configuration)
Set Up Network Settings Storage Administrator (Initial Configuration)
Licenses Storage Administrator (Initial Configuration)
Audit Log Settings Audit Log Administrator (View & Modify)
Turn on/off Locate LEDs Support Personnel or User Maintenance*
Power on Storage System Support Personnel or User Maintenance*
Power off Storage System Support Personnel or User Maintenance*
Edit UPS Mode Support Personnel or User Maintenance*
Edit Login Message Storage Administrator (Initial Configuration)
Select Cipher Suite Security Administrator (View & Modify)
Update Certificate Files Security Administrator (View & Modify)
Force Release System Lock Storage Administrator (Initial Configuration)
Reboot GUM Support Personnel or User Maintenance
Change Password No role is required.
Boot System Safe Mode Support Personnel*
Alert Display Support Personnel or User Maintenance*
Alert Display Related to FRU Support Personnel or User Maintenance*
134 User Administration

Maintenance Utility operation window Required role name
Administration Menu N/A
Power Management N/A
System Management N/A
Resetting GUM N/A
*
• Support Personnel: Operations performed by the service personnel
• User Maintenance: Operations performed by the user
Setting up user accounts

This procedure describes how to create a user account and register the
account to a user group with appropriate roles. You can create up to 20
users, including the built-in user.
Procedure
1. In the Maintenance Utility window, click Administration > User

Administration.
2. In the User Groups tab, click Create User.
3. Create a new user account. Specify the User Name, Account Status,
Authentication and User Group. Click Finish.

Item Description
User Name
Account Status The following statuses are available:
Enable = user can use the account.
Disable = user cannot use the account or log

in to the storage management software.
Authentication The following methods are available:
Local = does not use authentication server.
Uses a dedicated password for storage
management software.
External = uses an authentication server.
4. Confirm the settings, and then click Apply.

5. When the completion message appears, click Close.
Disabling user accounts

The following procedure describes how to disable user accounts.
Observe the following guideline:

• Log into an account that is different from the user whose account that you
want to disable (you cannot disable the current login user account).
• To disable the user account specified by the registered storage system in
the Storage Device List window, click Stop Service for the registered
storage system. After disabling the user account, click Edit to enable the
user account.
Procedure

Administration.
2. In the User Groups tab, click the user group to which the user belongs.

3. Click the Users tab, and then select the user that you want to disable.
4. Click Edit.
5. For Account Status, click Disable, and then click Finish.

6. Confirm the settings, and then click Apply.

7. When a completion message appears, click Close.

Removing user accounts
Security administrators can remove a user account when the account is no
longer in use. Built-in user accounts cannot be deleted. If deleting the current
login user account, you can continue the storage management software
operation until you log out.
Note: To delete the user account specified by the registered storage system
in the Storage Device List window, click Stop Service of the registered
storage system. After deletion, click Edit to enable the user account.
Procedure

Administration.
2. In the User Groups tab, click the user group to which the user belongs.

3. Click the Users tab, and then select the user you want to remove.
4. Click Remove.
The Confirm window opens.
5. In the Confirm window, confirm the settings, and then click Apply.

6. At the completion message, click Close.
Backing up user accounts

Procedure
1. Click User Account Information > Backup.

2. Specify a storage destination and a file name in the displayed window
and download a file.
3. When the following message appears, click Close.
Restoring user account information
Procedure
1. Click User Account Information > Restore
The Restore User Account window opens.

2. Specify file names to be restored, and then click Apply.

3. When a completion message appears, click Close.

User administration for Device Manager - Storage Navigator
This section describes various user roles, permissions and groups available to
manage your storage system.
User administration overview

Read and understand the following information before managing users or
user groups.
• When a user is assigned to multiple user groups, the user has the
permissions of all the roles in each user group that are enabled on the
resource groups assigned to each user group.
• If a user has All Resource Groups Assigned set to Yes, the user can access
all the resources in the storage system. For example, if a user is a security
administrator and a storage administrator and has all resource groups
assigned, the user can edit the storage for all the resources.
If this is an issue, the recommended solution is to register two user
accounts in the storage system and use the two accounts for different
purposes.
○ A security administrator user account that has All Resource Groups
Assigned set to Yes.
○ A storage administrator user account that has only some of the resource
groups assigned.
• For user groups whose roles are other than Storage Administrator, All
Resource Groups Assigned is automatically set to Yes. If you delete all the
roles except Storage Administrator, reassign resource groups to the user
group because All Resource Groups Assigned is automatically set to No.
Related tasks
• Changing assigned resource groups on page 161
Workflow for creating and managing user accounts

Administrators use Device Manager - Storage Navigator to create accounts
for all users. The following steps show a basic workflow:
• If an authentication server is used, connect the management clients to it.
An authentication server allows users to log in to Device Manager -
Storage Navigator with the same password as the one used for other
applications in a system.
• If an authentication server is not used, use a password dedicated to
Device Manager - Storage Navigator to log in. Whether to use the
authentication server can be specified for each user.
• Review Using an authentication server and authorization server on
page 162 for information and instructions.
• Review Managing user groups on page 155 to understand the user groups
and roles you can assign new or existing users.

• Create user accounts and assign permissions. See Creating user accounts
on page 148.
• Change, disable, or delete user passwords and permissions. See Changing
user passwords on page 151.
Administrator tasks
To authenticate a user using an authentication server, specify settings for
connecting to the server.
Note: When an administrator changes a support person's user account, he or

she must notify the user. Otherwise, the user will not be able to log in.
Procedure
1. Log in to Device Manager - Storage Navigator as a built-in user.

Use maintenance as the user name, and raid-maintenance as the
password. The built-in user has all permissions.
the password of the built-in user account.
3. Create a user group. Some user groups, such as built-in groups, are
available by default.
4. Create a user.
5. If necessary, change the environment parameter.
6. Save the user account information and environment parameter file.
7. Notify the user of the new user name and the password.
User tasks
Procedure
1. Use the user name and password provided by the administrator to log in
to Device Manager - Storage Navigator.
the password to your own password.
Managing user accounts

This process describes how to create and manage local administrator
accounts in the storage system. You will need to use the local administrator
account created during the initial setup step, or create administrator accounts
using the procedures described in this chapter as needed to access the
storage system temporarily when the management software is not available.
It is prudent to create more than one user account in case the system
administrator is not available when the management software becomes
unavailable, or when someone else needs to access the system. This is also
helpful if multiple users need to access Device Manager - Storage Navigator
to use storage features that are not available in the management software.

Related tasks
• Creating user accounts on page 148
• Changing user passwords on page 151
• Changing user permissions on page 152
• Enabling or Disabling user accounts on page 153
• Deleting user accounts on page 154
Creating user accounts

This section explains how to create a user account and register the account
to a user group with appropriate permissions.
Before you begin

• You must have the Security Administrator (View & Modify) role to perform
this task.
• You or an authorized technical support representative can log in to Device
Manager - Storage Navigator and CCI with user accounts that are created
in Device Manager - Storage Navigator.
• Support representatives must have the Support Personnel (Vendor Only)
role to log in.
• The system can support a maximum of 20 user accounts, including the
built-in user accounts.
Table 4 User name and password for Device Manager - Storage Navigator
Length in
Item Characters that can be used
characters
User name 1-256 • Alphanumeric characters

• The following symbols:
#$%&'*+-./=?@^_`{|}~
Password 6-256 • Alphanumeric characters

• All symbols
Table 5 User name and password for logging in to CCI
Length in
characters
User name 1-63 • Alphanumeric characters

• The following symbols:1
-.@_
Password 6-63 • Alphanumeric characters

• The following symbols:1
,-.@_
Note:

Length in
characters
1. When you use a Windows computer, you can also specify a backslash (\). When you use a
UNIX computer, you can also specify a slash (/).
Procedure
1. In the Device Manager - Storage Navigator Administration tree, select

User Groups.
2. On the User Groups tab, select a user group to which to add a user.
This is dependent on which permissions you want to give to the user.
The user logging in to NAS Manager must belong to the built-in
Administrator group.
3. On the Roles tab, confirm that the displayed permissions are appropriate
for the user.
4. On the Users tab, click Create User.
5. Enter a name.
6. Select Activate or Lock for the account. If you select Lock, the user of
this account is disabled and cannot log in to Device Manager - Storage
Navigator and NAS Manager.
7. To use an authentication server, select External. To authenticate users
with only Device Manager - Storage Navigator, or to log in to NAS
Manager, select Local.
8. If you select Local, enter the password for this user account in two
places.
For a password, all alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
The length must be between 6 and 256.
9. Click Finish.
10. In the Confirm window, check the settings.
status check box is checked, the Task window opens to display the
status of the task.
Character restrictions for user names and passwords

Note the following restrictions for user names and passwords.
A user account created by using Device Manager - Storage Navigator can be

used for maintenance utility, CCI, and NAS Manager. It can also be used by
maintenance personnel for logins (the Support Personnel role is required).
The number of characters and types of characters that can be used vary
between Device Manager - Storage Navigator, CCI, and NAS Manager. If a
user uses all three programs, specify a user name and a password that
satisfy the following conditions.

Item Length in characters Characters that can be used
User name 1-20 • Alphanumeric (ASCII code)

characters
• The following symbols1, 3:
-._
Password 6-63 • Alphanumeric (ASCII code)
characters
• The following symbols1, 2:
-,.:@_
Note:
1. If the host on which CCI is installed is running on UNIX, a slash (/) can be specified.
2. If the host on which CCI is installed is running on Windows, a back slash (\) can be specified.
3. Do not specify a user name consisting of periods (.) (..) only, or specify a user name
beginning with a hyphen (-). If you specify such names, you cannot log in to NAS Manager.
Note: To use NAS Manager after installing NAS modules, users created with
DKCMAIN firmware 83-03-2x or earlier, must change the password. If you do
not change the password, you cannot log in to NAS Manager. Also, if a user
name contains more than 20 characters, the user cannot log in to NAS
Manager.
User name and password for Device Manager - Storage Navigator
Length in
characters
User name 1-256 • Alphanumeric (ASCII code) characters

#$%&'*+-./=?@^_`{|}~
You cannot use the # symbol when you enter a user name in
a screen from the Tool Panel dialog box.
Password 6-256 • Alphanumeric (ASCII code) characters
• All symbols
You cannot use the quotation mark (") or backslash (\)

symbols when you enter a password in a screen from the
Tool Panel dialog box.
Note: If you cannot log in on a Tool Panel dialog box screen, check to see if
you have used a number sign (#) in the user name, or used a quotation
mark (") or a backslash (\) in the password.
User name and password for logging in to SVP
Length in
characters

Length in
characters

!#$%&'-.@^_`{}~
Password 6- 127 • Alphanumeric (ASCII code) characters
• All symbols
User name and password for logging in to CCI
Length in
characters

• The following symbols*:
-.@_
Password 6- 63 • Alphanumeric (ASCII code) characters
-,.@_
*When you use a Windows computer for CCI, you can also specify a backslash (\). When you use a
UNIX computer for CCI, you can also specify a slash (/).
User name and password for logging in to NAS Manager
Item Length in Characters that can be used
User name 1-20 • Alphanumeric (ASCII code)

characters
-._
Password 6-256 • Alphanumeric (ASCII code)
characters
• All symbols:
-._
* Do not specify a user name consisting of periods (.) (..) only, or specify a user name beginning
with a hyphen (-). If you specify such names, you cannot log in to NAS Manager.
Changing user passwords

This section explains how to change or re-issue passwords for other users on
Caution: Do not select any user account used to connect to a storage system
that is registered in the Storage Device List window. For details, see the
Hardware Reference Guide for your storage system.
Before you begin

• Security administrators with View & Modify roles can change user
passwords on Device Manager - Storage Navigator.

• If the target user has a local user account for Device Manager - Storage
Navigator, the security administrator can use Device Manager - Storage
Navigator to change the target user's password.
• If the target user has a local user account for the authentication server,
the security administrator can use the authentication server to change the
target user's password. After the password is changed, the target user can
use the new password on both the authentication server and Device
Procedure

User Groups.
2. On the User Groups tab, select the user group to which the user
belongs.
3. On the User tab, select the user whose password you want to change.
4. In the User tab, click Change Password.
5. In the Change Password dialog box, specify a new password for the
user in the two password fields.
6. Click Finish.
Task Name.
of the task.
Changing user permissions

User permissions are determined by the groups to which the user belongs.
You change these permissions by changing membership in the user group. A
user can belong to multiple user groups.
For example, if you want to change the role of the user who manages
security to the performance management role, add this user to the Storage
Administrator (Performance Management) role group and then remove the
user from the Security Administrator (View & Modify) role group.
Before you begin

this task.
• The user whose permissions you want to change must belong to at least
one user group.
• A user account can belong to up to 8 user groups.
• A user group can contain a maximum of 20 user accounts, including the
built-in user accounts.

Adding a user
Procedure

User Groups.
2. On the User Groups tab, select the user group that has the role you
want the user to have, and then add or remove users.
To add users to the selected groups:
a. Click Add Users.
b. In the Add Users window, select a user and click Add.
To remove users from the selected groups:
a. In the Remove Users window, select one or more users.
b. Click More Actions > Remove Users.
3. Click Finish.
4. In the Confirm window, check the settings. If the Task Name field is
empty, enter a task name.
5. Click Apply. The task is now registered. If you selected the Go to tasks
window for status check box, the Task window opens to show the
status of the task.
Enabling or Disabling user accounts

Security Administrators can disable a user account to prevent the user from
logging in to Device Manager - Storage Navigator and NAS Manager
temporarily. Security Administrators can also enable a user account to allow
the user to log in to Device Manager - Storage Navigator and NAS Manager.
To allow or prevent a user from logging in to Device Manager - Storage

Navigator and NAS Manager, follow the steps below.
Before you begin

• Log into an account that is different from the user whose account that you
want to enable or disable.
this task.
Procedure
1. In the Device Manager - Storage Navigator Administration tree, click

User Groups.
2. On the User Group tab, select the user group.
3. On the Users tab, select a user.
4. Click Edit User.

5. Click the Account Status check box.
• To allow the user to log in to Device Manager - Storage Navigator and
NAS Manager, click Enable.
• To prevent the user from logging in to Device Manager - Storage
Navigator and NAS Manager, click Disable.
6. Click Finish.
of the task.
Deleting user accounts

Security Administrators can delete a user account when the account is no
longer in use. Built-in user accounts cannot be deleted.
Before you begin
You must have the Security Administrator (View & Modify) role to perform
this task.
Procedure

User Groups.
2. On the User Groups tab, click a user group to which a user belongs.
3. On the Users tab, select the user whose account you want to delete.
4. Click More Actions > Delete Users.
5. In the Delete Users window, select the user to be deleted, then click
Finish.
of the task.
Releasing a user lockout

If a user attempting to log in to Device Manager - Storage Navigator or
Command Control Interface enters an incorrect username or password three
times, the system sets the login status to locked, preventing further login
attempts for 60 seconds. If necessary, you can release the locked status
before the lock times out.

Before you begin
You must have the Security Administrator (View & Modify) role to perform
this task.
Procedure
1. In the Administration tree, select User Groups.

2. On the User Groups tab, click a user group to which the locked-out user
belongs.
3. On the User tab, select the user you want to unlock.
4. On the User tab, click More Actions > Release Lockout.
The Release Lockout window opens.
5. Specify a task name, and then click Apply.
Managing user groups

You can use the Device Manager - Storage Navigator to view existing user
groups, and to create, modify, or delete them.
Roles
The following table shows all the roles that are available for use and the
permissions that each role provides to the users. You cannot create a custom
role.
Role Capabilities
Security Administrator • Viewing information about user accounts and encryption settings
(View Only) • Viewing information about the encryption key in the key SVP
Security Administrator • Configuring user accounts
(View & Modify) • Creating encryption keys and configuring encryption settings
• Viewing and switching where encryption keys are generated
• Backing up and restoring encryption keys
• Deleting encryption keys backed up in the key SVP
• Viewing and changing the password policy for backing up encryption keys on the
management client
• Connection to the external server
• Backing up and restoring connection configuration to the external server
• Configuring the certificate used for the SSL communication
• Configuring the fibre channel authentication (FC-SP)
• Configuring resource groups
• Editing virtual management settings
• Setting reserved attributes for global-active device
Audit Log Administrator • Viewing audit log information and downloading audit logs
(View Only)
Audit Log Administrator • Configuring audit log settings and downloading audit logs
(View & Modify)
Storage Administrator • Viewing storage system information
(View Only)
Storage Administrator • Configuring settings for storage systems
(Initial Configuration)

Role Capabilities
• Configuring settings for SNMP

• Configuring settings for e-mail notification
• Configuring settings for license keys
• Viewing, deleting, and downloading storage configuration reports
• Acquiring all the information about the storage system and updating Device
Manager - Storage Navigator window by clicking Refresh All
Storage Administrator • Configuring settings for CLPR
(System Resource • Configuring settings for MP unit
Management) • Deleting tasks and releasing exclusive locks of resources
• Configuring Server Priority Manager
• Configuring tiering policies
Storage Administrator • Configuring caches
(Provisioning) • Configuring volumes, pools, and virtual volumes
• Formatting and shredding volumes
• Configuring external volumes
• Configuring Dynamic Provisioning
• Configuring host groups, paths, and WWN
• Configuring Volume Migration except splitting Volume Migration pairs when using
CCI
• Configuring access attributes for volumes
• Creating and deleting quorum disk used with global-active device
• Creating and deleting global-active device pairs
Storage Administrator • Configuring monitoring
(Performance Management) • Starting and stopping monitoring
Storage Administrator • Performing pair operations for local copy
(Local Copy) • Configuring environmental settings for local copy
• Splitting Volume Migration pairs when using CCI
Storage Administrator • Remote copy operations in general
(Remote Copy) • Operating global-active device pairs (except for creation and deletion)
Support Personnel (Vendor Configuring the SVP
Only) • Normally, this role is for service representatives.
Support Personnel (User) • Viewing storage system status
• Installing OS security patches
• Updating operating systems
• Performing basic maintenance
Built-in groups, roles, and resource groups

You can assign users to one or more built-in user groups and custom user
groups. You cannot change roles or resource groups set to the built-in
groups, but you can create custom user groups according to the needs of
your storage environment.
For more information about resource groups, see the Provisioning Guide.
The following table shows all the built-in groups, and their built-in roles and
resource groups.

Resource
Built-in group Role
group
Administrator • Security Administrator (View & Modify) All Resource

• Audit Log Administrator (View & Modify) Groups
• Storage administrator (Initial Assigned
Configuration)
• Storage Administrator (System Resource
Management)
• Storage Administrator (Provisioning)
• Storage Administrator (Performance
Management)
• Storage Administrator (Local Copy)
• Storage Administrator (Remote Copy)
System • Security Administrator (View & Modify) All Resource
• Audit Log Administrator (View & Modify) Groups
• Storage Administrator (Initial Assigned
Configuration)
Management)
Management)
Security Administrator (View Only) • Security Administrator (View Only) All Resource
• Audit Log Administrator (View Only) Groups
• Storage Administrator (View Only) Assigned
Security Administrator (View & • Security Administrator (View & Modify) All Resource
Modify) • Audit Log Administrator (View & Modify) Groups
• Storage Administrator (View Only) Assigned
Audit Log Administrator (View • Audit Log Administrator (View Only) All Resource
Only) • Storage Administrator (View Only) Groups
Assigned
Audit Log Administrator (View & • Audit Log Administrator (View & Modify) All Resource
Modify) • Storage Administrator (View Only) Groups
Assigned
Storage Administrator (View Only) • Storage Administrator (View Only) meta_resource
Storage Administrator (View & • Storage Administrator (Initial meta_resource

Modify) Configuration)
Management)
Management)
Support Personnel • Storage Administrator (Initial All Resource
Configuration) Groups
• Storage Administrator (System Resource Assigned
Management)

Resource
Built-in group Role
group

Management)
• Support Personnel
Related tasks
• Checking if a role is available to a user group on page 158
Verifying the roles available to a user group

You can use Device Manager - Storage Navigator to verify the roles that are
available to use with any user group.
Before you begin
You must have the Security Administrator (View Only) role to perform this
task.
Procedure
1. In the Device Manager - Storage Navigator tree, click User

Administration.
2. On the User Groups tab, click the name (not the checkbox) of a user
group whose roles you want to check.
3. In the User Administration window, click the Roles tab.
The list of roles applied to the selected user group is displayed.
4. To return to the User Administration window, click User
Administration.
Checking if a role is available to a user group

You can use Device Manager - Storage Navigator to verify the roles that are
available to use with any user group.
You can assign users to one or more built-in user groups and custom user
groups. You cannot change roles or resource groups set to the built-in
groups, but you can create custom user groups according to the needs of
your storage environment.
Before you begin
You must have the Security Administrator (View Only) role to perform this
task.
Procedure
1. In the Device Manager - Storage Navigator Administration tree, click

User Administration.

2. On the User Groups tab, click the name (not the checkbox) of a user
group whose roles you want to check.
3. In the User Administration window, click the Roles tab. The list of
roles applied to the selected user group is displayed.
4. To return to the User Administration window, click User
Administration.
Related references
• Built-in groups, roles, and resource groups on page 156
Creating a new user group

This section explains how administrators can create a user group.
A user group name consists of 1 to 64 characters including alphanumeric

characters, spaces, and the following symbols:
!#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_`{}~
The system can support a maximum of 32 user groups, including the nine
built-in user groups.
Before you begin

this task.
Procedure

2. In the User Groups tab, click Create User Groups to open the Create
User Group window.
3. Enter a user group name.
4. If you use an authorization server, click Check and verify that the
entered user group name is registered in the authorization server.
5. Click Next to open the Assign Roles window.
6. Select the roles to assign to the user group, and click Add.
7. Click Next to open the Assign Resource Groups window.
8. Select the resource groups to assign to the user group, and click Add. If
you select a role other than the storage administrator in the Assign
Roles window, you do not need to select resource groups because all the
resource groups are assigned automatically.
9. Click Finish to finish and confirm settings.
Click Next to add another user.
10. Check the settings and enter a task name in Task Name.
of the task.

Changing a user group name
This section explains how to change the name of a user group.
Before you begin

this task.
• The names of built-in groups cannot be changed.
• A user group name consists of 1 to 64 characters including alphanumeric
characters (ASCII), spaces and the following symbols:
#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_`{}~
Procedure

2. In the User Groups tab, select the user group.
3. Click More Actions > Edit User Group.
4. In the Edit User Group window, enter a new user group name.
5. If you use an authorization server, click Check and verify that the
entered user group name is registered in the authorization server.
6. Click Finish.
Task Name.
status of the task.
Changing user group permissions

This section explains how to change the permissions that are assigned to
user groups.
Before you begin

this task.
• The permissions of a built-in group cannot be changed.
Procedure

User Groups.
2. In the User Groups tab, select the user group whose permission you
want to change.
3. Click the Roles tab.
4. Click Edit Role Assignment.
5. In the Edit Role Assignment window, change roles to be assigned to
the user group.

• Select roles to add, and then click Add.
• Select a role to remove, and then click Remove.
6. Click Finish.
Task Name.
status check box is checked, the Task window opens.
Changing assigned resource groups

This section explains how to change the resource groups that are assigned to
the user group.
Before you begin

this task.
• Create a resource group to be assigned to the user group in advance.
• You cannot change the resource groups of a user group that has All
Resource Groups Assigned set to Yes
• You cannot change resource groups of a built-in group.
Procedure

User Groups.
2. On the User Groups tab, select a user group to change the resource
group.
3. Select the Resource Groups tab.
4. Click Edit Resource Group Assignment to open the Edit Resource
Group Assignment window.
5. In the Edit Resource Group Assignment window, change resource
groups to be assigned to the user group.
• Select the resource group to add, and click Add.
• Select the resource group to remove, and click Remove.
6. Click Finish.
Task Name.
status of the task.
Deleting a user group

This section explains how to delete a user group when it is no longer needed.
Before you begin

this task.
• You cannot delete a built-in user group.

• You cannot delete a user group if the users in it belong to only the user
group to be deleted.
Procedure

User Groups.
2. In the User Groups tab, select the user-created user groups that you
want to delete.
3. Click More Actions > Delete User Groups.
4. Check the settings, then click Apply.
Using an authentication server and authorization server

An authentication server enables users to log in to Device Manager - Storage
Navigator with the same password as the password that they use for other
applications. The authentication server must be configured for each user.
The following figure shows the login workflow without an authentication

server:
The following figure shows the login workflow with an authentication server:
If an authorization server works together with an authentication server, the

user groups that are registered in the authorization server can be assigned to
a user for Device Manager - Storage Navigator.

The following figure shows the login workflow when an authentication server
and an authorization server are used in combination:
You can use the authentication server without knowing the host names and
port numbers, if you register the information of the authentication server as
an SRV record in the DNS server. If you register multiple numbers of
authentication servers to the SRV record, you can determine the
authentication server to be used, based on the priority that has been set in
advance.
Authentication server protocols

Authentication servers support the following protocols:
• LDAPv3 simple bind authentication
• RFC 2865-compliant RADIUS with PAP and CHAP authentication
• Kerberos v5
The following certificate file formats are available for LDAP server settings:
• X509 DER format
• X509 PEM format
One of the following encryption types must be used for the Kerberos server:
Windows
• AES128-CTS-HMAC-SHA1-96
• RC4-HMAC
• DES3-CBC-SHA1
• DES-CBC-CRC
• DES-CBC-MD5
Solaris or Linux
• DES-CBC-MD5

Authorization server requirements
The authorization server must satisfy the following requirements if it works
together with the authentication server:
Prerequisite OS
• Windows Server 2003
• Windows Server 2003 R2
• Windows Server 2008
• Windows Server 2008 R2
Prerequisite software
• Active Directory
Authentication protocol for user for searching

• LDAP v3 simple bind
Connecting two authentication servers

Two authentication servers can be connected. When the servers are
connected, the server configurations must be the same, except for the IP
address and the port.
If you search for a server using information registered in the SRV records in
the DNS server, confirm that the following conditions are satisfied:
LDAP server conditions:

• The environmental setting for the DNS server is completed at the
LDAP server.
• The host name, the port number, and the domain name of the LDAP
server are registered in the DNS server.
Kerberos server conditions:

• The host name, the port number, and the domain name of the
Kerberos server are registered in the DNS server.
• You cannot use the SRV records on a RADIUS server.
Because UDP/IP is used to access the RADIUS server, no encrypted

communications are available, such as negotiations between processes. To
access the RADIUS server in a secure environment, encryption in the packet
level is required, such as IPsec.

Connecting authentication and authorization servers
To use an authentication server and an authorization server, you must create
configuration files and configure your network. Detailed setting information is
required for the authentication server and the authorization server, especially
for creating a configuration file.
Before you begin

• Contact your server administrator for information about the values to be
written in the LDAP, RADIUS, or Kerberos configuration file. If you use
LDAP servers, obtain certification for the LDAP server files.
• Contact your network administrator for information about the network
settings.
Procedure
1. Create a configuration file. The items to specify depend on the protocol

you use.
2. Log in to the SVP and store the following files in an easily accessible
location.
• Certificate (for secure communication)
• Configuration file
3. Open the Windows command prompt on the SVP.
4. Move the current directory to the directory where
MappSetExAuthConf.bat is located (for example, C:\MAPP\wk
\Supervisor\MappIniSet).
Run the following command specifying the configuration file path (for
example, C:\aut\auth.properties) and the certificate file path (for
example, C:\auth\auth.cer):
C:\MAPP\wk\Supervisor\MappIniSet\MappSetExAuthConf"C:\auth
\auth.properties" "C:\auth\auth.cer"
5. After you complete the settings and verify that you can use the
authentication and authorization servers, back up the connection settings
for the authentication server.
If the authentication server and the authorization server are unusable
even after you make the settings, the network or the configuration file
settings might have a problem. Contact the server administrator or the
network administrator.
Naming a user group in Device Manager - Storage Navigator

When you create a user group in Device Manager - Storage Navigator, you
name the group with the user's memberOf attribute value which is found in
the Active Directory. Device Manager - Storage Navigator supports Active
Directory nested groups.
After entering the user group name, verify that the user group name that you
entered is registered in the authorization server.

Note: The domain name (DN) of the user group to be set to Active Directory
must be between 1 and 250 characters. The number of user groups that can
be registered at one time is 20 at maximum.
Caution: If a user needs to use different user groups for different purposes,
create local user accounts on Device Manager - Storage Navigator. Do not
use the authorization server.
Creating configuration files

This section includes the procedures to create LDAP, RADIUS, and Kerberos
configurations files.
Creating an LDAP configuration file

To use an LDAP server for authentication, create a configuration file in UTF-8
encoding. Include information about the authentication server as shown in
the following example. Any file name and extension is allowed.
Caution: If you save the configuration file when using the Windows standard
Notepad application, specify ANSI for the letter code. If you use an editor
other than the memo pad and have the YTF-8 BOM setting, specify No BOM
then save.
auth.server.type=ldap
auth.server.name=<server_name>
auth.group.mapping=<value>
auth.ldap.<server_name>.<attribute>=<value>
A full example is shown here:

auth.server.type=ldap
auth.server.name=PrimaryServer
auth.group.mapping=true
auth.ldap.PrimaryServer.protocol=ldaps
auth.ldap.PrimaryServer.host=ldaphost.domain.local
auth.ldap.PrimaryServer.port=636
auth.ldap.PrimaryServer.timeout=3
auth.ldap.PrimaryServer.attr=sAMAccountName
auth.ldap.PrimaryServer.searchdn=CN=sample1,CN=Users,DC=domain,DC
=local
auth.ldap.PrimaryServer.searchpw=passwordauth.ldap.PrimaryServer.
basedn=CN=Users,DC=domain,DC=local
auth.ldap.PrimaryServer.retry.interval=1
auth.ldap.PrimaryServer.retry.times=3
auth.ldap.PrimaryServer.domain.name=EXAMPLE.COM
The LDAP attributes are defined in the following table.
Required /
Attribute Description Default value
Optional
auth.server.type Type of an authentication server. Required None

Specify ldap.

Required /
Optional
auth.server.name The name of an authentication Required None

server.
When registering a primary and a

secondary server, use a comma to
separate the names. The name of
the server, including the primary
name, secondary name, and the
comma (1 byte) must be 64 bytes
or less.
The names can use all ASCII code

characters except for the following:
\/:,;*?"<>|$%&'˜
In this manual, the value specified

here is called <server_ name>
hereafter.
auth.group.mapping Information about whether to work Optional False

together with an authorization
server:
• true: Works together
• false: Does not work together
auth.ldap.<server_na LDAP protocol to use. Rquired None

me>.protocol • ldaps: Uses LDAP over SSL/TLS.
• starttls: Uses StartTLS.
When you specify "true" to

auth.ldap.<server_name>.dns_look
up, specify ldaps.
auth.ldap.<server_na A host name, an IPv4 address or an Optional1 None

me>.host IPv6 address of the LDAP server. An
IPv6 address must be enclosed in
square brackets. To use StartTLS as
a protocol, specify a host name.
If this value is specified,

auth.ldap.<server_name>.dns_look
up will be ignored
auth.ldap.<server_na A port number of the LDAP server. Optional 389
me>.port
Must be between 1 and 65,535.2
auth.ldap.<server_na The number of seconds before the Required 10
me>.timeout connection to the LDAP server
times out. It must be between 1
and 30.2
auth.ldap.<server_na Attribute name to identify a user Required None

me>.attr (such as a user ID).
• Hierarchical model: An attribute
name where the value that can
identify a user is stored

Required /
Optional
• Flat model: An attribute name

for a user entry's RDN
sAMAccountName is used for Active

Directory.
auth.ldap.<server_na DN of the user for searching. If Otional None
me>.searchdn omitted,
[value_of_attr]=[Login_ID],[value_
of _basedn] is used for bind
authentication.3
auth.ldap.<server_na User password that is used for Required None
me>.searchpw searching. Specify the same
password that is registered in the
LDAP server.
auth.ldap.<server_na BaseDN for searching for users to Required None
me>.basedn authenticate.3
• Hierarchical model: DN of
hierarchy that includes all the
targeted users for searching
• Flat model: DN of hierarchy that
is one level up from the
targeted user for searching
auth.ldap.<server_na Retry interval in seconds when the Optional 1
me>.retry.interval connection to the LDAP server fails.
Must be between 1 and 5.2
auth.ldap.<server_na Retry times when the connection to Optional 3

me>.retry.times the LDAP server fails.
Must be between 0 and 3. Zero

means no retry.2
auth.ldap.<server_na A domain name that the LDAP Required None
me>.domain.name server manages.
auth.ldap.<server_na Information about whether to Optional False
me>.dns_lookup search the LDAP server with the
information registered in the SRV
records in the DNS server.
• true: Searches with the
information registered in the
SRV records in the DNS server
• false: Searches with the host
name and port number
When "host" and "port" are

specified, the LDAP server is not
searched with the information
registered in the SRV records by
specifying "true".
Notes:
1. The item can be omitted if true is specified for "auth.ldap.<server_name>.dns_lookup".
2. If the specified value is not valid, the default value will be used.

Required /
Optional
3. To use symbols such as + ; , < = and >, enter a backslash (\) before each symbol. When
using multiple symbols, each symbol must have a backslash before it. For example, to enter
abc++ in the searchdn field, use \+ instead of + as shown here: abc\+\+
To enter \ , /, or ", enter a backslash and then enter the ASCII code in hex for the following
symbols:
• Enter \5c for \
• Enter \2f for /
• Enter \22 for "
For example, to enter abc\ in the searchdn field, enter abc\5c.
Creating a RADIUS configuration file

To use a RADIUS server for authentication, create a configuration file in
UTF-8 encoding. Include information about the authentication server as
shown in the following example. Any file name and extension is allowed. If an
authorization server is not used, you do not need to define the items for it.
then save.
auth.server.type=radius
auth.server.name=server-name
auth.group.mapping=value
auth.radius.server-name.attribute=value
auth.group.domain-name.attribute=value
A full example is shown below:

auth.server.type=radius
auth.server.name=PrimaryServer
auth.radius.PrimaryServer.protocol=pap
auth.radius.PrimaryServer.host=xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
auth.radius.PrimaryServer.port=1812
auth.radius.PrimaryServer.timeout=3
auth.radius.PrimaryServer.secret=secretword
auth.radius.PrimaryServer.retry.times=3
auth.radius.PrimaryServer.attr.NAS-Identifier=xxxxxxxx
auth.group.auth.radius.PrimaryServer.domain.name=radius.example.c
om
auth.group.auth.radius.PrimaryServer.domain.name.protocol=ldap
auth.group.auth.radius.PrimaryServer.domain.name.host=xxx.xxx.xxx
.xxx
auth.group.auth.radius.PrimaryServer.domain.name.port=386
auth.group.auth.radius.PrimaryServer.domain.name.searchdn=CN=samp
le1,CN=Users,DC=domain,DC=local
auth.group.auth.radius.PrimaryServer.domain.name.searchpw=passwor
d
auth.ldap.PrimaryServer.basedn=CN=Users,DC=domain,DC=local
The attributes are defined in the following tables.

Table 6 RADIUS definition (for authentication server)
Required / Default
Attribute Description
Optional value
auth.server.type Type of an authentication server. Specify Required None

radius.
auth.server.name The name of an authentication server. Required None

When registering a primary and
secondary server, use a comma to
separate the names. The name of the
server, including the primary name,
secondary name, and the comma (1
byte) must be 64 bytes or less.
The names can use all ASCII code

characters except for the following:
\/:,;*?"<>|$%&'˜
In this manual, the value specified here is

called server-name hereafter.
auth.group.mapping Information about whether to work Optional False

together with an authorization server
auth.radius.server- RADIUS protocol to use. Required None

name.protocol • PAP: Password authentication protocol
that transmits plaintext user ID and
password
• CHAP: Challenge-handshake
authentication protocol that transmits
encrypted password
auth.radius.server- A host name, an IPv4 address or an IPv6 Required None

name.host address of the RADIUS server. An IPv6
address must be enclosed in square
brackets.
auth.radius.server- A port number of the RADIUS server. Optional 1,812

name.port Must be between 1 and 65,535.1
auth.radius.server- The number of seconds before the Optional 10

name.timeout connection to the RADIUS server times
out.
auth.radius.server- RADIUS secret key used for PAP or CHAP Required None
name.secret authentication
auth.radius.server- Retry times when the connection to the Optional 3

name.retry.times RADIUS server fails.
Must be between 0 and 3. 0 means no

retry.1
auth.radius.server- Identifier for the RADIUS server to find Optional2 None

name.attr.NASIdentifier SVP. Specify this value if the attr.NAS-

Required / Default
Optional value
Identifier attribute is used in your

RADIUS environment. ASCII codes up to
253 bytes long are accepted.
auth.radius.server- IPv4 address of the SVP. Specify the Optional2 None

name.attr.NAS-IPv4- value of the NAS-IP-Address attribute.
Address This value is transmitted to the RADIUS
server when the authentication is
requested.
auth.radius.server- IPv6 address of the SVP. Specify the Optional2 None

name.attr.NAS-IPv6- value of the NAS-IPv6-Address attribute.
Address This value is transmitted to the RADIUS
server when the authentication is
requested.
Notes:
1. If the specified value is not applicable, the default value will be used.
2. Set either NAS-Identifier, NAS-IP-Address, or NAS-IPv6-Address.
Table 7 RADIUS definition (for authorization server)
Required / Default
Optional value
auth.radius.server- A domain name that the LDAP server Required None

name.domain.name manages. In this manual, the value
specified here is called domain-name
hereafter.
auth.radius.server- Information about whether to search the Optional false

name.dns_lookup LDAP server with the information
registered in the SRV records in the DNS
server.
• true: Searches with the information
registered in the SRV records in the
DNS server
• false: Searches with the host name
and port number.
When "host" and "port" are specified, the

LDAP server is not searched with the
information registered in the SRV records
by specifying "true".
auth.radius.domain- LDAP protocol to use. Required None

name.protocol • ldaps: Uses LDAP over SSL/TLS.
• starttls: Uses StartTLS.
When you choose ldap, specify "true" to

"auth.radius.domain-name.dns_lookup"
auth.radius.domain- A host name, an IPv4 address or an IPv6 Optional1 None

name.host address of the LDAP server. An IPv6

Required / Default
Optional value
address must be enclosed in square

brackets ([ ]).
auth.radius.domain- A port number of the LDAP server. Optional 389

name.port
auth.radius.domain- DN of the user for searching. Required None
name.searchdn
auth.radius.domain- User password for searching. Specify the Required None

name.searchpw same password that is registered in the
LDAP server.
auth.radius.domain- Base DN for searching for users to Optional abbr

name.basedn authenticate. Specify DN of the hierarchy,
including all the users for searching
because the targeted users for searching
are in lower hierarchy than the specified
DN.3
auth.radius.domain- The number of seconds before the Optional 10

name.timeout connection to the LDAP server times out.
Must be between 1 and 302.
auth.radius.domain- Retry interval in seconds when the Optional 1

name.retry.interval connection to the LDAP server fails. Must
be between 1 and 5.2
auth.radius.domain- Retry times when the connection to the Optional 3

name.retry.times LDAP server fails. Must be between 0 and
3. 0 means no retry.2
Notes:
1. The item can be omitted if true is specified for "auth.ldap.server-name.dns_lookup".
To enter \ , /, or ", enter a backslash and then the ASCII code in hex for these symbols.
• Enter \5c for \.
• Enter \2f for /.
• Enter \22 for "
Creating a Kerberos configuration file

To use an Kerberos server for authentication, create a configuration file in
UTF-8 encoding. Include information about the authentication server as
shown in the following example. Any file name and extension are allowed. If
an authorization server is not used, you do not need to define the items for
it.

then save.
auth.server.type=kerberos
auth.group.mapping=<value>
auth.kerberos.<attribute>=<value>
auth.group.<realm name>.<attribute>=<value>
A full example is shown below:

auth.server.type=kerberos
auth.kerberos.default_realm=example.com
auth.kerberos.dns_lookup_kdc=true
auth.kerberos.clockshow=300
auth.kerberos.timeout=10
auth.group.example.com.searchdn=CN=sample1,CN=Users,DC=domain,DC=
localauth.group.example.com.searchpw=passwordauth.ldap.PrimarySer
ver.basedn=CN=Users,DC=domain,DC=local
The Kerberos attributes are defined in the following table.
Table 8 Kerberos definition (for authentication server)
Required /
Optional
auth.server.type Type of an authentication server. Required None

Specify kerberos.
auth.group.mapping Information about whether to work Optional false

together with an authorization
server
auth.kerberos.default_ Default realm name Required None

realm
auth.kerberos.dns_loo This is a switch that determines Optional false

kup.kdc which information registered in the
SRV records in the DNS server to
use when searching the Kerberos
server.
• true: Searches with the
information registered in the SRV
records in the DNS server
• false: Searches with the host
name and port number
When "realm name" and "<value

specified to the realm name>.kdc"
are specified, the Kerberos server is
not searched with the information
registered in the SRV records by
specifying "true".

Required /
Optional
auth.kerberos.clockske The acceptable range of the Optional 300

w difference in time between the SVP
and the Kerberos server where the
SVP is operating.
Must be between 0 and 300
seconds.1
auth.kerberos.timeout The number of seconds before the Optonal 10

connection to the RADIUS server
times out. Must be between 1 and
30. When 0 is specified, the
connection does not time out until a
communication error occurs.1
auth.kerberos.realm_n Realm identifier name Optional2 None

ame Any name to distinguish the
information of Kerberos server in
each realm. Duplicate names cannot
be used. If you register multiple
names, use a comma to separate
the names. The value specified here
is called <realm_name> hereafter.
auth.kerberos.<realm The realm name set to the Kerberos Optional2 None

_name>.realm server.
auth.kerberos.<realm_ The host name, the IPv4 address, Optional2 None

name>.kdc and the port number of the Kerberos
server. Specify these in the format
of "<Host name or IP
address>[:Port number]".
Notes:
1. The item can be omitted if true is specified for "auth.ldap.<server_name>.dns_lookup".
• Enter \5c for \.
• Enter \2f for /.
• Enter \22 for ".
Table 9 Kerberos definition (for authorization server)
Attribute Description Required / Optional Default value
auth.group.<realm_na LDAP protocol to use. Required None

me>.protocol • ldaps: Uses LDAP
over SSL/TLS.
• starttls: Uses
StartTLS.

auth.group.<realm_na A port number of the Optoinal 389

me>.port LDAP server.
Must be between 1 and
65535. 1
auth.group.<realm_na DN of the user for Required None

me>.searchdn searching.2
auth.group.<realm_na Password of the user Required None

me>.searchpw for searching. Specify
the same password
that is registered in the
LDAP server.
auth.group.<realm_na BaseDN when the Optional abbr

me>.basedn search for users
begins. When
searching, specify the
hierarchy DN, including
all the users, because
the targeted user for
the search is in a lower
hierarchy than the
specified DN.2
auth.group.<realm_na Number of seconds Optional 10

me>.timeout before the connection
to the LDAP server
times out. Must be
between 1 and 30
seconds. When 0 is
specified, the
connection does not
time out until a
communication error
occurs.1
auth.group.<realm_na Retry interval in Optional 1

me>.retry.interval seconds when the
connection to the LDAP
server fails. Must be
between 1 and 5.1
auth.group.<realm_na Retry times when the Optional 3

me>.retry.times connection to the LDAP
server fails. Must be
between 0 and 3. 0
means no retry.1
Notes:

• Enter \5c for \

• Enter \2f for /
• Enter \22 for "
Related concepts
• Using an authentication server and authorization server on page 162
Related tasks
• Connecting authentication and authorization servers on page 165
User Administration for NAS Manager

This section describes various user roles, permissions and groups available to
manage your storage system. You use NAS Manager to create and manage
SMU user accounts on your storage system.
Administrator types and responsibilities

This section describes the types of NAS storage system administrators and
defines their expected roles in managing the system and the associated
storage subsystems.
creates and manages SMU user profiles (Server Administrators, Storage
Administrators, Server+Storage Administrators, and other Global
Administrators). Global Administrators also control what servers and
storage devices each administrator can access.
• Storage Administrators manage storage devices, as specified in the
administrator profile created by the Global Administrator.
Administrators cannot manage file systems, file services, or file system
related features and functions, and they cannot manage users.
• Server Administrators manage servers and clusters, as specified in the
administrator profile created by the Global Administrator. Server
Server Administrators can manage file systems and file services such as
CIFS Shares, NFS Exports, and they can manage file system related
features and functions such as snapshots, quotas, and migration policies
and schedules.

• Server+Storage Administrators manage servers, clusters, and storage
devices, as specified in the administrator profile created by the Global
Administrator.
Administrators and Storage Administrators can manage: file systems, file
services, or file system related features and functions, and they can also
manage storage devices and their components.
All administrators can connect to the NAS storage system through NAS
Manager, the browser-based management utility provided by the system
management unit (SMU). Additionally, Global Administrators can connect to
the SMU command line interface (CLI).
Note: Server Administrators, Storage Administrators, and Server+Storage

Administrators are not able to access all of the NAS Manager pages that a
Global Administrator can access.
Adding an SMU user (an administrator)

To add an SMU user (a NAS storage system administrator):
Procedure
1. Navigate to Home > SMU Administration > SMU Users > SMU Users
to display the SMU Users page.
2. Click add to display the Add SMU User page:
Field/Item Description
Name The name of the new user account. This name will be requested when
logging in to the SMU. The rules for user names are:
• For Global administrators only, if the user will access the SMU
through the CLI, the user name:

○ Must start with a letter or an underscore, and may consist of up

to 31 alphanumeric characters and the underscore (_) and the
hyphen (-).
○ Cannot match certain special purpose names: root, manager,
postgres, nobody, or nfsnobody.
○ Cannot match certain special purpose user ID numbers: for
example, those with uid less than 502.
• For all types of administrators, if the user will access the SMU only
through NAS Manager, the user name may consist of alphanumeric
characters and/or the underscore (_), the hyphen (-), the equal sign
(=), parentheses "(" or ")", brackets ( [ or ] ), the pound sign (#)
and the exclamation point (!).
• Supervisor is a reserved system user name. It is not available as a
new user name.
Note: If you are using RADIUS realms, and the global

administrator will access the SMU using both NAS Manager and
the CLI, use the underscore (_) to combine the user name and
the realm: for example, johnsmith_realm2. If the global
administrator will access the SMU using only NAS Manager, you
can use the at sign (@) to combine the user name and the
realm: for example, johnsmith@realm3.
User Type The user type. User types are either local or RADIUS.
• Local users are those whose passwords are locally defined and
authenticated in the SMU.
• RADIUS users are those whose passwords are defined and
authenticated in an external RADIUS servers. The RADIUS
administrator must add a user name and password to all RADIUS
servers.
Password Enter the password that will be used when this user account logs in. The
password cannot exceed 256 characters.
This field only applies when the User Type is selected to Local. It does
not apply when the RADIUS User Type is selected.
Confirm Password Confirm the password entered in the previous field by entering it in
again. Only applies when the Local User type is selected.
User Level Specify the level for the new administrator that you are creating. You
can select any one of the following:
creates and manages SMU user profiles (Server Administrators,
Storage Administrators, Server+Storage Administrators, and other
Global Administrators). Global Administrators also control what
servers and storage devices each administrator can access.
• Storage Administrators manage storage devices, as specified in
the administrator profile created by the Global Administrator.
Administrators cannot manage file systems, file services, or file
system related features and functions, and they cannot manage
users.

• Server Administrators manage servers and clusters, as specified in

the administrator profile created by the Global Administrator. Server
Server Administrators can manage file systems and file services such
as CIFS Shares, NFS Exports, and they can manage file system
related features and functions such as snapshots, quotas, and
migration policies and schedules.
• Server+Storage Administrators manage servers, clusters, and
storage devices, as specified in the administrator profile created by
the Global Administrator.
Administrators and Storage Administrators can manage: file systems,
file services, or file system related features and functions, and they
can also manage storage devices and their components.
Note: Server Administrators, Storage Administrators, and

Server+Storage Administrators are not able to access all of the
NAS Manager pages that a Global Administrator can access.
SMU CLI Access If the administrator is allowed to log in and access the SMU CLI of an
(for Global external SMU, select the SMU CLI Access check box.
Administrators
only)
Available HNAS For Server administrators, Storage administrators, and Server+Storage

Servers administrators, lists the servers managed by the SMU to which the
administrator has not yet been given management privileges. Not
available for Global administrators, because Global administrators are
allowed to manage all storage and all servers.
Selected HNAS For Server administrators, lists the servers that the administrator can
Servers manage. Note that a Server administrator cannot manage the storage
attached to these servers. Not available for Global administrators,
because Global administrators are allowed to manage all storage and all
servers.
For Storage administrators, lists servers that have attached storage that
the administrator can manage. Note that a Storage administrator cannot
manage these servers, only the storage attached to these servers.
For Server+Storage administrators, lists servers that the administrator

can manage. The Server+Storage administrator can also manage the
storage attached to these servers.
OK When the profile is complete and correct, click OK to save and enable
the user profile, and then return to the SMU Users page.
cancel Closes the page without saving the profile, and returns to the SMU
Users page.
3. Enter the user name for the new administrator in the Name field.
4. Specify if the administrator login is authenticated locally (by the SMU) or
by a RADIUS server by selecting the appropriate User Type.

Note: If you are authenticating this user through a RADIUS server,
the Password and Confirm Password fields will not be available,
and you should skip the next two steps, but you must enter the
user passwords into the RADIUS server using the tools available
for that server.
5. If the User Type is local, enter the password for the new administrator
in the Password field.
6. If the User Type is local, confirm the password for the new
administrator in the Confirm Password field.
7. Specify the initial login password for the user by filling in the Password
and the Confirm Password fields.
8. Specify the user level for the new administrator that you are creating.
You can select one of the following:
• Global Administrator
• Storage Administrator
• Server Administrator
• Server+Storage
9. For Global Administrators only, if the administrator is allowed to log in
and access the SMU command line interface (CLI) of an external SMU,
select the SMU CLI Access check box.
10. Using the Available Servers and the Selected Servers lists, specify
the servers the administrator can access or the servers with the storage
the administrator can manage.
• To grant management privileges for a server or the storage attached
to a server, move the server from the Available Servers list to the
Selected Servers list.
• To revoke management privileges for a server or the storage attached
to a server, move the server from the Selected Servers list to the
Available Servers list.
• To move the server between the Available Servers and the Selected
Servers lists, select the server, and use the arrow buttons between
the lists.
11. Review the profile, and verify that it is correct.
• If the profile is correct, click OK to save and enable the user profile,
and then return to return to the SMU Users page.
• To return to the SMU Users page without saving the profile, click
back.
Changing the password for a currently logged in user
Note: If the user is authenticated through a RADIUS server, you cannot

change their password using NAS Manager or the SMU CLI, you must change
it using the tools/utilities for the RADIUS server.

Any logged in user can change their own password. A global administrator
can also change the password of any user, whether the user is currently
logged in or not.
Changing your own password
Note: If your log in is authenticated through a RADIUS server, you cannot

change their password using NAS Manager, you must change it using the
tools/utilities for the RADIUS server.
Procedure
1. Navigate to Home > SMU Administration > Current User Password

to display the Current User Password page.
The following table describes the fields on this page:
User Name Displays your user login name (cannot be changed).
Current Password Displays a series of dots representing the currently specified password
(the actual password cannot be displayed).
New Password The new password. The password cannot exceed 256 characters.
Confirm New The new password again. Must be exactly the same as what you
Password entered in the New Password field.
apply Saves the new password.
2. Enter your current password in the Current Password field.

If you have forgotten you password, contact a global administrator and
ask them to give you a new password. (Passwords are stored in an
encrypted form, and are not retrievable or visible by anyone. If a user
forgets their password, they must be given a new password, which they
can then change.)
3. Enter your new password in the New Password field.

4. Enter the new password again in the Confirm New Password field.
5. When finished, click apply to save the new password.
Changing another user's password
Procedure
1. Navigate to Home > SMU Administration > SMU Users to display the
SMU Users page.
2. Click details to display the SMU User Details page.
Item/Field Description
Name Administrator’s user name. Cannot be changed.
User Type Describes if the user is authenticated by the SMU itself (local
users), or if the user is authenticated by a RADIUS server.
Password and Confirm For users authenticated by the SMU only (local users). These
Password fields do not apply for users authenticated by a RADIUS server.
The password for the user. Characters are hidden, and the exact
same password must be entered in both fields. The password
cannot exceed 256 characters.
User Level Displays the user level or type of administrative role.

• Global Administrators can manage everything in the
system: file systems, file services, or file system related
features and functions, storage devices and their components.
Also, the Global Administrator creates and manages SMU user
profiles (Server Administrators, Storage Administrators,
Server+Storage Administrators, and other Global
Administrators). Global Administrators also control what
• Storage Administrators manage storage devices, as
specified in the administrator profile created by the Global
Administrator.

Storage Administrators can manage only storage devices and

their components (racks, physical disks, SDs, and storage
pools). Storage Administrators cannot manage file systems,
file services, or file system related features and functions, and
they cannot manage users.
• Server Administrators manage servers and clusters, as
Administrator. Server Administrators cannot manage storage
devices.
Server Administrators can manage file systems and file
services such as CIFS Shares, NFS Exports, and they can
manage file system related features and functions such as
snapshots, quotas, and migration policies and schedules.
• Server+Storage Administrators manage servers, clusters,
and storage devices, as specified in the administrator profile
created by the Global Administrator.
Administrators and Storage Administrators can manage: file
systems, file services, or file system related features and
functions, and they can also manage storage devices and their
components.
• If the User Type is Local, you can modify the password.

• If the User Type is RADIUS, you cannot modify the password,
because the password is managed on RADIUS servers.
• If the User Level is Global, you can select or clear the Allow
CLI Access check box.
• If the User Level is server, storage, or server+storage, you can
add or remove servers from the user's scope of management.
Global users implicitly have access to manage all servers and

storage. Non-global users cannot be given CLI access.
You cannot change the User Type or User Level of a user. If such a
change is needed, delete the old user and create a new user.
SMU CLI Access For global administrators only, when the check box is selected,
the administrator can access the SMU using the CLI as well as
NAS Manager.
Available HNAS Servers Not available for global administrators, because global
administrators are allowed to manage all storage and all servers.
For server administrators, storage administrators, and server
+storage administrators, lists the HNAS servers managed by the
SMU to which the administrator has not yet been give
management privileges.
The "All Servers" entry is used to allow privileges to all servers

managed by the SMU.
Selected HNAS Servers Not available for global administrators, because global
For server administrators, lists the HNAS servers that the
administrator can manage. Note that a Server administrator
cannot manage the storage attached to these servers.
For storage administrators, lists HNAS servers that have attached

storage that the administrator can manage. Note that a storage

administrator cannot manage these servers, only the storage

attached to these servers.
For server+storage administrators, lists HNAS servers that the

administrator can manage. The server+storage administrator can
also manage the storage attached to these servers.
OK Saves the currently defined user profile and returns to the SMU
Users page.
Cancel Returns to the SMU Users page without saving the profile.
3. Enter the new password in the Password field.

4. Enter the new password again in the Confirm Password field.
5. When finished, click OK to save the new password.
Changing an SMU user profile
Procedure
1. Navigate to Home > SMU Administration > SMU Users to open the
SMU Users page.
2. Click details to display the SMU User Details page for the user whose
profile you want to modify.

Name Administrator’s user name. Cannot be changed.
User Type Describes if the user is authenticated by the SMU itself (local
users), or if the user is authenticated by a RADIUS server.
Password and Confirm For users authenticated by the SMU only (local users). These
Password fields do not apply for users authenticated by a RADIUS server.
The password for the user. Characters are hidden, and the exact
same password must be entered in both fields. The password
cannot exceed 256 characters.
User Level Displays the user level or type of administrative role.

• Global Administrators can manage everything in the
system: file systems, file services, or file system related
features and functions, storage devices and their components.
Also, the Global Administrator creates and manages SMU user
profiles (Server Administrators, Storage Administrators,
Server+Storage Administrators, and other Global
Administrators). Global Administrators also control what
• Storage Administrators manage storage devices, as
Administrator.
Storage Administrators can manage only storage devices and
their components (racks, physical disks, SDs, and storage
pools). Storage Administrators cannot manage file systems,
file services, or file system related features and functions, and
they cannot manage users.
• Server Administrators manage servers and clusters, as
Administrator. Server Administrators cannot manage storage
devices.
Server Administrators can manage file systems and file
services such as CIFS Shares, NFS Exports, and they can
manage file system related features and functions such as
snapshots, quotas, and migration policies and schedules.

• Server+Storage Administrators manage servers, clusters,

and storage devices, as specified in the administrator profile
created by the Global Administrator.
Administrators and Storage Administrators can manage: file
systems, file services, or file system related features and
functions, and they can also manage storage devices and their
components.
• If the User Type is Local, you can modify the password.

• If the User Type is RADIUS, you cannot modify the password,
because the password is managed on RADIUS servers.
• If the User Level is Global, you can select or clear the Allow
CLI Access check box.
• If the User Level is server, storage, or server+storage, you can
add or remove servers from the user's scope of management.
Global users implicitly have access to manage all servers and

storage. Non-global users cannot be given CLI access.
You cannot change the User Type or User Level of a user. If such a
change is needed, delete the old user and create a new user.
SMU CLI Access For global administrators only, when the check box is selected,
the administrator can access the SMU using the CLI as well as
NAS Manager.
Available HNAS Servers Not available for global administrators, because global
For server administrators, storage administrators, and server
+storage administrators, lists the HNAS servers managed by the
SMU to which the administrator has not yet been give
management privileges.
The "All Servers" entry is used to allow privileges to all servers

managed by the SMU.
Selected HNAS Servers Not available for global administrators, because global
For server administrators, lists the HNAS servers that the
administrator can manage. Note that a Server administrator
cannot manage the storage attached to these servers.
For storage administrators, lists HNAS servers that have attached

storage that the administrator can manage. Note that a storage
administrator cannot manage these servers, only the storage
attached to these servers.
For server+storage administrators, lists HNAS servers that the

administrator can manage. The server+storage administrator can
also manage the storage attached to these servers.
OK Saves the currently defined user profile and returns to the SMU
Users page.
Cancel Returns to the SMU Users page without saving the profile.
3. Edit the SMU user password.

Note: For users authenticated by the SMU only (local users), not
available for users authenticated by a RADIUS server.
To edit the user’s password, type the new password in the Password
and Confirm Password fields.
4. For global administrators only, allow or disallow SMU CLI access.
When the check box is selected, the administrator can access the SMU by
using the CLI as well as NAS Manager.
5. Specify server and/or storage management rights.
• To grant management privileges for a server or the storage attached
to a server, move the server from the Available Servers list to the
Selected Servers list.
• To revoke management privileges for a server or the storage attached
to a server, move the server from the Selected Servers list to the
Available Servers list.
• To move the server between the Available Servers and the Selected
Servers lists, select the server, and use the arrow buttons between
the lists.
6. Click OK to save the profile and return to the SMU Users page.
SMU user authentication

When an SMU user administrator attempts to log in, the user ID/password
combination is sent to the SMU for authentication. For the SMU,
authentication means testing the user ID and password pair, to see if the
supplied password matches the stored password for the supplied user ID.
Depending on the SMU configuration and the supplied user ID, the SMU may
authenticate the user itself (locally), it may authenticate the user through a
RADIUS server, or it may authenticate the user through Active Directory.
After authorization, the SMU allows the user to perform actions allowed by
the user's profile.
Active Directory users are assigned full access rights to the SMU functionality.
For local and RADIUS users the user profile details are specified when the
user account is created.
The user profile:

• Indicates if the user is to be authenticated locally,or through a RADIUS
server.
• Specifies the user's access (privilege) level, meaning it specifies if the user
is a:
○ Global administrator.
○ Storage administrator.
○ Server administrator.
○ Server+Storage administrator.
• Specifies the servers the user is allowed to access.

• Specifies if the user has CLI access (for RADIUS and Local Users).
Active Directory user authentication

Active Directory is an LDAP-compliant hierarchical database of objects. It is
very popular in enterprise environments and is becoming a de facto standard
for user authentication.
After Active Directory connection settings and groups have been configured
for the SMU, it will allow logins from enabled users who supply their Active
Directory name and password. This is typically the same name and password
that the user would use to log into Windows and other enterprise
applications. Unlike SMU local and RADIUS user names, Active Directory user
names are case-insensitive. Active Directory passwords are case-sensitive
and cannot be changed from the SMU; they are maintained in the Active
Directory server.
There are a number of benefits for SMU users. The administrator does not
need to maintain a separate set of user details, because the SMU can just
make use of the Active Directory enterprise user database. Users can login
using their usual name and password instead of having to remember a
separate set of credentials for the SMU. And instead of configuring access for
individual users, the SMU administrator just has to specify the Active
Directory groups whose members have login rights.
It is possible to assign more restrictive user levels and managed severs to

Active Directory users according to their group membership. So it is possible
to define a group of users who have only server level access, for example, or
access to a restricted set of managed HNAS servers.
Although the SMU supports RADIUS and Active Directory for external
authentication, they are mutually exclusive; it is not possible to have them
both configured for external authentication at the same time.
When a login attempt is made, the SMU first tries to authenticate the
credentials as a local user. If that fails, and Active Directory is configured,
they are authenticated as an Active Directory user.
Active Directory authentication requests are sent to servers in the configured

sequential order. If a successful connection cannot be made to the first
server, it attempts to contact the second server and so on. When a
connection is made and an authentication response received (either positive
or negative) it is treated as definitive. It does not then contact further
servers because all servers are assumed to have identical content.
Using Transport Layer Security (TLS) with Active Directory authentication

TLS is a cryptographic protocol which provides security between applications
over a network.

For Active Directory authentication, the SMU supports up to TLS 1.2. It
negotiates with the domain controller to use the highest version of TLS which
is common to both.
The SMU requires domain controllers to respond on port 389. It is not

possible to configure the SMU to use any other port.
Configuring Active Directory servers

Global Administrators can provide information to configure, modify, and list
Active Directory servers for authentication on the Active Directory Servers
page.
Before you begin
In order to enable Active Directory use, the SMU administrator needs to know
the following information:
• The domain in which the Active Directory users and groups that will access
the SMU are located.
• The LDAP distinguished name and password of an Active Directory user
that has read access to users and groups on the Active Directory servers.
This is referred to as the Search User. The user can search for users or
groups under the supplied base distinguished name.
• The addresses of one or more Active Directory servers that maintain the
users and groups for the domain. The content of all configured servers
must be identical. If DNS servers have been configured for the SMU, then
the SMU should be able to automatically discover these server addresses
via the find servers button on the setup page. SRV records must be setup
in order for find servers to find the Active Directory servers.
• The Active Directory group or groups whose members are to be given the
right to log into the SMU.
• If RADIUS was previously in use and it is to be replaced by Active
Directory, then the RADIUS configuration must first be removed before
Active Directory can be configured. This is done from the Home>SMU
Administrator>RADIUS Servers page by clicking the remove all
settings button. No RADIUS user will be able to log into the SMU after
this is done.
Procedure
1. Navigate to Home > SMU Administrator to display the Active

Directory Servers page.
2. Enter the Base Distinguished Name.
This name must be entered in LDAP distinguished name (DN) format
which consists of a sequence of "attribute=value" pairs separated by
comma or semi-colon. The Base Distinguished Name should contain the
domain component (dc) attributes for the organization's domain. So for
the domain example.com it would be "dc=example, dc=com". The name
may also contain organization unit (ou) attributes.

Connection settings
Base Distinguished Name The LDAP root location for users and groups. The name is
recommended to contain just the domain components.
Search User Credentials
Distinguished Name The LDAP distinguished name for a user that has search
capabilities.
Password The password for the search user.
Servers
IP Address or DNS Name The address of one or more Active Directory servers for the
domain. Each server should hold identical content. The
maximum number of servers is 20.
find servers Queries DNS to show the list of available Active Directory
servers for the domain.
Add Add an Active Directory server after you have entered its
fully qualified domain name or IP address.
Move Up If there is more than one server, use these buttons to

prioritize the list.
Move Down
Remove Remove a server from the list.

apply Submit the page and save the connection settings and server
list to the SMU database.
Groups
Groups with access to the Shows groups with access to the SMU. Active Directory users
SMU who belong to these groups can access the SMU.
Modify groups Click to go to the Active Directory Groups page, where you
can add groups.
Actions
remove all settings Removes all Active Directory server settings, including server
list, connection settings, search user credentials and groups.
After this action, Active Directory users can no longer log into
the SMU.
3. Enter the Distinguished Name.

This is the Distinguished Name of the Search User, an existing user that
has permission to access Active Directory. An Search User DN would
typically contain common name (cn) and possibly organization unit (ou)
attributes as well as the domain components. The domain components
should match those used in the Base Distinguished Name. An example
Search User DN is "cn= ldapguest, cn=users, dc=example, dc=com".
4. Enter the Password of the Search User (an existing user that may
access the directory).
5. There are two ways to add Active Directory servers.
• Enter the fully qualified domain name or IP address of the server, and
click Add.
• Click find servers.The list of discovered servers is displayed.
Note: The DNS server or servers must be configured for the

SMU (under Name Services) for find servers to work.
○ Select one or more servers and click add to add them to the list. No
more than 20 Active Directory servers can be configured at a time.
○ When you are finished, click close to return to the Active
Directory Servers window.

6. If there is more than one server, the list can be prioritized using Move
Up or Move Down .
7. Click Apply to submit this page and save the connection settings and
server list to the SMU database.
The SMU will perform a connection test to check that it can access the
configured servers with the supplied details and display a warning if the
SMU cannot, giving the user the opportunity to modify the settings or to
save them as they are.
Any information, warnings and errors related to Active Directory

configuration or authentication are logged to /var/opt/smu/log/mgr/
mgr.log and /var/opt/smu/log/mgr/security.log
Configuring Active Directory groups

In order to allow Active Directory users to log into the SMU, it is necessary to
configure one or more groups. Once a group has been added and saved, all
users who are members of that group will be able to log into the SMU using
their Active Directory name and password. Active Directory users belonging
to the subgroups of the configured group will also have SMU access.
Before you begin
Note that the administrator is only able to configure groups after Active
Directory servers have been added on the Active Directory Servers page.
Procedure
1. Navigate to the Home > SMU Administrator > Active Directory

Groups to display the Active Directory Groups page.
This page shows all Active Directory groups that have been added. Note
that Active Directory groups can be associated with a group access level.
For example, it is possible to define a group of users who only have
server level of access. Any groups that were added in a previous version
of the SMU that has been upgraded will be displayed in this list with a
User Level of Global Administrator.
If an Active Directory user is member of more than one configured

groups in the SMU, then their access level will be derived by combining

the access level for all configured Active Directory groups. For example,
if a user is a member of one group defined with storage level, but is also
a member of a group with server level, then that user will have server
+storage access to the SMU.
Group Name Group name is the user-friendly name of an Active Directory

group existing on the Active Directory server.
The full distinguished name for a group can be viewed by

hovering the mouse over the group name. The sort order of the
table can be changed by clicking over a column heading.
Group Access Level Shows the group access level. This defines the access level given
to Active Directory users who are members of the group when
they log onto the SMU. On an external or virtual SMU, if the
Group Access Level is Global, then group members are given
SMU CLI access. SMU CLI access is not available on an
embedded SMU or a NAS module SMU.
details Click the details button in the right-hand column to view details
of the associated group.
Check All Checks all boxes under Group Name.
Clear All Clears all checked boxes under Group Name.
add Click to add a group. Takes you to the Add Active Directory
Group page.
delete Existing groups can be deleted by checking the box in left-hand
column and clicking the delete button. The user is asked for
confirmation before deleting. If all groups are being deleted, the
user is warned that no Active Directory users will be
authenticated.
Active Directory Servers Takes you to the Active Directory Servers page.
2. Click add and use the Add Active Directory Group page to add
groups.

Base Distinguished Name The LDAP root location for users and groups. The name is
Group Distinguished Name The LDAP root location for users and groups. The name is
recommended to contain just the domain components. Groups
can be added manually by entering their distinguished name and
then pressing the OK button. A maximum of 100 groups can be
added. Alternatively, groups can be added by using the find
group button.
find group Queries the Active Directory to show the list of available groups.
The list can be filtered by entering a partial group name. A
maximum of 1000 group names is displayed.
User Level for Group The user levels that can be assigned to group members are the
Members same as those that can be assigned to local or RADIUS users
and have the same meanings. The default is Global, but the
level can be modified by selecting one of the other radio buttons.
OK Click to save the group details. The SMU checks that the group
exists in Active Directory. If the group does not exist (or if the
SMU failed to access any AD server) the user is asked for
confirmation that they still wish to save it. After saving the
group, the updated group list page is displayed.
cancel Cancels input.
3. There are two ways to add groups:

• Enter the full Distinguished Name for the group (for example
"CN=Mygroup, CN=users, DC=example, DC=com") and click the add
button.
• Click the find group button.
○ Groups that exist under this Base DN are displayed in a dialog
window. The list can be filtered by entering a partial group name. A
maximum of 1000 group names is displayed. Select a group from
the list. Only one group can be added at a time.
○ Click add to add the group's distinguished name to this page.
○ Click close to return to the Active Directory Groups page without
selecting a group from the list.

4. Select a User Level to be assigned to members of the group.
CLI access is given to members of all groups defined with the Global
level.
Active directory users are given the same access level to all managed
HNAS servers.
5. Click OK to save the group.
The SMU will perform a test to check the group exists in Active Directory
and displays warning if it is not, giving the user the opportunity to
modify the group.
Any information, warnings and errors related to Active Directory

configuration or authentication are logged to /var/opt/smu/log/mgr/
mgr.log and /var/opt/smu/log/mgr/security.log
On returning to Active Directory Groups page, the current list of

configured groups is displayed.
6. Click the details button in the right-hand column to view details of a

previously defined group.
When displaying the group details, the SMU checks that the group exists
in Active Directory and displays a warning if it does not exist or if it could
not access an Active Directory server. The user level cannot be modified
once the group has been added. In order to modify the user level, the
group would have to be deleted, then added again. Click the cancel
button to return to the Active Directory Groups page.
Group Name Name of group that details are provided for.

Group Distinguished Name The LDAP root location for users and groups. The name is
User Level for Group The user levels that can be assigned to group members are the
Members same as those that can be assigned to local or RADIUS users
and have the same meanings. The default is Global , but the
level can be modified by selecting one of the other radio buttons.
OK No details can be modified for a group, so the OK button is
disabled.
cancel Returns to the Active Directory Groups page.
User authentication through RADIUS servers (HNAS server only)

Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a networking
protocol that provides centralized authentication, authorization, and
accounting management for computers to connect and use a network service.
RADIUS is a client/server protocol that runs in the application layer, using

UDP as transport. The SMU acts as a RADIUS client component that
communicates with the RADIUS server to validate logins. The RADIUS server
is usually a background process running on a Unix or Microsoft Windows
server.
RADIUS serves three functions:

• Authenticates users or devices before granting them access to a network.
• Authorizes those users or devices for certain network services.
• Accounts for usage of those services.
The RADIUS server compatibility is as follows:

• For IPv4 only, works with FreeRADIUS 2.1 or Windows 2003 Internet
Authentication Service (IAS).
• For IPv6, requires FreeRADIUS 2.2 or Windows 2008 Network Policy
Server (NPS).
Configuring user authentication through a RADIUS server requires the

following:
• The RADIUS server must be set up and operational.
• The SMU must be able to communicate with the RADIUS server using the
network.
• You must know the RADIUS server's:
○ IP address or DNS name.
○ Authentication port.
○ Shared secret for the SMU.
You can specify and prioritize multiple RADIUS servers for authentication.
Note: The SMU contacts RADIUS servers in order of priority; the SMU will
always try to contact higher priority servers before lower priority servers, and
you cannot map SMU users to authenticate through a specific RADIUS server.

If you specify an incorrect secret or there are network problems that prevent
the SMU from communicating with the highest priority RADIUS server, the
SMU will try to contact the secondary RADIUS server, then the third RADIUS
server, then the next server, until the SMU has tried to contact all the RADIUS
servers in the list.
Displaying list of RADIUS servers
Procedure
Navigate to Home > SMU Administration > RADIUS Servers.
RADIUS server IP Specifies the RADIUS server IP address or DNS name.

address/DNS name To connect with the RADIUS server, you must enter either an IP
address or a DNS name. An IP address is preferred, both because
it eliminates the dependency on the network DNS severs, and to
improve login performance.
Port The port number on which each server listens.
Note: The default RADIUS server authentication port is

1812, but you should check with the RADIUS server
administrator to make sure that 1812 is the correct port.
Protocol The RADIUS server protocol. PAP is the default.
Timeout Specifies the timeout count. The default is 3 seconds. The timeout
is the number of seconds the SMU waits before retrying (retying is
re-transmitting the authentication request to the same RADIUS
server). If the timeout is reached and there is no response from
the first RADIUS server in the list, the SMU attempts another retry.
Retry Count Specifies the retry count. The default is 3. When the retry limit is
reached, the SMU sends the request to the next RADIUS server in
the list. When the retry limit for the second server is reached, the

SMU attempts to reach the next server in the list, until there are no
more servers to try. If the timeout is reached, and there are no
more servers to try, the user cannot be authenticated, and the
login fails.
details Displays the RADIUS Server Details page in which you can view
the details of the selected RADIUS server.
Check All Selects all of the RADIUS servers in the server list.
Clear All Unselects any selected RADIUS servers in the server list.
Increase Priority and Click Increase Priority to increase the server priority. Click
Decrease Priority Decrease Priority to decrease the server priority.
The SMU contacts RADIUS servers in order of priority; the SMU will
always try to contact higher priority servers before lower priority
servers, and you cannot map SMU users to authenticate through a
specific RADIUS server. If you specify an incorrect secret or there
are network problems that prevent the SMU from communicating
with the highest priority RADIUS server, the SMU will try to contact
the secondary RADIUS server, then the third RADIUS server, then
the next server, until the SMU has tried to contact all the RADIUS
servers in the list.
remove Removes the selected RADIUS server.
add Opens the Add Server RADIUS page where the properties of the
new server account are defined.
remove all settings Removes all RADIUS Servers settings.
SMU Users Opens the SMU Users page where you can view and add new SMU
users.
Adding a RADIUS server
Procedure
1. Navigate to Home > SMU Administration > RADIUS Servers to

display the RADIUS Servers page.
2. Click add to display the Add RADIUS Server page.

RADIUS server IP To connect with the RADIUS server, specify an IPv4 or IPv6 address,
address or DNS name or a host name (host name is not recommended). An IP address is
preferred, both because it eliminates the dependency on the network
DNS sever(s), and to improve login performance.
The SMU Network Configuration page (navigate to Home > SMU
Administration > SMU Network Configuration) shows the active
IP addresses. It is recommended that IPv4 on eth0 and the current
IPv6 addresses be added to the "allowed client" list on each RADIUS
server. For more information on setting up the SMU Network
Configuration for IPv6, see the Network Administration Guide.
Shared Secret Specify the shared secret.

Some RADIUS Servers limit the length of the shared secret and
require that it be comprised only of characters that can be typed on a
keyboard which uses only 94 out of 256 possible ASCII characters.
If the shared secret must be a sequence of keyboard characters,

choose shared secrets that are at least 22 characters long and
consisting of a random sequence of upper and lower case letters,
numbers, and punctuation.
• To ensure a random shared secret, use a computer program to
generate a random sequence at least 22 characters long. Windows
2008 Server allows you to generate a shared secret when adding
the RADIUS client.
• The SMU will support a shared secret from 1 up to 128 characters.
• Use a different shared secret for each RADIUS server-RADIUS
client pair.
Port Specify the RADIUS server authentication port. The default RADIUS
server authentication port is 1812, but you should check with the
RADIUS server administrator to make sure that 1812 is the correct
port.
Protocol The protocol for the RADIUS server.
Timeout Specify the timeout, which is the number of seconds the SMU waits
before retrying (retying is re-transmitting the authentication request

to the same RADIUS server). The default is 3 seconds. If the timeout

is reached and there is no response from the first RADIUS server in
the list, the SMU attempts another retry.
Retry Count Specify the retry count. The default is 3. When the retry limit is
reached, the SMU sends the request to the next RADIUS server in the
list. When the retry limit for the second server is reached, the SMU
attempts to reach the next server in the list, until there are no more
servers to try. If there are no more servers to try, the user cannot be
authenticated, and the login fails.
OK When you are done making changes, click OK to test connectivity and
save the configuration for this RADIUS server and return to the
RADIUS Servers page.
cancel Exits without saving the configuration.
Displaying details of RADIUS server
Procedure
1. Navigate to Home > SMU Administration > RADIUS Server to

display the RADIUS Server page.
2. Select a RADIUS server, and click details to display the RADIUS Server
Details page.
RADIUS server IP address The RADIUS server IP address or DNS name.

or DNS name
Shared Secret The shared secret, displayed with asterisks.
Port The RADIUS server authentication port.
Protocol Protocol associated with the RADIUS server.

Timeout The number of seconds the SMU waits before retrying (retrying
is re-transmitting the authentication request to the same
RADIUS server). If the timeout is reached and there is no
response from the first RADIUS server in the list, the SMU
attempts another retry.
Retry Count When the retry limit is reached, the SMU sends the request to
the next RADIUS server in the list. When the retry limit for the
second server is reached, the SMU attempts to reach the next
server in the list, until there are no more servers to try. If the
timeout is reached, and there are no more servers to try, the
user cannot be authenticated, and the login fails.
Check connectivity Click to check the connectivity status of the RADIUS server.
OK Saves configuration changes, and closes the page.
cancel Closes the page without saving configuration changes.

5
Setting up security
This chapter describes how to set up security on your storage system.
□ Working with certificates
□ Configuring SMU security (NAS module only)
Setting up security 203

Working with certificates
A digital certificate can be thought of as an electronic passport that allows
the SVP and storage system to exchange information securely over the
Internet using the public key infrastructure (PKI).
You can use a Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) certificate, HCS certificate, or both
to create a secure, encrypted connection between the SVP and the storage
system.
Managing HCS certificates

This topic explains how to set or delete certificates for Hitachi Command
Suite (HCS) that are used to check the server's reliability when SSL
communication for HCS external authentication is performed.
Registering HCS certificates

To check the server reliability during SSL communication for HCS external
authentication, upload an HCS public key certificate to the web server to
register the certificate. Complete the steps in the following procedure to
upload and register a certificate using the certificate update tool.
Note: Ensure that you register or delete the correct certificate. Otherwise,
HCS external authentication will not return.
Before you begin

• The private key file on the HCS server must be current. Update it if
necessary.
• The certificate file must have a .crt extension. Rename the file if
necessary.
• The certificate must be in X509 PEM format or X509 DER format.
Procedure

C:\MAPP\wk\Supervisor\MappIniSet\MappHcsCrtEntry.bat
absolute-path-of-signed-public-key-certificate-file
Deleting HCS certificates

You can delete the certificates you registered in the procedure of the
"Registering certificates for HCS" section. After you delete a certificate,
204 Setting up security

server reliability for that certificate is not checked by SSL communication for
HCS external authentication.
Before you begin

• The private HCS server key must be updated.
• The certificate file must have a .crt extension. Rename the file if
necessary.
• The certificate must be in X509 PEM format or X509 DER format.
Procedure

C:\MAPP\wk\Supervisor\MappIniSet\MappHcsCrtDelete.bat
4. A completion message box opens. Press any key to acknowledge the
Managing SSL certificates

To improve the security of remote operations between the SVP and the
storage system, you can set up a Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encrypted
connection between them.
SSL certificates (also known as digital certificates) are used to establish a

secure encrypted connection between an SVP and a storage system. The SSL
connection protects the Hitachi Device Manager - Storage Navigator User ID
and password that is exchanged during each visit (or session).
SSL certificates consist of small data files that digitally bind a cryptographic
key to an SVP's log on credentials. When installed on the SVP, SSL activates
the padlock and the HTTPS protocol, allowing secure connections between the
SVP and the storage system.
Flow of SSL communication settings

The following figure shows the procedure to set up SSL communication.
Unless otherwise noted, all steps are required. Note that creation of private
and public keys requires a dedicated program. Download one from the
OpenSSL website (http://www.openssl.org/).

Creating a keypair
To enable SSL, you must create a keypair consisting of a public and a private
key. The instructions use Windows 7 as an example.
Creating a private key

A private key is required to create an SSL keypair. The following procedure
for Windows 7 creates a private key file called server.key in the c:\key
folder.
Before you begin
Download openssl.exe from the OpenSSL website.
Procedure
1. If the read-only attribute is set, release it from the c:\openssl folder.

2. Open a command prompt with administrator permissions.
3. Move the current directory to the folder to which the key file is output
(such as c:\key), and execute the following command:
c:\key > c:\openssl\bin\openssl genrsa -out server.key 1024

Creating a public key
A public key has the file extension .csr. It is required to create an SSL
keypair. The following procedure is for the Windows 7 operating system.
Before you begin
Download openssl.exe from the OpenSSL website.
Procedure

2. Move the current directory to the folder to which the key file is output
(such as c:\key). Execute the following command:
c:\key > c:\openssl req -sha256 -new -key server.key -config
c:\openssl\bin\openssl.cfg -out server.csr
3. Enter the following information in the prompt:
• Country Name (two-letter code)
• State or Province Name
• Locality Name
• Organization Name
• Organization Unit Name
• Common Name
To create a self-signed certificate, enter the IP address of the web
server (SVP). The name you entered here is used as the server name
(host name). To obtain a signed and trusted certificate, ensure that
the server name is the same as the host name of the SVP.
• Email Address
• Challenge password (optional)
• Company name (optional)
Example
The following example shows the contents of a command window when you
create a public key.
......++++++
..++++++
is 65537 (0x10001)
C:\key>c:\openssl\bin\openssl req -sha256 -new -key server.key -
config c
You are about to be asked to enter information that will be
incorporated into your certificate request. What you are about
to enter is what is called a Distinguished Name or a DN.
\openssl\bin\openssl.cfg -out server.csr
For some fields there will be a default value.
If you enter '.', the field will be left blank.
-----
Country Name (2 letter code) [AU]:JP
State or Province Name (full name) [Some-State]:Kanagawa

Locality Name (eg, city) []:Odawara
Organization Name (eg, company) [Internet Widgits Pty
Ltd]:Hitachi
Organization Unit Name (eg, section) []:ITPD
Common Name (eg, YOUR name) []:192.168.0.1
Email Address []:
Please enter the following 'extra' attributes
to be sent with your certificate request
A challenge password []:
Obtaining a signed certificate

After creating a private key and public key, obtain a signed public key
certificate file. You can use any of these methods to obtain a signed
certificate file.
• Create a certificate by self-signing. See Obtaining a self-signed certificate
on page 208.
• Obtain a certificate from the certificate authority that is used by your
company.
• Request an official certificate from an SSL certificate authority. See
Obtaining a signed and trusted certificate on page 208.
Note: When you send a request to a certificate authority, specify the SVP as
the host name.
Hitachi recommends that self-signed certificates be used only for testing

encrypted communication.
Obtaining a self-signed certificate

To obtain a self-signed certificate, open a command prompt and execute the
following command:
c:\key>c:\openssl\bin\openssl x509 -req -sha256 -days 10000 -in
server.csr -signkey server.key -out server.crt
Note: This command uses SHA-256 as a hash algorithm. MD5 or SHA-1 is

not recommended for a hash algorithm due to its low security level.
This command creates a server.crt file in the c:\key folder, which is valid
for 10,000 days. This is the signed private key, which is also referred to as a
self-signed certificate.
Obtaining a signed and trusted certificate

To obtain a signed and trusted certificate, you must obtain a certificate
signing request (CSR), send that file to a Certificate Authority (CA), and
request that the CA issue a signed and trusted certificate. Each certificate
authority has its own procedures and requirements. Use of this certificate

results in higher reliability in exchange for greater cost and requirements.
The signed and trusted certificate is the signed public key.
Verifying and releasing an SSL certificate passphrase

An SSL certificate cannot be applied for the SVP if the passphrase is set. If
the passphrase is set, release the passphrase for the SSL certificate before
applying the SSL certificate to the SVP. The following procedure explains how
to verify and release the passphrase settings.
Before you begin

• A private key (.key file) has been created.
• OpenSSL must be installed. In this procedure, it is installed in C:\openssl.
Procedure

2. Move the current directory to the folder (for example, C:\key) where the
key file is stored, and run the following command:
Caution: Executing this command will overwrite the current key

file. To prevent loss of the key file, do one of the following:
• Back up the key file first.
• Use a different key file input destination and output destination.
C:\key>C:\openssl\bin\openssl rsa -in key-file-input-

destination -out key-file-output-destination
If Enter pass phrase for server.key: is displayed, the passphrase is

set. Enter the passphrase. The passphrase in the SSL private key will be
released, and the SSL certificate can be applied to the SVP.
Example (when passphrase is set)

C:\key>c:\openssl\bin\openssl rsa -in server.key -out server.key
Enter pass phrase for server.key: "Enter passphrase"
Writing RSA key
Example (when passphrase is not set)

C:\key>c:\openssl\bin\openssl rsa -in server.key –out server.key
Writing RSA key

Converting SSL certificates to PKCS#12 format
If you are uploading a created private key and the SSL certificate to GUM,
you need to convert it to PKCS#12 format. If you are not uploading SSL
certificate to GUM, conversion is not required.
Before you begin

• You must store a private key and SSL certificate in the same folder.
• In the following procedure:
○ The private key file name is “client.key”.
○ The SSL certificate file name is “client.crt”.
○ The SSL certificate in PKCS#12 format is output to c:\key.
Procedure

2. Enter the following command: C:key>c:\openssl\bin\openssl pkcs12
-export -in client.crt –inkey client.key -out client.p12
3. Enter a password, which is used when uploading the SSL certificate in
PKCS#12 format to GUM. You can use up to 128 alphanumeric characters
and the following symbols: ! # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ]
^_`{|}~
4. The client.p12 file is created in the C:\key folder. This client.p12 file
is the SSL certificate in PKCS#12 format.
5. Close the command prompt.
Updating a signed certificate

To use SSL-encrypted communication, you must update and upload the
private key and the signed server certificate (public key) to the SVP.
Before you begin

perform this task.
• A private key (.key file) has been created. Make sure that the file name is
server.key.
• The passphrase for the private key (server.key file) is released.
• A signed public key certificate (.crt file) has been acquired. Make sure that
the file name is server.crt.
• The private key (.key file) must be in PEM format. You cannot use DER
format.
• The signed public key certificate (.crt file) must be in X509 PEM format.
You cannot use X509 DER format.
• The passphrase for the private key (server.key file) must be released.

Procedure

C:\MAPP\wk\Supervisor\MappIniSet\MappApacheCrtUpdate.bat
absolute-path-of-signed-public-key-certification-file
absolute-path-of-private-key-file
Note: A space is required between the signed public key

certification file path and the private key file path.

Notes on updating a signed certificate for the service processor

The following notes provide additional information about updating a signed
certificate.
• While the service processor certificate is being updated, tasks that are
being run or scheduled to run on Device Manager - Storage Navigator are
not executed.
• Certificates for RMI communication are updated asynchronously. The
process takes about two minutes.
• If the service processor certificate is updated while Hitachi Command Suite
is being set up, the setup operation will fail.
• Updating the SSL certificate might change the system drastically and may
lead to service processor failure. Therefore take sufficient care to consider
the content of the certificate and private key to be set.
• After the certificate update is complete, depending on the environment,
the service processor can take 30 to 60 minutes to restart.
Returning the certificate to default

You can return the certificate that was updated by the procedure in Updating
a signed certificate on page 210 back to default.
Before you begin

perform this task.
• A private key (.key file) has been created. Make sure that the file name is
server.key. See Creating a private key on page 206.
• The passphrase for the private key (server.key file) is released.
• A signed public key certificate (.crt file) has been acquired. Make sure that
the file name is server.crt. See Creating a public key on page 207.

• The private key (.key file) must be in PEM format. You cannot use DER
format.
• The signed public key certificate (.crt file) must be in X509 PEM format.
You cannot use X509 DER format. See Obtaining a self-signed certificate
on page 208.
• The passphrase for the private key (server.key file) must be released.
Procedure

C:\MAPP\wk\Supervisor\MappIniSet\MappApacheCrtInit.bat
Selecting a cipher suite

Cipher suites are part of SSL Version 3 and OSI Transport Layer Security
Version 1 Cipher Specifications.
Before you begin
this procedure.
Procedure

Management.
2. Click Select Cipher Suite.

3. Select the type of communication to use between the SVP and the
storage system. The selections change the encryption level. Higher
encryption provides better security but the communication speed is
slower.

• TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA (Prioritize Transmission Speed).
This selection provides higher communication speed and lower
security.
• TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256 (Prioritize Security). This
selection provides higher security and lower communication speed.
4. Click Apply to save the setting and close the dialog box.
Problems with website security certificates

When the message "There is a problem with this website's security
certificate." is displayed, click Continue to this website (not
recommended).
If the security certificate is not issued by a trusted certificate authority, the

browser displays a warning message when it connects to an SSL-enabled
Updating the certificate files

The Update Certificate Files window is used to update the certificates that
are used for communication between the SVP and the storage system.
Before you begin

• You must have the Storage Administrator (View & Modify) role to complete
this procedure.
Procedure

Management.

2. Click Update Certificate Files.
3. Select a Web Server certificate file to update. Click the Web Server
checkbox, then click Browse.
4. Browse to the certificate file and click Open. The File Upload window
closes and returns you to the Update Certificate Files dialog box.
5. In the Web Server Password: field, enter the certificate password.
6. Enter the password again in the Web Server Re-enter Password: field.
7. Select a Connect to SVP certificate file to update. Click the Connect to
SVP checkbox, then click Browse.
8. Browse to the certificate file and click Open. The File Upload window
closes and returns you to the Update Certificate Files dialog box.
9. In the Connect to SVP Password: field, enter the certificate password.
10. Enter the password again in the Connect to SVP Re-enter Password:
field.
11. Click Apply to update the certificates.

Configuring SMU security (NAS module only)
This screen allows you to change web application security settings.
The SMU can be configured to control the hosts that can access the SMU and
auxiliary devices managed by the SMU.
Note: If you have a standby SMU, it may take up to 5 minutes after a

configuration change to be synchronized with the active SMU
Procedure
1. Navigate to Home > SMU Administration > Security Options.
Web Application This section allows you to change web application security settings.
Security Settings
Note: Making any change in this section results in the

application being restarted immediately.
Enable HTTPS By default, all HTTPS protocols are enabled, and the boxes next to the
Protocols protocols are checked. Uncheck the check box next to a protocol to
change its state to disabled. Leave at least one protocol enabled that
your browser supports.
Enabled Cipher By default, all cipher suites are enabled and are shown in the Enabled
Suites Cipher Suites list box.
Disabled Cipher To disable cipher suites, use the arrow to move selected cipher suites to
Suites the Disabled Cipher Suites list box. Leave at least one cipher suite
enabled that your browser supports.
apply Click apply to save your changes.

2. Optionally, to disable cipher suites, use the arrow to move enabled cipher
suites from the Enabled Cipher Suites list at the left to the Disabled
Cipher Suites list at the right. It is necessary to have at least one cipher
suite remain enabled.
Note: Take care before disabling cipher suites, because not all
cipher suites are supported by all browsers.
3. Optionally, to disable protocols, at Enable HTTPS Protocols, uncheck

the check box next to a protocol to change its state to disabled. It is
necessary to have at least one protocol remain enabled.
Note: Take care before disabling HTTPS protocols, because not all
HTTPS protocols are supported by all browsers.
4. Click apply to save the currently defined security options.

6
Alert notifications
This chapter provides requirements and procedures to view and manage
system event and alert notifications.
□ Viewing alert notifications
□ Configuring alert notifications
□ Sending test messages
□ Using the Windows event log
Alert notifications 217

Viewing alert notifications
You can view alert email messages, alert Syslog messages, and alert SNMP
trap messages in the Device Manager - Storage Navigator Alerts tab and the
Alert Detail window.
Before you begin
You must have the Storage Administrator (View Only) or Storage

Administrator (Initial Configuration) role to perform this task.
• Email: Check your email to view alerts sent by email. Alerts that are
reported through email are the same as the SIM information that is
displayed in the Alert window or reported through an SNMP trap.
• Syslog: Check the messages on the Syslog server to view alert information
sent there.
• SNMP traps: To view SNMP trap information, use the SNMP Manager in
Device Manager - Storage Navigator. See the Hitachi SNMP Agent User
Guide for information about using SNMP traps.
Configuring alert notifications

Procedure
1. In the maintenance utility, click the SNMP tab to display it.

2. In SNMP Agent, click Enable to use the agent or Disable not to use it.
3. Select the Email tab. The Email window displays the current settings for
the Mail Server, SMTP Authentication, an Email Address.
4. To send a test email message, click Send Test Email. A completion
notice displays.
5. Click OK to acknowledge the notice and close the message.
6. Click the Syslog tab. The Syslog window displays the current settings
for the Primary Server, IP address, and port number, and for the
secondary server IP address and port number.
7. To send a test message to the Syslog server, click Send Test message
to the Syslog Server. A completion notice displays.
9. Click the SNMP tab. The SNMP window displays the current settings for
the Storage System Name, Contact, Location, SNMP Trap and SNMP
Manager.
10. To send a test SNMP trap, click Send Test SNMP Trap. A completion
notice displays.
218 Alert notifications

General settings
Procedure
1. In the maintenance utility Administration pane, select Alert

Notifications.
2. In the Alert Notifications window, click Set Up. The Set Up Alert
Notifications window displays the Email tab by default.
3. Select the type of report to send.

• Host Report: Sends alerts only to the hosts for which a SIM report
setting is made.
• All: Sends alerts to all hosts.
The alert notification destination is common to Syslog, SNMP, and email.

Email settings
Procedure
1. To send email notices, click Enable, next to Email Notice. Click Disable
to not send email notices.
2. Click Add to add an email address to the list of registered addresses.
3. Enter the email address and then use the pull-down menu to select the
type of address: To, Cc, or Bcc.
4. Click OK to save the email address and close the dialog box.
5. Enter an email address in Email Address (From).
6. Enter an email address in Email Address (Reply To:).
7. In Mail Server Settings, select the mail server type: Identifier, IPv4,
or IPv6.
8. To use SMTP authentication, click Enable.
9. In Account, enter an SMTP account name.
10. In Password, enter the SMTP account password.
11. Click Apply to save the changes and close the Set Up Alert
Notifications window.
Syslog settings
Procedure
1. Click the Syslog tab.

2. Select the type of transfer protocol to use.
3. In Primary Server:
a. Click Enable to use the server or Disable not to use it.
b. Select the type of IP address to use for the server: IPv4 or IPv6.
c. In Client Certificate File Name, click Browse to select a client
certificate file.
4. In Secondary Server:
a. Click Enable to use the server or Disable not to use it.
b. Select the type of IP address to use for the server: IPv4 or IPv6.
c. In Client Certificate File Name, click Browse to select a client
certificate file.
5. In Location Identification Name, enter a name to use to identify the
server.
6. To set up an automatic attempt to reconnect to the server in case of
communication failure, in Retry, click Enable. Click Disable to not use
this feature.
7. If you enabled retry, in Retry Interval, enter the number of seconds
that the system will wait between retry attempts.

SNMP settings
Procedure
1. Click the SNMP tab.

2. In SNMP Agent, click Enable to use the agent or Disable not to use it.
3. In Trap Destination, click the type of address to send the SNMP trap
information: Community or Public.
4. Click Add to add an SNMP trap address.
5. In Community, create a new community name or select an existing one.

6. In Send Trap to, enter a new IP address or select an existing one.
7. Click OK to save the information and close the dialog box.
Sending test messages

The lower section of the Alert Notifications window contains three tabs:
Email, Syslog, and SNMP. Select the desired tab to send a test message of
the type specified in the tab name.

Sending a test email message
Procedure
1. Click the Email tab.

The Email tab displays the current settings for the mail server, SMTP
authentications, and email addresses.
2. Click Send Test Email.
A completion notice displays.
Example of a test email message

Subject: VSP Gx00 Report
DATE : 24/10/2014
TIME : 10:09:30
Machine : Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform Gx00 (Serial# 64019)
RefCode : 7fffff
Detail: This is Test Report.
The field definitions in the test email message are listed in the following
table.
Item Description
Subject Email title (name of the storage system) + (report)
DATE Date when a system failure occurred.
TIME Time when a system failure occurred.
Machine Name and serial number of the storage system.
RefCode Reference code. The same code as the one reported by SNMP traps.
Detail Failure details. The same information as the one reported by SNMP traps.
See the Hitachi SNMP Agent User Guide for reference codes and failure
details.
Sending a test Syslog message
Procedure
1. Click the Syslog tab.

The Syslog tab displays the current settings for the primary and
secondary servers.
2. Click Send Test message to the Syslog Server.

Sending a test SNMP trap
Procedure
1. Click the SNMP tab.

The SNMP tab displays the current settings for the storage system
name, contact, location, SNMP trap, and SNMP manager.
2. Click Send Test SNMP Trap.
Using the Windows event log

Some failure information is output to the Windows event log.
Monitoring failure information in the Windows event log

You can manage the Windows error information by outputting failure
information to the event log.
Before you begin

• The storage system status in the storage device list must be READY.
Procedure
1. Open a Windows command prompt with administrator permissions in

SVP.
2. Execute the following command to move the current directory:
cd /d C:\Mapp\wk\model-identification-number\DKC200\mp\pc
• The default installation directory is C:\Mapp:<installation-directory-of-

SVP>
Note:
• C:\Mapp indicates the installation directory of Device
Manager - Storage Navigator. If you specified another
directory, replace C:\Mapp: with the specified installation
directory.
• Without moving the current directory, failure information is
not output to the Windows event log if you execute the batch
file in step 3.
• model-identification-number: Use the format 83<model-

name><serial-number>, where <model-name> is one of the
following:
VSP G200: 2000

VSP G400 or VSP F400, VSP G600 or VSP F600: 4000
VSP G800 or VSP F800: 6000
For example, for a VSP G600 that has the serial number 400102, the
value is 834000400102.
3. Execute the following batch file:

eventlog.bat action monitoring-period
• action: Specify one of the following:

0: Stop outputting failure information
1: Start outputting failure information
when this parameter is omitted, 0 is set.
• monitoring-period: If you specified 1 for action, specify the monitoring

period, from 5 to 720 minutes.
• A space is required between eventlog.bat and action.

• A space is required between action and monitoring-period.
• The command prompt is displayed if the command finishes without
any errors.
4. Close the command prompt.
Viewing the Windows event log

You can view the Windows event log which is output to the SVP.
Procedure
1. From the Windows start menu, click Control Panel > System and
Security > Administrative Tools > Event Viewer.
2. Click Windows Logs > Application in the left pane.
Output example of the failure information

The following is an example of the storage system failure information.

# Item Description
1 Overview of the Displays the overview of the event information

event info
2 Detail of the Displays the selected information

event info Date: Date of the event occurrence
Time: Time of the event occurrence
Machine: Model name and serial number of the

storage system
Refcode: Reference code*
Detail: Detailed failure information*
ActionCode: Includes action code, expected

failure parts, and location. A maximum of 8
failure information can be shown.
3 Log name Displays the log type

This is always displayed as "Application"
4 Source Displays the name of the application which

issued the event

# Item Description
This is always displayed as "Hitachi Storage

Navigator Alert Module"
5 Event ID Displays the event ID

This is always displayed as "10"
6 Level Displays the event alert level

• Error: Acute or Serious
• Warning: Moderate
• Information: Service
7 User This is always displayed as "N/A"
8 OpCode This is always displayed as blank
9 Logged Displays the date and time when the event log
was registered
10 Task category This is always displayed as "None"
11 Keywords This is always displayed as "Classic"
12 Computer Displays the computer name on which the

event occurred
*For reference code, failure details, and alert level, see the SNMP failure trap reference code
section in the Hitachi SNMP Agent User Guide.

7
License keys
This storage system includes base and optional software features for Hitachi
Virtual Storage Platform G200, G400, G600, G800 or Hitachi Virtual Storage
Platform F400, F600, F800 storage systems that must be enabled by
installing license keys. This chapter describes the types of available licenses,
license capacity calculation, and instructions for installing, enabling,
disabling, and uninstalling license keys.
□ Overview
□ License key types
□ Cautions on license capacities in license-related windows
□ Managing licenses
□ License key expiration
License keys 229

Overview
When you install a license key, it is automatically enabled and the timer on
the license starts at that time. To preserve time on a term key license, you
can disable it without uninstalling it. When you need the software, enable the
license again.
If you do not install the software before you install the license key software,
the software will install correctly but will be disabled. To enable a license key,
install the prerequisite software, and then enable the key.
License key types

To use software, you must install the license key provided when you purchase
that software.
You can use software with licensed capacity for a term key by installing a
term key and overwriting a permanent key as long as the term key is valid. If
the term key expires when the system is being used, and the capacity
needed for the operation is insufficient, operations that you can perform are
limited. In this case, a SIM that indicates the term key expiration (reference
code 7ff7xx) is output on the Alerts tab in the Storage Systems window.
The following table describes the four types of license keys.
Estimating
Effective
Type Description licensed
term1
capacity
Permanent For purchase No limit Required

Term For purchase 365 days Required
Temporary For trial use before purchase (try and buy) 120 days Not required
Emergency For emergency use 30 days Not required
Notes:
1. When you log in to Device Manager - Storage Navigator, a warning message appears if 45
days or less remain before the expiration.
Using the permanent key

You can purchase the permanent key to use a software application
indefinitely. You must estimate a licensed capacity required for using the
software application and purchase a license key for the amount of the
required capacity.
• If insufficient license capacity is installed, Not Enough License displays in
the status field of the License Keys window, and the software application
is not enabled.
• If the capacity of the usable volume exceeds the licensed capacity while
the storage system is running (for example, when an LDEV is additionally
230 License keys

installed), Grace Period displays in the status field of the License Keys
window. You can continue to perform the same operations, but the
deficient amount of license capacity must be purchased within 30 days.
Using the term key

You can purchase the term key to use the software application for a specific
number of days. You must estimate a licensed capacity required for using the
software application and purchase a license key for the amount of the
required capacity.
• If insufficient license capacity is installed, Not Enough License or Grace
Period displays in the status field of the License Keys window.
• You can enable or disable the term key for each software application.
Unlike the temporary key and the emergency key, the number of days the
term key is enabled is counted as the number of effective days of the term
key rather than the number of elapsed days from the installation date.
• The number of effective days is decremented by one day when the date
changes.
For example, if the term key is set to be enabled for 150 days during
installation and the term key is disabled for 100 days and a total of 250
days have elapsed since the installation, the number of remaining effective
days of the term key is 215 days. This is determined by subtracting 150
days from 365 days. By disabling the term key on the days when the
software application is not used, you can prevent the unnecessary
shortening of the period in which the term key can be used.
• If the term key is expired, Not Installed displays in the status field of the
License Keys window, and the software application is disabled.
Using the temporary key

You can use the temporary key for trial purposes. The effective term is 120
days from the time of installation of the temporary key. The effective term is
not increased even if the temporary key is reinstalled during the effective
term.
If you uninstall the temporary key, even though the effective term remains,
Temporary is displayed in the status field, Not Installed is displayed in the
Key Type field, and the remaining days of the effective term are displayed in
the Term (Days) field of the License Keys window.
If the temporary key expires, you cannot reinstall the temporary key for 180
days. Expired displays in the status field of the License Keys window, and
the software application is disabled.
Using the emergency key

You can use the emergency key if the license key cannot be purchased, or if
an emergency occurs, such as a system failure or a communication error.
License keys 231

You can also use the emergency key if the configuration of the software
application that is installed by the temporary key remains in the changed
status and cannot be restored to the original status. For example, if you do
not plan to purchase the software application after using the temporary key
for trial purposes, you can restore the changed configuration to the original
status by temporarily enabling the software application with the emergency
key.
Caution:
• If an emergency key is installed for a software application for which a
permanent or term key is installed, the effective term of the license key is
30 days. However, because the emergency key can be reinstalled during
the effective term, the effective term can be restored to 30 days.
• In other scenarios, the emergency key can be installed only once.
Cautions on license capacities in license-related windows

License capacities are displayed not only in license-related windows but also
in the Pools window and the Replication window.
When you install or overwrite a temporary key or an emergency key for an

installed software application, the license capacity before the overwrite
installation is displayed as Permitted (TB) in license-related windows.
However, Unlimited (license capacity for the temporary key or emergency
key) is displayed as Licensed Capacity in the Pools window and the
Replication window.
For example: You install a term key that has a license capacity of 5 TB for
Compatible FlashCopy®, and when the term expires, you use an emergency
key. In license-related windows, 5 TB is displayed in the Permitted (TB) field.
However, in the Licensed Capacity field in a Replication window, Unlimited
(capacity of the emergency key) is displayed.
Managing licenses
Use the Licenses window in the maintenance utility to install and uninstall
block license keys.
232 License keys

Use NAS Manager to install and enable both block and file license keys on
VSP Gx00 models with NAS modules. Using NAS Manager, you can install
both block and file licenses but only remove file licenses. To remove block
licenses, you must use the maintenance utility.
Related tasks
• Enabling a license on page 235
• Disabling a license on page 235
• Removing a software license on page 236
Related references
• Examples of license information on page 237
Installing block and file licenses using NAS Manager

Use NAS Manager to install and enable both block and file license keys on
VSP Gx00 models with NAS modules. Using NAS Manager, you can install
both block and file licenses but only remove file licenses. To remove block
licenses, you must use the maintenance utility.
Adding a license key

Adding a license key can enable services or increase the capabilities of your
system. To add a license key:
Procedure
1. Navigate to Home > Server Settings > License Keys.
License keys 233

2. Click add.
Add a File License Key
File License Key Enables the user to manually enter the license key.
Import File License Keys From a File
File License Key Enables the user to import a license key from a file.
File Name
Import Block License Keys From a File (NAS module only)
Block License Enables the user to import a software application license key from a file.
Key File Name
cancel Closes the page without saving configuration changes.
Note: After adding a license key, if a reboot is required in order to

start a service/protocol or enable a feature, you are instructed to
reboot or restart the system.
For a file license, you can either enter the key manually or import it from
a file. For a block license, you can only import the key from a file:
• To enter the key manually, type it in the field, then click add.
• To import the key, click Choose File / Browse, navigate to the file,
select the key file, then click Import.
After all the keys have been entered or imported, they will be displayed
on the License Keys page. Follow the instructions to reboot the system
(if necessary).
234 License keys

Installing block licenses using maintenance utility
Before you begin

You must have the Storage Administrator (Initial Configuration) role to
perform this task.
Procedure
1. In the maintenance utility Administration tree, select Licenses.

2. Select whether to enter a key code or specify a license key file.
• Key Code: Enter a key code to install the software. In Key Code,
enter the license key code for the software.
• File: Specify a license key file to install the software. Click Browse
and specify the license key file. You can use a file name of up to 200
alphanumeric characters excluding these symbols: (“ \ : ; , * ? < >
| / ). Include the .plk file extension.
3. Click Apply.
Enabling a license
You can enable a license that is in disabled status.
Before you begin

perform this task.
Procedure
1. From the Maintenance Utility menu, click License Keys to open the
License Keys window.
2. Select the license to enable. You can select from one to all of the licenses
listed in the window at the same time.
3. Click Enable to display the License Keys window.
4. Check the settings and click Apply.
Disabling a license
You can disable a license that is in enabled status.
Before you begin

perform this task.
Procedure
1. From the Maintenance Utility menu, click License Keys to open the
License Keys window.
License keys 235

2. Select the license to disable. You can select from one to all of the
licenses listed in window the at the same time.
3. Click Disable to display the License Keys window.
4. Click Finish.
Removing a software license

You can remove a software license that is in disabled status.
Before you begin

perform this task.
Procedure
1. In the maintenance utility Administration tree, click License Keys.

2. In the License Keys window, select the license to uninstall. You can
select from one to all of the licenses listed in the window at the same
time.
3. In the License Keys window, click Uninstall Licenses.
On rare occasions, a software option that is listed as Not Installed but
still has available licensed capacity (shown as XX TB) might remain in the
list. In this case, select that option and uninstall the software.
Note: To reinstall a license key after uninstalling it, contact Hitachi

Data Systems customer support to reissue the license key file.
Related tasks
• Removing a Data Retention Utility license on page 236
Removing a Data Retention Utility license
Caution: When you remove a Data Retention Utility license, an error might
occur, even if the Permitted Volumes column of the License Keys window
indicates that the licensed capacity is 0 TB.
Procedure
1. Click Actions > Other Function > Data Retention to open the Data
Retention window.
2. In the Data Retention window, find logical volumes that are unusable
as S-VOLs.
3. Change the settings so that the logical volumes are usable as S-VOLs.
4. Uninstall the Data Retention Utility.
236 License keys

Examples of license information
The following table provides examples of license information displayed in the
License Keys table of the maintenance utility.
License key status

Status Key type Licensed capacity Term (Days)
(example)
Not installed Not installed blank Blank Blank

Installed with the Installed permanent Permitted -
permanent key
Installed with the term key Installed term Permitted Number of
and set to Enabled remaining days
before expiration
Installed with the term key Installed (Disabled) term Permitted -
and set to Disabled
Installed with the Installed temporary - Number of
temporary key. remaining days
before expiration
Installed with the Installed emergency - Number of
emergency key. remaining days
before expiration
A temporary key was Expired temporary - Number of
installed, but has expired. remaining days
before expiration
A term key or an Not installed blank Blank Blank
emergency key was
installed, but has expired.
Installed with the Not Enough License permanent or term Permitted and Used -
permanent key or the term
key, but the licensed
capacity was insufficient.
Installed with the Grace Period permanent or term Permitted and Used Number of
permanent or term key, remaining days
and then LDEVs are added, before expiration
but the license capacity
was insufficient.
Installed with the Installed temporary Permitted and Used Number of
temporary key, and then remaining days
reinstalled with the before expiration
permanent key, but the
license capacity was
insufficient.
Installed with the Installed emergency Permitted and Used Number of
permanent or term key, remaining days
then reinstalled with the before expiration
emergency key.
License keys 237

License key expiration
If the license key for software-A expires, the license key for software-B is
also disabled if software-B requires an enabled software-A. In this scenario,
Installed (Disabled) is shown for software-B in the Status column of the
License Keys table. After that, when you re-enable software-A, software-B
is also re-enabled. If the Status column for software-B continues to display
Installed (Disabled), go to the License Keys table and manually change the
status of software-B back to Installed.
After your license key expires, no new configuration settings can be made,
and no monitoring functions can be used with Performance Monitor.
Configuration settings made before the expiration of the license key remain
in effect. You can cancel configuration changes for some software.
238 License keys

8
Configuring audit logs
This chapter describes how to change the audit log settings in the
maintenance utility.
□ Audit log settings
Configuring audit logs 239

Audit log settings
This section shows the procedures to configure the audit log settings.
The Audit Log Settings window shows the current audit log settings. Select
one of more of the three tabs to change the settings.
Related tasks
• Setting up a syslog server on page 240
• Exporting an audit log on page 241
• Sending a test Syslog message on page 223
Setting up a syslog server
Before you begin
You must have the Audit Log Administrator (View & Modify) role to perform
this task.
Procedure
1. In the maintenance utility Administration tree, select Audit Log

Settings.
2. Click Set Up Syslog Server.
3. Select the desired Transfer Protocol.
4. Enable or disable the Primary Server.
5. Enable or disable the Secondary Server.
6. Enable or disable the Output Detailed Information.
7. Click Apply to save the settings or Cancel to close the window without
saving the settings.
240 Configuring audit logs

Exporting an audit log
Use the following procedure to send a display an audit log file on the screen
or to save it to a file on the SVP or your laptop.
Before you begin
You must have the Audit Log Administrator (View Only) role to perform this
task.
Procedure
1. In the maintenance utility Administration tree, select Audit Log

Settings.
2. Click Export Audit Log.
3. To open the file without saving, click Open with and then use the pull-
down menu to select the software application to use to open the file.
4. Click OK. The auditlog.txt file is displayed.
5. To save the file, click Save File.
6. To use one of the two settings in steps 3 through 5 when you export an
another auditlog.txt file, click Do this automatically for files like this
from now on.
7. Click OK.
8. Browse to the directory where you want to save the file. Use the default
file name auditlog.txt or change the file name as desired.
Click Save. The file is saved and the dialog box closes.
9. Browse to the directory where you want the file. Use the default file
name auditlog.txt or change the file name as desired.
Configuring audit logs 241

10. Click Save. The file auditlog.txt file is saved.
Send test message to syslog server

Use the following procedure to send a test audit log message to the syslog
server.
Before you begin
You must have the Audit Log Administrator (View Only) role to perform this
task.
Procedure
1. In the maintenance usage Administration tree, select Audit Log

Settings.
2. Click Send Test Message to Syslog Server. The following message
box opens:
3. Click OK to close the message box. Check the syslog server messages
and verify that the test message was received and is on the server.
242 Configuring audit logs

9
Managing storage system reports
This chapter describes how to create storage configuration reports and view
them. It includes examples of the three types of reports.
□ About storage system reports
□ Viewing a Device Manager - Storage Navigator report
□ Collecting dump files using the Dump tool
Managing storage system reports 243

About storage system reports
Device Manager - Storage Navigator can generate a standard set of reports
that provide views of various aspects of the storage system. In addition to
these views, you can generate custom reports for specific areas of the
system. These include a summary of the system data and configuration,
ports, channel adapters, and disk adapters. You can save reports in CSV files
or HTML files. Tables in the HTML version of the configuration reports are
sortable.
Before making changes to a storage system, create reports of your storage

system’s physical configurations and logical settings. Make a similar report
after the changes, and then compare the reports to verify that new settings
were made as intended.
Viewing a Device Manager - Storage Navigator report

Before you begin
• Adobe Flash Player must be installed.
• Users can view the reports that they created.
• Users that have the Storage Administrator (Initial Configuration) role can
view all reports.
• The window to specify the saving folder location may not be displayed
when downloading the report in Google Chrome. In this case, follow
Chrome Menu > Settings > Show advanced settings and uncheck the
Protect you and your device from dangerous sites checkbox under Privacy.
Procedure
1. Expand the Storage Systems tree, and then click Reports.

2. Specify the report to download.
3. Click Download Reports.
4. Specify a folder in which to save a .tgz file.
5. Extract the downloaded .tgz file.
6. Display the report.
For HTML reports:
Open the file extracted-folder\html\index.html.
For CSV reports:
Open a CSV file in the folder extracted-folder\csv.
244 Managing storage system reports

Viewing a report in the Reports window
You can view only HTML format reports in the Reports window. You can view
CSV format reports in the previous procedure.
Procedure

2. Click the name of the report to display.
The report is displayed in the Reports window.
3. In the Reports window, click the name of the report in the list at the
left, and then view the report at the right.
Creating a configuration report

You can create up to 20 configuration reports for each storage system. If you
already created 20 reports, delete unnecessary reports first, and then create
a new report.
Before you begin
You must have Storage View permission to perform this task.
Procedure
1. Open the Create Configuration Report window.

In Hitachi Command Suite:
a. On the Resources tab, expand the Storage Systems tree.
b. Right-click the local storage system, and then click Reports > Create
Configuration Report.
In Device Manager - Storage Navigator:

• From General Tasks, click Create Configuration Report.
2. Specify a task name and click Apply. This task name is used as the
report name in the Reports window. This process takes approximately
10 minutes to complete.
3. Click Refresh to update the Reports window. The created report
appears in the list.
Deleting a configuration report

You can delete a report when you no longer need it, or to make room in the
Reports window when the number of reports is near the limit.
Before you begin
Users that create the report or users with the Storage Administrator (Initial
Configuration) role can delete a configuration report.

Procedure

2. Select the report to delete.
3. Click Delete Reports.
4. Click Apply.
Collecting dump files using the Dump tool

Use the Dump tool to download dump files onto a Device Manager - Storage
Navigator computer. The downloaded dump files can be used to:
• Troubleshoot the system. Use the Dump tool to download dump files from
the SVP and give it to the HDS support personnel.
• Check system configuration. First, click File > Refresh All to update the
configuration information, and then use the Dump tool to download the
dump files.
There are two types of dump files:

• Normal Dump includes all information about the SVP and the minimum
information about the storage system. Select this when you have a less
serious problem such as incorrect display.
• Detail Dump includes all information about the SVP and the storage
system. Select this when Device Manager - Storage Navigator has a
serious problem (for example, Device Manager - Storage Navigator does
not start) or when you need to determine if the storage system has a
problem.
Before you begin

• Device Manager - Storage Navigator must be running.
• The configuration information must be refreshed by selecting File >
Refresh All in Device Manager - Storage Navigator.
• All other users (including the SVP user) must stop using the Dump tool.
• Stop all maintenance operations.
• Dump tools from other storage systems must not be used during the
process.
Note: If the error is in regards to Device Manager - Storage Navigator

starting up, collect information about the SVP using the Dump tool, without
Device Manager - Storage Navigator running.
Procedure

2. Open a Windows command prompt with administrator permissions.

3. Move the current directory to the folder where the tool is available. (For
example: <SVP-root-directory>\DKC200\mp\pc).
4. Specify the output destination of the dump file and execute
Dump_Detail.bat or Dump_Normal.bat.
For example, if you are storing the result of Dump_Detail.bat to C:

\Result_832000400001, enter the following:
C:\MAPP\wk\832000400001\DKC200\mp\pc>Dump_Detail.bat C:
\Result_832000400001
Note:
• A space is required between Dump_Detail.bat and C:\Result.
• The dump file name is hdcp.tgz. To manage dump files by
storage systems, we recommend adding a serial number to the
output folder name. For example, if the serial number is
832000400001, the folder name should be C:
\Result_832000400001.
• When the tool is being executed, is displayed in the command
prompt. When the execution is completed, is displayed.
"Executing..."
"zSv_AutoDump.exe is completed."

hdcp.tgz: This is the dump file. Give this file to the maintenance
personnel. If you save too many dump files in the SVP storage, space
might not be available. Therefore, move the dump file outside of SVP
storage.
zSv_AutoDump.log: This is the log file of the dump tool. If the dump file
is not output, give this log file to the maintenance personnel. If the dump
file is output, delete the log file.

A
Raidinf command reference (obtaining
configuration reports and tier relocation
logs)
This chapter describes the raidinf commands, symbols, and reports used in
□ raidinf command list and command description
□ raidinf -login
□ raidinf add report
□ raidinf delete report
□ raidinf download report
□ raidinf get reportinfo
□ raidinf add relocationlog
□ raidinf download relocationlog
□ raidinf delete relocationlog
□ raidinf get relocationloginfo
□ raidinf -logout
□ raidinf -h
Raidinf command reference (obtaining configuration reports and tier relocation logs) 249
raidinf command list and command description
The following table lists the raidinf commands and symbols.
Table 10 raidinf command list
Command Description
raidinf -login Log in to Device Manager - Storage Navigator.

raidinf add report Creates a report.
raidinf delete report Deletes a report.
raidinf download report Downloads a report.
raidinf get reportinfo Displays a list of reports.
raidinf add relocationlog Generates a tier relocation log file.
raidinf download relocationlog Downloads a tier relocation log file.
raidinf delete relocationlog Deletes a tier relocation log file.
raidinf get relocationloginfo Lists a tier relocation log file.
raidinf -logout Logs out of Device Manager - Storage Navigator.
raidinf -h Displays the raidinf command syntax.
Table 11 Conventions of the command format
Symbol Description
<> The item enclosed in this symbol is variable.

| Symbol is placed between multiple items to indicate "or".
Vertical bar For example:
-A | -B
Specifies -A or -B.
[] The enclosed item can be omitted. If some items are delimited
by the vertical bar, specify one item or omit all items.
Square brackets
For example:
[ -A ]
Specifies nothing or specifies -A.
[ -a | -b ]
Specifies nothing or specifies -a or -b.

{} The meaning differs, depending on the enclosed item.
• If items in curly brackets are delimited by vertical bars, one
Curly brackets of the items must be specified.
For example:
{-A | -B |-C }
Specifies -A, -B, or -C.
250 Raidinf command reference (obtaining configuration reports and tier relocation logs)
Symbol Description
• If curly brackets enclose items enclosed by square brackets,

at least one of the items must be specified.
For example:
{[ -A ][ -B ][ -C ]}
Specifies one or more items from -A, -B, or -C.
raidinf -login
Syntax
raidinf -login <user_name> <password> -servername {<hostname> |
<ipaddress>} [-port <port>] [-serial <serial>]
Options and parameters
Option Description
-login [<user_name> Executes a user authentication for Device Manager - Storage

<password>] Navigator. Specifies a user name and a password.
The user is logged out automatically three minutes (180 seconds)

after the last command is entered.
-servername {<hostname> | Specifies the host name or IP address of the SVP.
<ipaddress>}
[-port <port>] If you have changed the TCP port number for raidinf, specify the
new TCP port number. If omitted, TCP port number will perform by
specifying the initial value (5443). For operations after login (such
as report creation), the port number used for login will be used.
Therefore, specifying the port number will not be necessary for the
operations after login.
[-serial <serial>] If two or more DKCs are managed by the SVP, this is specified to
identify the system to execute the raidinf command. You cannot
omit this option if two or more DKCs are managed by the SVP.
In operations after the log in, such as report creation, use the
serial number specified when logging in. You do not need to specify
the serial number after the log in.
Examples
This example authenticates user01 using the password xxxxxx:
# raidinf -login user01 xxxxxx -servername svp.xxx.co.jp
This example authenticates user01 using the password xxxxxx with TCP port
number 6443:
# raidinf -login user01 xxxxxx -servername svp.xxx.co.jp -port
6443
This example authenticates user01 using the password xxxxxx with TCP port
number 6443 and serial number 430123:
# raidinf -login user01 xxxxxx -servername svp.xxx.co.jp -port
6443 -serial 430123
raidinf add report

The raidinf add report command creates a report.
If other users have created 20 reports, the logged in user cannot create a
report and will receive an error.
Syntax
raidinf add report -servername {<hostname> | <ipaddress>} [-
report <report_name>]
Option Description

<ipaddress>}
[-report <report_name>] Specifies a report name, up to 32 characters. All characters

exceeding 32 are ignored.
If the report name is omitted, the default report name YYMMDD-

CreateConfigurationReport is specified.
A hyphen cannot be specified at the beginning of the report name.
Examples
The following example creates a report with the default report name:
# raidinf add report -servername 10.213.74.121
ReportName UserName CreateTime

101009-CreateConfigurationReport user01 2010/10/09-12:43:10
The following example creates a report named 101009-

CreateConfigurationReport:
# raidinf add report -servername 10.213.74.121 -report 101009-
CreateConfigurationReport
ReportName UserName CreateTime

The following items are output:

• ReportName
The report name is displayed (up to 32 characters).
• UserName
The user name is displayed (up to 16 characters). If the user name
exceeds 16 characters, an ellipsis (...) is displayed.
• CreateTime
The time of creating a report is displayed (up to 19 characters).
raidinf delete report

The raidinf delete report command deletes a report.
If multiple reports of the same name exist, the command deletes the oldest
report. If the specified report does not exist, the command does nothing, and
terminates normally.
Reports created using Device Manager - Storage Navigator can also be

deleted.
Syntax
raidinf delete report -servername {<hostname> | <ipaddress>}
{-report<report_name> | -report_id
<report_id>} [-fill]
Option Description
-servername {<hostname> | Specifies the host name or the IP address of the SVP.
<ipaddress>}
{-report <report_name> | Specifies either -report or -report_id.

-report_id <report_id>} • -report specifies a report name, up to 32 characters. All
characters exceeding 32 are ignored.
• -report_id specifies a report ID in the report list. Because
each report has a unique ID, you can identify a specific report,
even if the report list contains multiple reports with the same
name.
[-fill] Deletes a report only if there are already 20 reports in the queue.
If there are fewer than 20 reports, the specified report is not
deleted.
Examples
The following example deletes the report named 101009-
# raidinf delete report -servername 10.213.74.121 -report 101009-
101009-CreateConfigurationReport is deleted from the SVP.
raidinf download report
The raidinf download report command downloads a report.
Reports created by Device Manager - Storage Navigator can also be

downloaded. The report in process of creation cannot be downloaded.
The name of the downloaded file is Report_report name.tgz. The files are
overwritten if reports of the same name has already existed.
Example: the name of the downloaded file when the report name is 110309-
Report_110309-CreateConfigurationReport.tgz
Syntax
raidinf download report -servername {<hostname> | <ipaddress>}
{-report <report_name> | -report_id <report_id>}
-targetfolder <folder>
Option Description
-servername {<hostname> | Specifies the host name or the IP address of the Web server (SVP).
<ipaddress>}
{-report <report_name> | Specifies either -report or -report_id.

-report_id <report_id>} • -report specifies a report name, up to 32 characters. All
If the special name LatestReport is specified as a report
name, the most recently created report is downloaded.
To download another report that has the same name as
LatestReport, specify the report ID for this report in -
report_id. If multiple reports have the same name, the most
recent report is replaced when a new report is downloaded.
• -report_id specifies a report ID in the report list. Because

each report has a unique ID, you can identify a specific report,
even if the report list contains multiple reports with the same
name.
-targetfolder <folder> Specifies a folder name to which a report is downloaded. The folder
whose name you specify must already exist, and you must have
write permissions to the folder.
Examples
The following example shows how to download the most recent report:
# raidinf download report -servername 10.213.74.121
-report LatestReport -targetfolder C:\tmp
Report_101009-CreateConfigurationReport.tgz is downloaded to C:\tmp.
The following example shows how to download the report named 101009-
# raidinf download report -servername 10.213.74.121
-report 101009-CreateConfigurationReport -targetfolder C:\tmp
Report_101009-CreateConfigurationReport.tgz is downloaded to C:\tmp.
raidinf get reportinfo

The raidinf get reportinfo command displays a list of reports.
Reports created using Device Manager - Storage Navigator are also

displayed. A report currently being created cannot be downloaded.
Syntax
raidinf get reportinfo -servername {<hostname> | <ipaddress>}
Option Description
-servername {<hostname> | Specifies the host name or IP address of the web server.
<ipaddress>}
Examples
The following example displays a list of reports:
# raidinf get reportinfo -servername 10.213.74.121
ReportName UserName CreateTime ReportID

33S3
33J3
2344
101006-CreateConfigurationReport configuration...
2010/10/06-15:30:42 4n1j

• ReportName
The report name is displayed. It can contain up to 32 characters.
• UserName
A user name is displayed. It can contain up to 16 characters. If the user
name exceeds 16 characters, an ellipsis (...) is displayed.
• CreateTime
The time of creating the report is displayed. It can contain up to 19
characters.
• ReportID
The report ID is displayed.
raidinf add relocationlog

The raidinf add relocationlog command is used to generate a tier
relocation log.
If another user has already generated a tier relocation log, an error occurs if
a tier relocation login user tries to obtain tier relocation logs. When this
happens, you must delete the existing tier relocation logs.
Syntax
raidinf add relocationlog -servername {<hostname> | <ipaddress>}
-logname <logname>>
Option Description

<ipaddress>}
[-logname <logname>>] Specifies the tier relocation log name, up to 32 characters. All
If the tier relocation log is omitted, the default name

YYMMDDXXXXXX-RelocationLog is specified.
A hyphen cannot be specified at the beginning of the tier relocation

log name.
Examples
The following example generates a tier relocation log with the default log
name:
# raidinf add relocationlog -servername 10.213.74.121
RelocationLogName CreateTime
160201-400001-RelocationLog 2016/02/01-12:43:10
The following example generates a tier relocation log named

160201-400001-RelocationLog:
# raidinf add relocationlog -servername 10.213.74.121 -report
160201-400001-RelocationLog
160201-400001-RelocationLog 2016/02/01-12:43:10

• RelocationLogName
The tier relocation log name is displayed.
• CreateTime
The time when the log was generated is displayed.
raidinf download relocationlog
The raidinf download relocationlog command is used to download a tier
relocation log.
A tier relocation log which is being generated cannot be downloaded. The

name of the downloaded file is tier_relocation_log_name.tgz. The log is
overwritten with the same name if the name already exists.
Example: If the name of the tier log relocation log is 160201-400001-

RelocationLog, the downloaded file name will be as follows:
Log_160201-400001-RelocationLog.tgz
Syntax
raidinf download relocationlog -servername {<hostname> |
<ipaddress>}
-logname <logname>> -targetfolder <folder>
Option Description

<ipaddress>}
If the tier relocation log is omitted, the default name

YYMMDDXXXXXX-RelocationLog is specified.
If you specify LatestLog as the tier relocation log name, the log
with the most recent date is downloaded.
-targetfolder <folder> Specifies a folder name to which a tier relocation log is
downloaded. The folder whose name you specify must already
exist, and you must have write permissions to the folder.
Examples
The example below shows how to download the log with the most recent
date. In the following example, Log_160201-400001-RelocationLog.tgz is
downloaded to C:\tmp:
# raidinf download relocationlog -servername 10.213.74.121 –
logname LatestLog -targetfolder C:\tmp
The example below shows how to download the tier relocation log by
specifying the tier relocation log name, 160201-400001-RelocationLog. In
the following example, Log_160201-400001-RelocationLog is downloaded to
C:\tmp:
# raidinf download relocationlog -servername 10.213.74.121 -
report
160201-400001-RelocationLog -targetfolder C:\tmp
raidinf delete relocationlog

The raidinf delete relocationlog command is used to delete a tier
relocation log.
Syntax
raidinf delete relocationlog -servername {<hostname> |
<ipaddress>}
-logname <logname>>
Option Description

<ipaddress>}
If you specify LatestLog as the tier relocation log name, the log
with the most recent date is deleted.
Examples
The following example deletes the tier relocation log with the most recent
date:
# raidinf delete relocationlog -servername 10.213.74.121 –
logname LatestLog
The example below shows how to delete the tier relocation log by specifying
the tier relocation log name, 160201-400001-RelocationLog. In the
following example, 160201-400001-RelocationLog is deleted in the SVP:
# raidinf delete relocationlog -servername 10.213.74.121 –report
raidinf get relocationloginfo

The raidinf get relocationloginfo command is used to list tier relocation
logs. The tier relocation logs which are being generated are not listed.
Syntax
raidinf delete relocationlog -servername {<hostname> |
<ipaddress>}
Option Description

<ipaddress>}
Examples
The example below shows how to generate a tier relocation log by specifying
the tier relocation log name, 160201-400001-RelocationLog.
# raidinf add relocationlog -servername 10.213.74.121 -report
160201-400001-RelocationLog 2016/02/01-12:43:10

• RelocationLogName
The tier relocation log name is displayed.
• CreateTime
The time when the log was generated is displayed.
The example below shows the script for checking if the tier relocation log was
created by using the raidinf get relocationloginfo command. In this
example, if the creation of the tier relocation log was completed successfully,
the tier relocation log is downloaded.
REM
REM Create Completed Relocation Log
Script(CreateCompletedRelocationLog.bat)
REM
SET SERVER= <hostname-or-IP-address-of-SVP>
SET LOG_NAME=DailyRelocationLog
raidinf get relocationloginfo -servername %SERVER% | find
"%LOG_NAME%"
>NUL
if not ERRORLEVEL 1 raidinf download relocationlog -servername
%SERVER% -targetfolder C:\tmp -logname "%LOG_NAME%"
raidinf -logout
The raidinf -logout command is used for logging out from Device Manager
- Storage Navigator.
Syntax
raidinf -logout -servername {<hostname> | <ipaddress>}
Option Description
-logout Log out from Device Manager - Storage Navigator.
-servername {<hostname> | Specifies the host name or the IP address of the SVP.
<ipaddress>}
Example
# raidinf -logout -servername mapp.xxx.co.jp
raidinf -h
The raidinf -h command is used to display the syntax..
Syntax
raidinf -h
Option Description
-h Displays the raidinf help.
B
Storage configuration reports
This chapter describes the configuration reports you can generate in Device
Manager - Storage Navigator. They are grouped in this appendix according to
the way they display: in tables, graphs, or CSV files.
To create, download, and delete reports, see Viewing a Device Manager -

Storage Navigator report on page 244.
□ Reports in table view
□ Reports in graphical view
□ CSV files
Storage configuration reports 261

Reports in table view
Some Device Manager - Storage Navigator reports appear in table format.
The following figure provides examples of reports in table format. The
icons are displayed before the names of the reports in table view. If the icons
are not displayed correctly, update the window.
• To sort data in table reports, click any column header.

• While a table is reading a large amount of data, the table columns cannot
be manipulated, sorted, or resized. However, you can view previously
displayed items, select rows, and scroll.
CHAP Users report

The following figure shows an example of a CHAP Users report. The table
following the figure describes the items in the report.
262 Storage configuration reports

Item Description
Port Location Name of the port
User Name Name of the CHAP user for authentication
iSCSI Target Alias Alias of the iSCSI target
iSCSI Target Name Name of the iSCSI target
Disk Boards report

The following figure shows an example of a Disk Boards report. The table
Item Description
DKB Location of the disk board.

• "External" is displayed when the storage system has an external storage system.
• "External (FICON DM)" is displayed when the storage system has volumes for
FICON DM.
Number of PGs The number of the parity groups that the disk board controls.
• If "DKB" is "External", this item indicates the number of parity groups mapped to
external volumes.
• If "DKB" is "External (FICON DM)", this item indicates the number of parity groups
mapped to volumes for FICON DM.
Number of LDEVs (Total) The number of the logical volumes belonging to the parity groups that the disk board
controls.

Item Description
Number of LDEVs The number of the logical volumes that are inaccessible from the host and belong to
(Unallocated) the parity groups controlled by the disk board.
Total LDEV Capacity (MB) Total capacity of the logical volumes belonging to the parity groups that the disk board
controls.
Unallocated LDEV Capacity Total capacity of the logical volumes that are inaccessible from the host and belong to
(MB) the parity groups controlled by the disk board.
Host Groups / iSCSI Targets report

The following figure shows an example of a Host Groups / iSCSI Targets
report. The table following the figure describes the items in the report.
Item Description
Type Type of the host group
Host Group Name / iSCSI Name of the host group / alias of the iSCSI target
Target Alias
Host Group ID / iSCSI Target Number of the host group / ID of the iSCSI target
ID
Resource Group Name Resource Group Name where the host group belongs
Resource Group ID Resource Group ID where the host group belongs
Number of LUNs The number of LU paths defined to the host group
Number of LDEVs The number of logical volumes that are accessible from the hosts in the host group
Number of PGs The number of parity groups with logical volumes that are accessible from the hosts in
the host group
Number of DKBs The number of disk boards controlling the parity groups where the logical volumes
that are accessible from the hosts in the host group belong

Item Description
Total LDEV Capacity (MB) Total capacity of the logical volumes accessible from the hosts in the host group. This
is the total capacity of LDEVs referred to in "Number of LDEVs".
Port Security Security of the port
Authentication : Method iSCSI target method authentication settings

• CHAP
• None
• Comply with Host Setting
Authentication : Mutual Enable or disable the iSCSI target mutual CHAP

CHAP • Enabled
• Disabled
Authentication : User Name Authenticated iSCSI target user name
Authentication : Number of The number of authenticated users registered in the iSCSI target
Users
Host Mode Host mode of the host group
Host Mode Option Host mode option of the host group. Host mode options are separated by semicolons
(;) when more than one option is specified.
Number of Hosts The number of the hosts in the host group.
Hosts report
The following figure shows an example of a hosts report. The table following
the figure describes the items in the report. When a host is registered to
more than one port, more than one record shows information about the same
host.
Item Description
Type Port type
Port Internal WWN Port WWN
Port Security Port security setting

Item Description
Host Group Name / iSCSI Name of the host group / alias of the iSCSI target
Target Alias
Host Mode Option Host group host mode option. When more than one host mode option is specified,
they are separated by semicolons (;)
Host Name Name of the host that can access the LU path through the port
HBA WWN / iSCSI Name Host WWN / host iSCSI name. The name is in 16-digit hex format.
Logical Devices report

The following figure shows an example of a logical volumes report. The table
Item Description
LDEV ID The logical volume number

LDEV Name The logical volume name
Capacity (MB) Capacity of the logical volume
Emulation Type Emulation type of the logical volume
Resource Group Name Resource group name where LDEV belongs
Resource Group ID Resource group ID where LDEV belongs
PG The parity group number.
• If the number starts with "E" (for example, E1-1), the parity group contains
external volumes.
• If the number starts with "M" (for example, M1-1), the parity group contains
FICON DM volumes.
A hyphen displays for Dynamic Provisioning or Thin Image V-VOLs.
RAID Level RAID level of the parity group where the logical volume belongs1
Drive Type/RPM Drive type and round-per-minute (RPM) of the drive of the parity group where the
logical volume belongs.

Item Description
A hyphen (-) is displayed as RPM when the drive is SSD.1

Drive Type-Code Type code of the drive of the parity group where the logical volume belongs1
Drive Capacity Capacity of the drive of the parity group where the logical volume belongs.1
PG Members List of the drive locations of the parity group where the logical volume belongs1
Allocated Information about whether the host can access the logical volume.
For mainframe volumes and multi-platform volumes, "Y" is displayed unless the
volumes are in the reserved status.
SSID SSID of the logical volume
CVS Information about whether the logical volume is a customized volume
OCS Oracle checksum
Attribute The attribute of the logical volume
Provisioning Type Provisioning type of the logical volume
Pool Name • For V-VOLs of Dynamic Provisioning, the name of the pool related to the logical
volume is displayed1
• If the logical volume attribute is Pool, the name of the pool where the logical
volume belongs is displayed
• When neither of the above are displayed, the pool name is blank
Pool ID The ID of the pool indicated by "Pool Name" A hyphen (-) displays for volumes other
than pool-VOLs or V-VOLs
Current MPU The number of the MP unit that currently controls the logical volume
Setting MPU The number of the MP unit that you specified to control the logical volume
Command Device: Security Indicates whether Security is specified as the attribute for the command device. A
hyphen (-) displays when "Attribute" is not "CMDDEV".
Command Device: Indicates whether User Authentication is specified as the attribute for the command
device. A hyphen (-) displays when "Attribute" is not "CMDDEV".
User Authentication
Command Device: Indicates whether Device Group Definition is specified as the attribute for the
command device. A hyphen (-) displays when "Attribute" is not "CMDDEV".
Device Group Definition
Encryption Indicates whether the parity group to which the LDEV belongs is encrypted.
• For internal volumes: Enabled (encrypted) or Disabled (not encrypted)
• For external volumes: blank
T10 PI Indicates the T10 PI attribute set for the LDEV.
• Enabled
• Disabled
• Blank if the emulation type is not OPEN-V
ALUA Mode Indicates whether the ALUA mode is enabled:
• Enabled: ALUA mode is enabled.
• Disabled: ALUA mode is disabled.
Notes:
1. A hyphen (-) displays if the LDEV is an external volume.

LUNs report
The following figure shows an example of an LU path definitions report. A
record is created for each LU path. The table following the figure describes
the items in the report.
Item Description

HBA WWN / iSCSI Name Port WWN or name of the iSCSI (16 digits in hexadecimal)
Port Security Name of the type of security of the port
Host Group Name / iSCSI Name of the host group or alias of the iSCSI target
Target Alias
Host Mode Option Host mode option of the host group. Host mode options are separated by semicolons
(;) when more than one option is specified.
LUN Logical unit number
LDEV ID Logical volume number
Emulation Type Emulation type of the logical volume
Capacity (MB) Capacity of the logical volume
MP Units report
The following figure shows an example of an MP units report. The table

Item Description
MP Unit ID MP unit ID
Auto Assignment Auto assignment attribute for the MP unit
Number of Resources (LDEV) Number of LDEVs that the MP unit controls
Number of Resources Number of journals that the MP unit controls
(Journal)
Number of Resources Number of external volumes that the MP unit controls (includes volumes for FICON
(External Volume) DM)
Number of Resources (Total) The total number of resources that the MP unit controls. It is the total of Number of
Resources (LDEV), Number of Resources (Journal), and Number of Resources
(External Volume).
MP Unit Details report

The following figure shows an example of an MP unit details report. The table

Item Description
MP Unit ID MP unit ID
Auto Assignment Auto assignment attribute for the MP unit
Resource ID ID of this resource that the MP unit controls
Resource Name The name of the resource that the MP unit controls. If "Type" is LDEV, the LDEV name
that is set is displayed. A hyphen (-) displays for journal volumes or external volumes.
Type The type of the resource that the MP unit controls
Parity Groups report

The following figure shows an example of a parity groups report. The table
Item Description
PG Parity group number

external volumes (Hitachi Universal Volume Manager User Guide).
• If the number starts with "M" (for example, M1-1), the parity group contains
volumes for FICON DM.
DKB Name of the disk board that controls the parity group1
RAID Level RAID level of the parity group1
Resource Group Name Name of the resource group in which the parity group belongs
Resource Group ID ID for the resource group in which the parity group belongs
Emulation Type Emulation type of the parity group
Number of LDEVs (Total) The number of the logical volumes in the parity group
Number of LDEVs The number of the logical volumes in the parity group that the host cannot access
(Unallocated)
Total LDEV Capacity (MB) Capacity of the logical volumes in the parity group
Unallocated LDEV Capacity Capacity of the logical volumes in the parity group that the host cannot access
(MB)

Item Description
Drive Type-Code The type code of the drive in the parity group.
• The type code of the first drive in the parity group.
• If the parity group contains external volumes, the drive type code displays the
vendor, the model, and the serial number of the storage system.
• Separated by semicolons (;) if multiple drive types are set.
Drive Type/RPM Drive type and revolutions-per-minute (RPM) of the drive in the parity group1
A hyphen (-) is displayed instead of the RPM when the drive is an SSD.
Drive Capacity Capacity of the drive in the parity group1
RAID Concatenation #0 The number indicating a parity group #0 connected to this parity group1,2
RAID Concatenation #1 The number indicating a parity group #1 connected to this parity group1,2
RAID Concatenation #2 The number indicating a parity group #1,2 connected to this parity group1,2
Encryption Indicates whether the parity group is encrypted.
• For external volumes: A hyphen (-) is displayed
Accelerated Compression Accelerated compression of the parity group
• If accelerated compression is supported, Enabled or Disabled is displayed.
• If accelerated compression is not supported, a hyphen (-) is displayed.
Notes:
1. A hyphen is displayed if the parity group contains external volumes.
2. A hyphen is displayed if the parity group is not connected with another parity group or if the parity group
contains external volumes including volumes for FICON DM.
Physical Devices report

The following figure shows an example of part of a Physical Devices report.
The actual report includes more columns of information. A record is created
for each physical device. The table following the figure describes the items in
the report.

Item Description
Location Name of physical devices
CR# C# and R# to define physical devices

Output as "XX/YY"
PG Parity group of physical devices
Emulation Type Parity group of physical devices
Drive type Drive type of physical devices

• SAS
• SSD
RPM Revolutions-per-minute (RPM) in the parity group

• 8000
• 15000
A hyphen (-) is displayed instead of the RPM when the drive type is an SSD.
Drive Type-Code Type code of the drive in the parity group.

Output example: SLR5B- M200SS;SFB5A-M200SS; (if multiple drive types are set)
Drive Size Drive size (inches)

• 2.5
• 3.5
Drive Capacity Physical drive capacity (GB or TB)
Drive Version Firmware version of the drive
DKB1 Name of the DKB1 which controls the physical devices
DKB2 Name of the DKB2 which controls the physical devices
Serial Number# Serial product number of the physical devices

• yy: year (last 2 digits)
• mm: month (2 digits)
• xxxxxxxx: product number of the physical devices
RAID Level RAID level of the physical devices

• RAID1(2D+2D)
• RAID5(7D+1P)
• RAID6(6D+2P)
• RAID6(14D+2P)
RAID Concatenation#0 Number indicating a parity group #0 connected to this parity group
Output example: 2-1, 3-1, 4-1
Resource Group Name Name of resource group to which the parity group of physical devices belong
Resource Group ID ID (0 to 1023 binary)
Encryption Enable or disable status of the parity group to which the physical devices belong
• Enabled: Encryption is enabled.
• Disabled: Encryption is disabled.

Ports report
The following figure shows an example of part of a ports report. The actual
report includes several more columns of information. The table following the
figure describes the items in the report.
Item Description
CHB Name of the channel board
Type Package type of the channel board
Port Location Name of the port on the channel board
Port Attribute Attribute of the port
TCP Port Number Port number to use for a socket (decimal)
Internal WWN / Internal WWN / iSCSI name of the port

iSCSI Name
Fabric One of the Fibre topology settings indicating the setting status of the Fabric switch
Connection Type One of the Fibre topology settings

• Point to Point
• FC-AL
IPv4 : IP Address IPv4 address of the port
Output example: 192.168.0.100
IPv4 : Subnet Mask IPv4 subnet mask of the port
IPv4 : Default Gateway IPv4 default gateway of the port
IPv6 : Mode IPv6 settings of the port

• Enabled
• Disabled
IPv6 : Link Local Address IPv6 link local address of the port (16-digit hexadecimal)
IPv6 : Global Address IPv6 global address of the port.
Output example: xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx (hexadecimal)

Item Description
IPv6 : Global Address 2 IPv6 global address 2 of the port.
Output example: xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx (hexadecimal)
IPv6 : Assigned Default Assigned IPv6 default gateway

Gateway
Selective ACK Selective ACK mode

• Enabled
• Disabled
Ethernet MTU Size (Byte) MTU settings (binary)

• 1,500
Keep Alive Timer iSCSI keep alive timer (0 to 64,800) (sec)
VLAN : Tagging Mode Tagging mode of VLAN

• Enabled
• Disabled
VLAN : ID Number of VLAN set to the port (1 to 4,094)
CHAP User Name User name for the CHAP authentication
iSNS Server : Mode iSNS mode settings

• ON
• OFF
iSNS Server : IP Address IP address of the iSNS server (30 to 65,535)
iSNS Server : TCP Port Number of the TCP port used in iSNS (binary)
Number
Address (Loop ID) Fibre port address and Loop ID of the port
Port Security Security of the port

• Enabled
• Disabled
Speed Data transfer speed of the port
SFP Data Transfer Rate Maximum transfer rate of SFP which the mounted package supports.
• 8G
• 10G
• 16G
• 32G
• Blank if the Package Type is 10iSCSI2c (CHB) or NAS module (CHB).
T10 PI Mode Indicates whether the T10 PI mode can be applied to the port.
• Enabled
• Disabled
• Blank if the port type is a Fibre port other than 16FC2(CHB). For iSCSI ports, a
hyphen (-) is displayed.
Resource Group Name Name of the resource group to which the port belongs
Resource Group ID ID for the resource group to which the port belongs (0 to 1023)
Number of Hosts The number of the hosts registered to the port
Number of LUNs The number of the LU paths defined to the port
Number of LDEVs The number of the logical volumes that can be accessed through the port

Item Description
Number of PGs The number of the parity groups having the logical volumes that can be accessed
through the port
Number of DKBs The number of the disk boards controlling the parity group that contains the logical
volumes that can be accessed through the port
Power Consumption report

The following figure shows an example of a power consumption report. A
record is created every two hours for each power consumption and
temperature monitoring data. The table following the figure describes the
items in the report.
No records are created during a system power failure or if the breakers are
turned off. If the system is in maintenance mode or the SVP is rebooted, up
to two hours of records could be lost.
If a failure occurs in the storage system, the correct information might not be
output.
Item Description
Date and Time Date and time when power consumption and
temperature were recorded for the two-hour
period
Power Consumption Average (W) Average of the power consumption
Power Consumption Maximum (W) Maximum of the power consumption
Power Consumption Minimum (W) Minimum of the power consumption
TEMP:DKC0-Cluster1 Average (degrees C) Average temperature of DKC0:CL1
TEMP:DKC0-Cluster1 Maximum (degrees C) Maximum temperature of DKC0:CL1

Item Description
TEMP:DKC0-Cluster1 Minimum (degrees C) Minimum temperature of DKC0:CL1

TEMP:DKC0-Cluster2 Average (degrees C) Average temperature of DKC0:CL2
TEMP:DKC0-Cluster2 Maximum (degrees C) Maximum temperature of DKC0:CL2
TEMP:DKC0-Cluster2 Minimum (degrees C) Minimum temperature of DKC0:CL2
Table 12 Power Consumption report

Item Description
Date and Time Date and time when temperature was recorded
TEMP:DB00-DBPS00-1 Average (Temperature in Average temperature, maximum temperature,
degrees C) and minimum temperature of the DB for the
two-hour period. Outputs in the following
TEMP:DB00-DBPS00-1 Maximum (Temperature format:
in degrees C),
TEMP:DB XX -DBPS XX -CL Average, Maximum,
TEMP:DB00-DBPS00-1 Minimum (Temperature or Minimum (Temperature in degrees Celsius)
in degrees C), • XX: DB number
TEMP:DB00-DBPS00-2 Average (Temperature in 00 to 07 (VSP G200)
degrees C),
00 to 23 (VSP G400, G600, VSP F400, F600)
TEMP:DB00-DBPS00-2 Maximum (Temperature
in degrees C), 00 to 47 (VSP G800 or VSP F800)
• CL: Cluster number (1 or 2)
TEMP:DB00-DBPS00-2 Minimum (Temperature
in degrees C)
Spare Drives report

The following figure shows an example of a spare drives report. The table

Item Description
Drive Capacity Capacity of the spare drive

Drive Type-Code Type code of the spare drive
Location Location of the spare drive
SSD Endurance report

The following figure shows an example of an SSD endurance report. The
table following the figure describes the items in the report.

Item Description
Drive Type-Code Type code of the SSD

Drive Capacity Capacity of the SSD
Location Location of the SSD
Used Endurance Indicator Used endurance of the SSD
(%)
Storage System Summary report

The following figure shows an example of part of a Storage System Summary
report. The actual report includes several more rows of information. The table

Figure 1 Storage System Summary report (VSP G200)

Figure 3 Storage System Summary report (VSP G400, VSP G600)
Figure 4 Storage System Summary report (VSP G400, VSP G600)


Item Description
Storage System Type Type of the storage system

Serial Number Serial number of the storage system
IP Address IP address of the SVP
Software Versions Version of the following programs.
• Main
• DKB
• ROM BOOT
• RAM BOOT
• Expander
• Config
• CFM
• HDD
• Printout Tool
• CHB (iSCSI)
• CHB (FC16G)
• CHB (FC32G)
• GUM
• Unified Hypervisor
• NASFWINST
• NASFW
Number of CUs The number of control units in the storage system
Shared Memory Size (GB) Capacity of shared memory
Includes the cache management information (directory)

Cache Size (GB) Capacity of the cache
Number of DKBs The number of disk boards on the module
System Options List of the system options specified for the storage system
Drive Capacity (TB) Total capacity of drives in the storage system except for external volumes
Spare Drive Capacity (TB) Total capacity of the spare drives in the storage system
Free Drive Capacity (GB) Total capacity of the free drives in the storage system
Volume Capacity (GB) 1 List of the capacity of the open volumes
Number of LDEVs1 List of the numbers of the volumes in the following status.
• Allocated
• Unallocated
• Reserved
• V-VOL
Notes:
1. You cannot sort the list.
Reports in graphical view

The reports described in this topic display as graphics. icons are displayed
before the names of reports in graphical view. If the icons or graphics are not
displayed properly, update the window.

Cache Memories report
This report shows cache memory data, including shared memory, main
board, and DIMM capacity. The total cache memory is displayed for each
module.
Figure 7 Cache Memories report (VSP G200)

Figure 8 Cache Memories report (VSP G400, G600, VSP F400, F600)

Figure 9 Cache Memories report (VSP G800, VSP F800)
Total capacity of the cache memory and shared memory is displayed
separately for each module.
Channel Boards report

This report shows the channel boards and the ports and types of channel
boards for each channel board. The keys show which channel boards are
installed (green keys) and which channel boards are not installed (gray
keys).
If a PCIe channel board installed in the DKC is connected to a channel board

box, the status of the channel board box is displayed.
If a NAS module is mounted on a channel board, the status of the module is

displayed.

Figure 10 Channel Boards (VSP G200)
Figure 11 Channel Boards report (VSP G400, G600, VSP F400, F600)

Figure 12 Channel Boards Report (when a NAS module is mounted)
Figure 13 Channel Boards report (VSP G800, VSP F800)

Figure 14 Channel Boards report (when a channel board box is
connected)
Figure 15 Channel Boards report (when a NAS module is mounted)

Physical View report
This report shows disk controller chassis and drive boxes, and includes
channel boards, disk boards, data drives, spare drives, and free drives.
It also shows the storage system type, serial number, and software version.
You can check the legend for disk units, such as SAS, SSD, Spare, Free, or
Not Installed.
If a PCIe channel board installed in the DKC is connected to a channel board

box, the status of the channel board box is displayed.

Figure 16 Physical View report (VSP G200)

Figure 17 Physical View report (VSP G400, G600, VSP F400, F600)

Figure 18 Physical View report (when a NAS module is mounted)

Figure 19 Physical View report (VSP G800, VSP F800)

Figure 20 Physical View report (when a channel board box is connected)

Figure 21 Physical View report (when a NAS module is mounted)
CSV files
This topic describes reports that are saved in CSV format.
AllConf.csv
This is the concatenated file of all the csv files.

CacheInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about the cache memory on the controller
board. A record is created for each cache memory.
Table 13 CacheInfo.csv file (Title: <<Cache>>)
Item Content
Location Name of the cache controller board on which the memory is installed
CMG#0 Size (GB) Cache memory capacity in the controller board per CMG (16/32/64/128/ blank). The
number of CMG differs by model and the displayed items are different.
CMG#1 Size (GB) • VSP G200: Only CMG#0 Size displays
• VSP G400, G600, G800 or VSP F400, F600, F800: CMG#0 Size and CMG#1 Size
display
Depending on the installed number of the cache memory (DIMM), one of the CMG
capacities might be blank for VSP G400, G600, G800 or VSP F400, F600, F800.
Cache Size (GB) Total cache memory capacity on the controller board (0 to 256)
SM Size (MB) The capacity that cannot be used as data cache memory in the total cache memory
capacity inside of the controller board.
The capacity per cluster is displayed.
Includes the shared memory capacity, cache directory capacity, and the fixed capacity.
Fixed capacity is the cache memory capacity that is used for controlling the storage
system with the controller board.
• VSP G200: (0 to 18944)

• VSP G400, G600 or VSP F400, F600: (0 to 37888)
• VSP G800 or VSP F800: (0 to 47744)
CFM#0 Type Type of CFM in the cluster (BM 10/BM 20/BM 30/blank). The number of CFM differs by
model and the number of the displayed items are different.
CFM#1 Type • VSP G200: CFM#0 type only
• VSP G400, G600, G800 or VSP F400, F600, F800: CFM #0 Type or CFM#1 Type
Depending on the installed CFM number, one of the CFM types might be displayed as
blank.
Information about the NAS module is not displayed in this CSV file.
Unified Hypervisor Cache The cache memory capacity (blank/16/32/64) (Unit: GB) assigned for Unified
Size (GB) Hypervisor usage within the total cache memory capacity in controller board.
• Blank if Unified Mode of DkcInfo.csv is Off.
This item is not displayed for VSP G200.
ChapUserInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about the iSCSI CHAP authenticated user
registered to the port in the channel board. A record is created for each
target related to the CHAP authenticated user. Information about the NAS
module is not displayed in this CSV file.

Table 14 ChapUserInfo.csv file Title: <<CHAP User Information>>)
Item Content
Port Port name

User Name Name of the CHAP authenticated user1
iSCSI Target ID2 The iSCSI number of the target (00 to fe, hexadecimal)
Notes:
1. If the character string contains a comma, the comma is converted to a tab.
2. For the target information, see the record information with the same iSCSI target ID in IscsiTargetInfo.csv.
ChaStatus.csv
This CSV file contains information about the status of each channel board
(CHB). A record is created for each CHB.
Table 15 ChaStatus.csv file (Title: <<CHB Status>>)
Item Content
CHB Location CHB name (CHB-1A/1B/1C/1D or CHB-2A/2B/2C/2D if Package Type is NAS module)
PCB Status Status of this CHB1 (Blank if CHB location is CHB-1A/1B/1C/1D or CHB-2A/2B/2C/2D
in NAS module)
Port#00, #01, …, #03 Status of ports on this CHB (Blank if CHB location is CHB-1A/1B/1C/1D or
CHB-2A/2B/2C/2D in NAS module)
Notes:
1. 1 Normal, 0: Abnormal
DeviceEquipInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about equipment and devices that are part
of the storage system, including power supplies and batteries for DKC, DB,
and CHBB. A record is created for each device.
Table 16 DeviceEquipInfo.csv file (Title: <<Device Equipment

Information>>)
Item Content
Device Location Device location name. For example:

• For DKCPS: DKCPS-00
• For DKUPS: DKUPS000-1
• For Battery: BATTERY-1BA
• For SVP: SVP-BASIC
Equip Status Equipment status of the device:
• Equipped
• Not Equipped
Status Status of the device:
• Normal
• Abnormal

Item Content
• Blank if "Equip Status" is Not Equipped
DkaInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about disk boards (DKBs). A record is
created for each DKB.
Table 17 DkaInfo.csv file (Title: <<DKB Information>>)
Item Content
DKB Location DKB name

Package Type DKB type
Output example:
• Unecryption DKB (2Port)
• Encryption EDKB (2Port)
DkaStatus.csv
This CSV file contains information about the status of disk boards (DKBs). A
record is created for each DKB.
Table 18 DkaStatus.csv file (Title: <<DKB Status>>)
Item Content
DKB Location DKB name

PCB Status Status of this DKB1
BECON#00 Status of BECON1
BEPORT#0000 to #0001 Status of BEPORT on this DKB1
Items are output in the format BEPORT#XXYY, where:

• XX: BE controller number (2-digit hexadecimal)
• YY: BE port number (2-digit hexadecimal)
Notes:
1. 1: Normal, 0: Abnormal
DkcInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about the DKC. A record is created for each
module.
When Module #1 is not installed, the record for Module #1 is not created.
Table 19 DkcInfo.csv file (Title: <<DKC Information>>)
Item Content
Storage System Type Storage system type.

Item Content
Output example:
• G2001
• VSP G400, G600 and VSP F400, F6002
• VSP G800 and VSP F8003
Serial Number # Serial product number (decimal, from 400001 to 499999)
IP Address IP address
Output example: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (decimal, 0 to 255)

Subnet Mask Subnet mask
Output example: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (decimal, 0 to 255)

Number of CUs Number of CUs (decimal, 0 to 64)
Number of DKBs Number of DKBs (decimal, 0 to 8)
Zero (0) is sometimes displayed if an HDD is not installed.

Configuration Type Configuration type
Output example: PCM

Model Storage system model: S, M, or H
Unified Mode Unified Mode of the storage system.
• On: Operating with Unified Mode
• Off: Not operating with Unified Mode
This item is not displayed for VSP G200.

Notes:
• To determine if the model type is VSP G200, see PpInfo.csv on page 326.
○ VSP G200: Install is Enabled for Model upgrade license
• To determine whether the model type is VSP G400, VSP F400, VSP G600, or VSP F600, see PpInfo.csv on
page 326.
○ VSP G400: Install is Disabled for both Model upgrade license and All Flash Array
○ VSP F400: Install is Disabled for Model upgrade license and Install is Enabled for All Flash Array
○ VSP G600: Install is Enabled for Model upgrade license and Install is Disabled for All Flash Array
○ VSP F600: Install is Enabled for both Model upgrade license and All Flash Array
• To determine whether the model type is VSP G800 or VSP F800, see PpInfo.csv on page 326.
○ VSP G800: Install is Disabled for All Flash Array
○ VSP F800: Install is Enabled for All Flash Array
DkuTempAveInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about DB temperature for every two hours.
A record is DB temperature information obtained from the environment
monitor. A record output to the first line shows the latest temperature
information. Because DB temperature information is measured by DBPS,
items are displayed in this unit*.
DkuTempAveInfo.csv shows the average temperature as DB temperature

data. The total number of items depends on the model (VSP G200: 17, VSP
G400/VSP G600/VSP F400/VSP F600: 49, VSP G800/VSP F800: 97).
The DB temperature data displayed in DkuTempAveInfo.csv (average

temperature only), DkuTempMaxInfo.csv (maximum temperature only), and

DkuTempMinInfo.csv (minimum temperature only) is the same value as the
DB temperature data for DkuTempInfo.csv.
If the system is in maintenance mode or the SVP is rebooted, the data that is
output every two hours might not contain data for the period. If a failure
occurs in the storage system, the correct information might not be output.
Table 20 DkuTempAveInfo.csv file (Title: <<DB temperature average

Information>>)
Item Description
Date Year, month, and date when temperature data

was acquired in the format:
YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss
DB00 DBPS001 Average temperature (°C) for the two-hour
period of DB00 DBPS001
Temperature average
Temperature average
For VSP G200, item shows up to DB07 DBPS072.
For VSP G400, VSP G600, VSP F400, VSP F600,

item shows up to DB23 DBPS232.
Note: An item name is displayed as DBxx DBPSxxy. The names are listed in
ascending order of the DB number. See DkuTempInfo.csv on page 300 for
locations and values for DBxx and DBPSxxy.
DkuTempInfo.csv
DkuTempInfo.csv shows the average temperature, maximum temperature,

and minimum temperature as DB temperature data. The total number of
items depends on the model (VSP G200: 49, VSP G400/ VSP G600/VSP
F400/VSP F600: 145, VSP G800, VSP F800: 289).


Table 21 DkuTempInfo.csv file (Title: <<DB temperature Information>>)
Item Description

YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss
Temperature average
DB00 DBPS001 Maximum temperature (°C) for the two-hour
Temperature maximum value
DB00 DBPS001 Minimum temperature (°C) for the two-hour
Temperature minimum value
Temperature average



*Note: An item name is displayed as DBxx DBPSxxy. The names are listed in
ascending order of the DB number.
The following tables list DBxx and DBPSxxy: xx values, where xx is a value
from 00 to 07 (VSP G200), 00 to 23 (VSP G400, G600, VSP F400, VSP F600),
or 00 to 47 (VSP G800, VSP F800).
DB # 0 1 2 3 4 5
xx 00 01 02 03 04 04
DBxx DB00 DB01 DB02 DB03 DB04 DB05
DBxxy DBPS00y DBPS01y DBPS02y DBPS03y DBPS04y DBPS05y

DB # 42 43 44 45 46 47
xx 42 43 44 45 46 47
DBxx DB42 DB43 DB44 DB45 DB46 DB47
DBxxy DBPS42y DBPS43y DBPS44y DBPS45y DBPS46y DBPS47y
The following table lists the DBPSxxy: y values (where DB# is 0 and xx is 00)
DB# 0
y 1 2
DBPSxxy: y DBPS001 DBPS002
DkuTempMaxInfo.csv
DkuTempMaxInfo.csv shows the maximum temperature as DB temperature


Table 22 DkuTempMaxInfo.csv file (Title: <<DB temperature maximum

value Information>>)
Item Description

YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss

Item Description

Note: An item name is displayed as DBxx DBPSxxy. The names are listed in
ascending order of the DB number. See DkuTempInfo.csv on page 300 for
locations and values for DBxx and DBPSxxy.
DkuTempMinInfo.csv
DkuTempMinInfo.csv shows the average temperature as DB temperature


Table 24 DkuTempMinInfo.csv file (Title: <<DB temperature minimum

value Information>>)
Item Description

YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss


ELunInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about external volumes. Information about
one external volume is output to multiple records according to the number of
prioritized paths between the local and the external storage systems.
For details of external volumes, see Hitachi Universal Volume Manager User
Guide. Information about the NAS module is not displayed in this CSV file.
Table 25 ELunInfo.csv file (Title: <<External LUN Information>>)
Item Content
VDEV# Virtual device number to which the external volume is mapped

Characteristic1 Identification number of the external volume1
Characteristic2 Extended information for identifying the external volume
Device Product name reported to the host by the external volume1
Capacity(blocks) Capacity of the external volume (in blocks)
Cache Mode Indicates whether the write data from the host to the external storage system is
reflected synchronously or asynchronously
• Enabled: Asynchronously
• Disabled: Synchronously
ECC Group Number of parity group to which the external volume is mapped.
If the number starts with "E" (for example, E1-1), the parity group contains external
volumes.
Range of values: E1-1 to E16384-4096

Current MPU Number and name of a current MP unit controlling the parity group to which the
external volume is mapped
• MPU-10
• MPU-11
• MPU-20
• MPU-21
Setting MPU Number and name of an MP unit configured to control the external volume indicated
by ECC Group
• MPU-10
• MPU-11
• MPU-20
• MPU-21
Vendor Vendor name of the external storage system
Product Name Product name of the external storage system
Serial Number# Serial product number of the external storage system
Path Mode Mode which indicates how the paths between local and external storage systems
operate
• Multi
• Single
• ALUA
Port Name of a local port from which the external path is connected to the external storage
system

Item Content
WWN Port identifier number of the external storage system
Blank if "Package Type" is iSCSI

LUN LU number set for the external volume.
Priority Priority of the paths between the storage systems to be used for connection with the
external volume.
"1" indicates the path of the highest priority.

Status Status of the path between storage systems.
• Normal
• Blocked
IO TOV I/O timeout value for the external volume
Range of values: 5 to 240

QDepth The number of Read/Write commands that can be issued to the external volume at a
time

Resource Group ID (ECC Resource group ID for the parity group that is mapping external volumes (in decimal
Group) format)

Resource Group Name (ECC Resource group name of the parity group that is mapping external volumes
Group)
Load Balance Mode I/O load balance distribution logic specified for external volume
• Normal Round-robin
• Extended Round-robin
• Disabled
A hyphen is displayed if Single is specified in Path Mode

Path Mode on Profile Path mode on profile information of the external storage system:
• Multi
• Single
ALUA Settable Indicates whether ALUA mode can be set as path mode on the external storage
system
• Yes: ALUA mode can be set
• No: ALUA mode cannot be set
ALUA Permitted Indicates whether ALUA is used as path mode on the local storage system:
• Enabled: ALUA mode is used
• Disabled: ALUA mode is not used
Target Port Asymmetric Status of the port on the external storage system when the path mode is ALUA:
Access State • Active/Optimized
• Active/Non-Optimized
Package Type Type of CHB to which a port of the local storage system connecting to the external
storage system belongs
• Fibre: 8FC4 (CHB), 16FC2 (CHB), 32FC4R (CHB)
• iSCSI: 10iSCSI2o (CHB), 10iSCSI2c (CHB)
IP Address IP address for an iSCSI target of an external storage system
• IPv6:
XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX (hexadecimal)
• IPv4:

Item Content
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX (decimal)
• Blank if "Package Type" is iSCSI.
TCP Port Number TCP port number (1 through 65535) for the iSCSI target of an external storage
system
Blank if "Package Type" is Fibre.

iSCSI Target Name iSCSI target name of an external storage system
Blank if "Package Type" is Fibre.

Notes:
EnvMonInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about the power and temperature of the
storage system. Power and temperature measurements from the
environment monitor are recorded every two hours.
No records are created during a system power failure or if the breakers are
turned off. If the system is in maintenance mode or the SVP is rebooted, up
to two hours of records could be lost.
If a failure occurs in the storage system, the correct information might not be
output.
Table 26 EnvMonInfo.csv file (Title: <<Electric power and temperature

Information>>)
Item Description
Date Year, month, and date when record data was acquired for the two-hour period in the
format:
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Electric power average Average value of electric power (W)
Electric power maximum Maximum value of electric power (W)
value
Electric power minimum Minimum value of electric power (W)
value
In the following cases, a lower value might be temporarily displayed:
• When the storage system is starting up
• Right after replacing storage system parts
• During or after microcode update
DKC0 CL1 Temperature DKC0: Average temperature of CL1 (°C)
average
DKC0 CL1 Temperature DKC0: Maximum temperature of CL1 (°C)
maximum value
DKC0 CL1 Temperature DKC0: Minimum temperature of CL1 (°C)
minimum value

Item Description
DKC0 CL2 Temperature DKC0: Average temperature of CL2 (°C)

average
DKC0 CL2 Temperature DKC0: Maximum temperature of CL2 (°C)

maximum value
DKC0 CL2 Temperature DKC0: Minimum temperature of CL2 (°C)
minimum value
FcSpNameInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about Fibre Channel Security Protocols
(FCSPs). A record is created for each initiator (host).
For details of port setting, see the Provisioning Guide. Information about the
NAS module is not displayed in this CSV file.
Table 27 FcSpNameInfo.csv file (Title: <<FC-SP Name Information>>)
Item Content
Port Port name

Host Group Host group name
Target Username WWN information about the storage system required for authentication (16-digit
hexadecimal number)
Authentication of Group Information about whether to perform authentication or not
• Enabled
• Disabled
Initiator Username WWN information about the host required for authentication (16-digit hexadecimal
number)
Protocol Protocol used for authentication ("CHAP" or blank)
FcSpPortInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about ports related to Fibre Channel
Security Protocols (FCSPs). A record is created for each port.
For details of port setting, see the Provisioning Guide. Information about the
NAS module is not displayed in this CSV file.
Table 28 FcSpPortInfo.csv file (Title: <<FC-SP Port Information>>)
Item Content
Port Port name

Time out(Sec) Time interval (in seconds) before retrying authentication in case of failure in
authentication
Refusal Intvl.(Min) Time interval (in minutes) before starting next authentication in case of failure in
authentication for the number of times displayed by "Refusal Freq(Counts)"
Refusal Freq.(Counts) Number of times of authentication allowable for connection to a port

Item Content
Switch Port Username WWN information about the Fabric switch required for authentication (16-digit
hexadecimal number)
Mode Mode of authentication between ports and FC switches
• Bidirectional
• Unidirectional
Authentication of Fabric Information about whether to perform authentication of the FC switch identified by
Switch "Switch Port Username"
• Enabled
• Disabled
HduInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about hard drive boxes (DB). A record is
created for each drive box.
Table 29 DBInfo.csv file (Title: <<DB Information>>)
Item Description
DB Location DB location name

DB Status Information about whether this DB is installed
• Installed
• Not installed
Slot Size Slot size (inches)
• 2.5
• 3.5
• Blank for DBF (FMC and FMD).
DB Type DB type
• DBS (DB for 2.5-inch drives)
• DBL (DB for 3.5-inch drives)
• DB60 (dense drive box for 3.5-inch drives)
• DBF (DB for FMC and FMD, 2PORT)
IscsiHostInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about iSCSI Initiator (Host) set to the
channel board port. A record is created for each iSCSI Host (Initiator) target.
Table 30 IscsiHostInfo.csv file (Title: <<iSCSI Host Information>>)
Item Content
Port Port name

iSCSI Name iSCSI host name
Host Name Nickname for iSCSI host name
iSCSI Target ID1 iSCSI target number (hexadecimal format, 00 to fe)
Notes:

Item Content
1. For the target information, see the record information with the same iSCSI target ID in IscsiTargetInfo.csv.
IscsiPortInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about iSCSI information set to the channel
board port. A record is created for each iSCSI host (initiator) target.
Table 31 IscsiPortInfo.csv file (Title: <<iSCSI Port Information>>)
Item Content
Port Port name

IPv4 | IP Address IPv4 address
Output example: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (decimal)

IPv4 | Subnet Mask IPv4 subnet mask (decimal)

IPv4 | Default Gateway Port IPv4 default gateway

IPv6 | Mode Port IPv6 settings
• Enabled
• Disabled
IPv6 | Link Local Address Port IPv6 link local address
• Output example: xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx (hexadecimal)
• Output example: Auto
Auto is displayed if the link local address is automatically set. Blank if "IPv6 | Mode" is
Disabled.
IPv6 | Global Address IPv6 global address of the port
Auto is displayed if the global address is automatically set. Blank if "IPv6 | Mode" is
Disabled.
IPv6 | Assigned Default Port IPv6 assigned default gateway
Gateway • Output example: xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx (hexadecimal)
Blank if "IPv6 | Mode" is Disabled.

Channel Speed Data transfer speed of the port (10 Gbps)
Security Switch Port security switch settings
• On
• Off
TCP Port Number The number of the port for using socket (1 to 65535)
Ethernet MTU Size (Byte) | MTU settings
MTU • 1500
• 4500
• 9000

Item Content
Keep Alive Timer (sec.) Keep alive timer value of iSCSI (30 to 64800) (sec)
Selective ACK Selective ACK mode

• Enabled
• Disabled
Delayed ACK Delayed ACK mode
• Enabled
• Disabled
Maximum Window Size (KB) Window scale option settings
• 64KB
• 128KB
• 256KB
• 512KB
• 1024KB
iSNS Server | Mode iSNS mode settings
• On
• Off
iSNS Server | IP Address IP address of the iSNS server
• IPv4: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (decimal)
• IPv6: xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx (hexadecimal)
• Blank if "iSNS Server | Mode" is Off.
iSNS Server | TCP Port Port number of TCP used for iSNS (1 to 65535).
Number
Blank if "iSNS Server | Mode" is Off.
VLAN | Tagging Mode VLAN tagging mode set to the port
• On
• Off
VLAN | ID VLAN number set to the port (1 to 4094)
Blank if "VLAN | Tagging Mode" is set to Off.

Resource Group ID (Port) Resource group ID of the port (0 to 1023 in decimal)
Resource Group Name(Port) Resource group name of the port
iSCSI Name iSCSI name of the port
CHAP User Name Authenticated user name of the port
IPv6 | Global Address 2 IPv6 global address 2 of the port
Auto is displayed if the global address 2 is automatically set. Blank if "IPv6 | Mode" is
Disabled.
IscsiTargetInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about iSCSI target information set to the
channel board port. A record is created for each iSCSI target. Information
about the NAS module is not displayed in this CSV file.

Table 32 IscsiTargetInfo.csv file (Title: <<iSCSI Target Information>>)
Item Content
Port Port name

iSCSI Target Alias iSCSI target alias
iSCSI Target ID Number of the iSCSI target (00 to fe, hexadecimal)
Host Mode Host mode set to the iSCSI target (hexadecimal)
Host Mode Option Host mode option set to the iSCSI target (0 to 127, decimal)
Separated with a semicolon (;) if multiple host mode options are set.
Security Switch Security switch status set to the iSCSI target port
• On
• Off
Authentication | Method Authentication method settings of the iSCSI target
• CHAP
• None
• Comply with Host Setting
Authentication | Mutual Mutual CHAP authentication function settings of the iSCSI target
CHAP • Enabled
• Disabled
Authentication | User Name User name set when iSCSI target was authenticated
Resource Group ID (iSCSI Resource group ID of the iSCSI target (0 to 1023)
Target)
Resource Group Name (iSCSI Resource group name of the iSCSI target
Target)
JnlInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about journals. A record is created for each
journal.
Table 33 JnlInfo.cvs file (Title: <<JNL Information>>)
Item Content
JNL# Journal number (in hexadecimal)

Current MPU Number and name of MP unit currently controlling the journal
(MPU-10, MPU-11, MPU-20, MPU-21)

Setting MPU Number and name of MP unit configured to control the journal
(MPU-10, MPU-11, MPU-20, MPU-21)
LdevCapaInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about LDEV capacities. A record is created
for each of the classifications shown in "Volume Kind".

Table 34 LdevCapaInfo.csv file (Title: <<LDEV Capacity Information>>)
Item Content
Volume Kind The following classifications are output:

• Internal OPEN Volumes
• External OPEN Volumes
• Total OPEN Volumes
Allocated LDEV Capacity Allocated LDEV capacity
(GB)
Unallocated LDEV Capacity Unallocated LDEV capacity
(GB)
Reserved Capacity (GB) Reserved LDEV capacity
Total Volume Capacity (GB) Total capacity of "Allocated LDEV Capacity", "Unallocated LDEV Capacity" and
"Reserved Capacity"
Free Space (GB) Free Space
Total Capacity (GB) Total Capacity
The sum of "Total Volume Capacity" and "Free Space"
LdevCountInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about the number of logical devices
(LDEVs). A record is created for each of the classifications shown in "Volume
Kind".
Table 35 LdevCountInfo.csv file (Title: <<LDEV Count Information>>)
Item Content
Volume Kind The following classifications are output:

• Internal Volumes
• External Volumes
• Total Volumes
Allocated OPEN LDEVs The number of allocated open-system volumes (LDEVs).
Unallocated OPEN LDEVs The number of unallocated open-system volumes (LDEVs).
Reserved OPEN LDEVs The number of reserved open-system volumes (LDEVs).
V-VOL The number of virtual volumes.
Output only when "Volume Kind" is Total Volumes.

Total(All LDEVs) Total number of LDEVs.
ECC Groups Total number of parity groups.
LdevInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about logical devices (LDEVs). A record is
created for each LDEV.
For details of LDEVs, see the Provisioning Guide.

Table 36 Ldevinfo.csv file (Title: <<LDEV Status>>)
Item Content
ECC Group Number of parity group where the LDEV belongs.
Output example: X-Y (decimals)

external volumes.
• If "LDEV Type" is Dynamic Provisioning or Thin Image, a hyphen is output.
LDEV# LDEV number
(00:00:00 to 00:3f:ff)
LDEV Name LDEV name1
LDEV Emulation LDEV emulation type
LDEV Type LDEV type:
• Basic
• Dynamic Provisioning
• External
• Thin Image
• ALU
LDEV Attribute LDEV Attribute:
• CMDDEV (Command device)
• CMDDEV1 (Remote command device)
• Journal (Journal volume)
• Pool (Pool volume)
• Quorum disk (used with global-active device)
• ALU
• SLU
• Deduplication system data volume
• Regular (Others)
Volume Size(Cyl) LDEV capacity (in cylinders)
Volume Size(MB) LDEV capacity (in MB)
Volume Size(Blocks) LDEV capacity (in blocks)
CVS Information about whether the LDEV is a custom-sized volume:
• On: Custom-sized volume
• Off: Others
Pool ID Pool number. This is blank except for the following cases:
• If "LDEV Type" is Dynamic Provisioning
• If LDEV Attribute is Pool
RAID Concatenation#0 Number of parity group to be concatenated to parity group (#0) identified by ECC
Group. Blank if the parity group is not concatenated to another parity group.
ORACLE CHECK SUM Information about whether this LDEV is an Oracle check sum target.
• On
• Off
Current MPU Number of the MP unit currently controlling the LDEV.

Item Content
(MPU-10, MPU-11, MPU-20, MPU-21)

Setting MPU Number of the MP unit configured to control LDEV.
(MPU-10, MPU-11, MPU-20, MPU-21)

Allocated Information about whether this LDEV is allocated to a host.
• "Y" is output for volumes accessible to the host.
Pool Name The pool's name1
• If the provisioning type is Dynamic Provisioning, the name of the pool related to
the logical volume is displayed.
• If the attribute is Pool, the name of the pool where the logical volume belongs is
displayed.
• When neither of the above are displayed, the pool name is blank.
CmdDevSecurity Indicates whether Security is specified as the attribute for the command device.
• Enabled: Command device security setting is set.
• Disabled: Command device security setting is not set.
• Blank: "LDEV Attribute" is not CMDDEV.
CmdDevUserAuth Indicates whether User Authentication is specified as the attribute for the command
device.
• Enabled: User authentication setting is set.
• Disabled: User authentication setting is not set.
CmdDevDevGrpDef Indicates whether Device Group Definition is specified as the attribute for the
command device.
• Enabled: Device group definition setting is set.
• Disabled: Device group definition setting is not set.
Resource Group ID (LDEV) LDEV resource group ID (number in the decimal format)
Resource Group Name LDEV resource group name (0 to 1,023, decimal)
(LDEV)
Encryption Indicates whether the parity group identified by ECC Group is encrypted.
• For external volumes: blank
T10 PI Indicates the T10 PI attribute set for the LDEV.
• Enabled
• Disabled
• Blank if "LDEV Emulation" is not OPEN-V.
ALUA Mode Indicates whether the ALUA mode is enabled.
• Enabled: ALUA mode is enabled.
• Disabled: ALUA mode is disabled.
Accelerated Compression Indicates whether accelerated compression is enabled.
For internal volumes:

• Enabled: accelerated compression is enabled.
• Disabled: accelerated compression is disabled.
If the parity group with LDEV does not support accelerated compression, a blank
space is displayed. Also, for external volumes, a blank is displayed.
Notes:

LdevStatus.csv
This CSV file contains information about the status of logical devices (LDEVs).
A record is created for each LDEV.
Table 37 LdevStatus.csv file (Title: <<LDEV Status>>)
Item Content
VDEV# Virtual device number in which the LDEV is defined

VDEV Status VDEV status of "VDEV#"
• 1: Normal
• 0: Abnormal
HDEV# LDEV number
HDEV Status LDEV status
• 1: Normal
• 0: Abnormal
LDEV Emulation LDEV emulation type
ECC Group Number of the parity group where the LDEV belongs.
external volumes.
• If the type of the LDEV is a Dynamic Provisioning or Thin Image virtual volume, a
hyphen is output.
Refer to "LdevInfo.csv" for information about the LDEV type.
LPartition.csv
This CSV file contains information about the cache logical partitioning
function. A record is created for each cache partition for a managed resource.
For details of the cache logical partitioning function, see the Performance
Guide.
Table 38 LPartition.csv file (Title: <<Logical Partitioning>>)
Item Content
CLPR# CLPR ID (in decimal)

CLPR Name CLPR name
Cache Size(MB) Cache size allocated to this CLPR (in MB)
ECC Group Number of parity group allocated to this CLPR.
external volumes.
• If the type of the LDEV is a Dynamic Provisioning or Thin Image virtual volume, a
hyphen is output.
Refer to "LdevInfo.csv" for information about the LDEV type.
LDEV#(V-VOL) LDEV number allocated to this CLPR.
• VSP G200: (00:00:00 to 00:07:ff)
• VSP G400, G600 or VSP F400, F600: (00:00:00 to 00:0f:ff)
• VSP G800 or VSP F800: (00:00:00 to 00:3f:ff)

Item Content
The type of this LDEV is Dynamic Provisioning, Thin Image, or ALU.
LunInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about LU path definitions. A record is
created for each host group. For more information about LU path definitions,
see the Provisioning Guide.
Table 39 LunInfo.csv file (Title: <<LUN Information>>)
Item Description
Port Port name

If "Package Type" is iSCSI, the iSCSI target alias is output.

Host Mode Host mode specified for this host group (hexadecimal)
Host Mode Option Host mode option set for this host group (0 to 127, hexadecimal)
If more than one option is specified, the options are separated by semicolons (;).
LUN# LUN number for this LU path definition (hexadecimal)
LDEV# LDEV number for this LU path definition
Command Device Information about whether the LDEV is a command device:
• On: Command Device
• On*: Remote Command Device
• Off: Others
Command Security Information about whether the command device is secured:
• On
• Off
CVS Information about whether the LDEV is a custom-sized volume:
• On: Customized volume
• Off: Other volumes
CHB Location Name of the CHB on which this port is installed
CHB-1A/1B/1C/1D or CHB-2A/2B/2C/2D if Package Type is NAS module.

Package Type CHB type for CHB Location:
• Fibre:
○ 8FC4 (CHB)
○ 16FC2 (CHB)
○ 32FC4R (CHB)
• iSCSI:
○ 10iSCSI2o (CHB)
○ 10iSCSI2c (CHB)
• NAS module:
○ NAS module (CHB)
Resource Group ID (Host Resource group ID of a host group (0 to 1,023, decimal)

Group)
Resource Group Name (Host Resource group name of a host group
Group)

Item Description
T10 PI Mode Indicates whether the T10 PI mode can be applied to the port for which the LU path is
defined.
• Enabled
• Disabled
• Blank if "Package Type" is not 16FC2 (CHB) or 32FC4R (CHB).
T10 PI Information about the T10 PI attribute which is set for the LDEV number of the LU
path definition.
• Enabled
• Disabled
• Blank if LDEV# is blank
Asymmetric Access State Asymmetric access status (output only for an open system CHA that is Fibre or FCoE)
Indicates the asymmetric access status:
• Active/Optimized: Prioritized
• Active/Non-Optimized: Lower priority
Blank if "Package Type" is iSCSI
LunPortInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about LU path definition. A record is
created for each port.
For details of LU path definition, see the Provisioning Guide.
Table 40 LunPortInfo.csv file (Title: <<LUN Port Information>>)
Item Content
Port Port name.

Security Switch The setting status of the security switch:
• On
• Off
• Blank if "Package Type" is NAS module
Port Address Port address (2-digit hexadecimal number)
Blank if "Package Type" is iSCSI or NAS module

Loop ID Port address (0 - 125, decimal)

Fabric One of the Fibre topology settings indicating the setting status of the Fabric switch:
• On
• Off
• Blank if "Package Type" is iSCSI or NAS module
Connection One of the Fibre topology settings:
• Point to Point
• FC-AL
• Blank if "Package Type" is iSCSI or NAS module
Channel Speed Channel Speed of this port
• 1 Gbps
• 2 Gbps
• 4 Gbps

Item Content
• 8 Gbps
• 10 Gbps
• 16 Gbps
• 32 Gbps
• Auto
• Blank if "Package Type" is NAS module
WWN WWN of this port (hexadecimal number)

CHB Location CHB on which the port is installed. CHB-1A/1B/1C/1D or CHB-2A/2B/2C/2D if
"Package Type" is NAS module.
Package Type CHB type for CHB Location
• Fibre:
○ 8FC4 (CHB)
○ 16FC2 (CHB)
○ 32FC4R (CHB)
• iSCSI:
○ 10iSCSI2o (CHB)
○ 10iSCSI2c (CHB)
• NAS module:
○ NAS Module (CHB)
• Enabled
• Disabled
• Blank if "Package Type" is not 16FC2 (CHB) or 32FC4R (CHB)
MicroVersion.csv
This CSV file contains information about software versions.
Table 41 MicroVersion.csv file (Title: <<Software Version>>)
Item Content
DKCMAIN The version of the firmware for the RAID storage system (10 digits)
ROM BOOT ROM BOOT firmware version (6 digits)
RAM BOOT RAM BOOT firmware version (6 digits)
Config Config version (8 digits)
HDD HDD firmware version (4 digits)
HDD version in the format "(HDD-device-type - code):(version)".
If an HDD drive is not installed, only a colon is displayed.

Expander Expander firmware version (6 digits)
CFM CFM firmware version (8 digits)
DKB DKB firmware version (6 digits)
Printout Tool Printout tool version (xx-yy-zz-mm/aa)
CHB (FC16G) 16G FC protocol chip firmware version (8 digits)

Item Content
CHB (FC32G) 32G FC protocol chip firmware version (8 digits)
CHB (iSCSI) CHB(iSCSI) protocol chip firmware version (8 digits)

GUM GUM firmware version (8 digits)
Unified Hypervisor Unified Hypervisor version (8 digits)
• The version is displayed in each CL1, CL2.
• This item is not displayed in VSP G200.
NASFWINST NASFWINST version (9 digits)
NASFW NASFW version (9 digits)
MlcEnduranceInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about endurance information of MLC. A
record is created for each MLC endurance information.
If you change the SVP time 1 month or more, the history acquisition months
will not be in order.
Table 42 MlcEnduranceInfo.csv file (Title: <<MLC Endurance

Information>>)
Item Content
ECC Group Number of parity group of which this MLC (including FMD and FMC) is a component
• If it is a spare drive, Spare Drive is displayed.
• If it is a free drive, Free Drive is displayed.
CR# C# and R# (2-digit hexadecimal numbers), which identify the PDEV
Output in the format of "XX/YY"
XX: C#
YY: R#
Device Type-Code Drive type code of this drive
Output example: SLR5A-M800SS

Used Endurance Indicator Current SSD life (0 to 100)
(%)
History1 (date) Date on which SSD life was acquired (1 month ago)
Output example: yyyy/mm/dd

History1 (%) SSD life (0 to 100)(1 month ago)
History2 (date) Date on which SSD life was acquired (2 months ago)
Output example: yyyy/mm/dd

History2 (%) SSD life (0 to 100) (2 months ago)

Item Content
History3 (%) ... History 119 SSD life (0 to 100) (3 months ago ...119 months ago)
(%)
History120 (date) Date on which SSD life was acquired (120 months ago)
History120 (%) SSD life (0 to 100) (120 months ago)
ModePerLpr.csv
This CSV file contains information about system option modes. A record is
created for each system option mode.
Table 43 ModePerLpr.csv file (Title: <<System Option Mode Per LPR>>)
Item Content
System Option Mode# System option mode # (0 to 2047, decimal number)

LPR#0, LPR#1, …, LPR#31 System option mode for LPR#0 to LPR#31
• If the system option mode is on:
On
• If the system option mode is not on:
Blank
MpPathStatus.csv
This CSV file contains information about the status of logical paths. A record
is created for each MP blade or LR.
Table 44 MpPathStatus.csv file (Title: <<MP Path Status>>)
Item Content
MPU#/CTL# MP unit number or CTL number (2-digit hexadecimal number)

• For MP unit number
MPU#00 to MPU#03
The MPU#01 or MPU#03 line is blank if Unified Mode of DkcInfo.csv is On.
• For CTL number
CTL#00 to CTL#01
CMG#00-00 to 01 Path status1 for the MP unit number with the cache module
CMG#01-00 to 01 (CMG#XX-YY) XX: I path, YY: CMG#
For VSP G200, CMG#00-00 to 01 only

MPU#00-00 to 03 Path status1 and the MP unit for the MP unit number
MPU#01-00 to 03 (MPU#XX-YY) XX: I path, YY: MPU#
The display in MPU#00-01, MPU#00-03, MPU#01-01, or MPU#01-03 is blank if Unified

Mode of DkcInfo.csv is On.
For VSP G200, MPU#00-00 to 03 only

CMG#00-00 to 01 Path status1 with the cache module for the CTL number

Item Content
CMG#01-00 to 01 (CMG#XX-YY) XX: I path, YY: CMG#
For VSP G200, CMG#00-00 to 01 only

MPU#00-00 to 03 Path status1 with the MP unit number for the CTL number
MPU#01-00 to 03 (MPU#XX-YY) XX: I path, YY: MPU#
For VSP G200, MPU#00-00 to 03 only
The display in MPU#00-01, MPU#00-03, MPU#01-01, or MPU#01-03 is blank if Unified

Mode of DkcInfo.csv is On.
Note:
1. 1=Normal, 0=Abnormal
MpPcbStatus.csv
This CSV file contains information about the status of MP Unit. A record is
created for each MP unit.
Table 45 MpPcbStatus.csv file (Title: <<MP PCB Status>>)
Item Content
MPU ID MP unit ID (MPU-10, MPU-11, MPU-20, MPU-21)
MPU-10 and MPU-20 are displayed if Unified Mode of DkcInfo.csv is On.

Auto Assignment Information about whether this MP unit is set to be automatically assigned to each
resource.
• Enabled: Set to be automatically assigned
• Disabled: Not set to be automatically assigned
PCB Status MP unit status1
MP#00, #01,..., #07 MP status1
The number of output items differs for each model, because the number of installed
MPs is different.
• VSP G200: MP#00,01
• VSP G400, G600 or VSP F400, F600: MP#00, 01,…, 03
• VSP G800 or VSP F800: MP#00, 01,…, 07
Note:
PcbRevInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about revisions of packages such as
channel boards (CHBs) and others. A record is created for each package.
Table 46 PcbRevInfo.csv file (Title: <<PCB Revision Information>>)
Item Content
Cluster# Cluster number

• 1

Item Content
• 2
Location Name of the part
FRU number Product name of the package or some other name
PK Revision Revision of the package
Factory Factory manufacturing the package
Number Serial number of the package
MAC Address MAC address of the package
PdevCapaInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about physical device (PDEV) capacities. A
record is created for each of the classifications shown in "PDEV Kind".
Table 47 PdevCapaInfo.csv file (Title: <<PDEV Capacity Information>>)
Item Content
PDEV Kind The following four classifications are output:

• OPEN System (TB)
• Total Capacity (TB)
• Number of PDEVs
SAS Drive SAS drive capacity (TB)
Spare Drive Spare drive capacity (TB)
SSD Drive SSD capacity (TB)
Free Drive Free drive capacity (TB)
PdevInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about physical devices (PDEVs). A record is
created for each PDEV.
Table 48 PdevInfo.csv file (Title: <<PDEV>>)
Item Content
ECC Group Number of parity group of which this PDEV is a component.

• Spare Drive: For spare drives
• Free Drive: For free drives
Emulation Type Emulation type for the parity group indicated by "ECC Group"
• Blank: "ECC Group" is Spare Drive.
• Free Drive: "ECC Group" is Free Drive.
Output in the format XX/YY, where:

• XX: C#
• YY: R#
PDEV Location PDEV location name

Item Content
Device Type Drive type

• SAS
• SSD
RPM Revolutions per minute
Blank displays as RPM when the drive is SSD.

Device Type-Code Device type code of this drive
Output example: DKR5D-J600SS

Device Size Drive size (inches)
• 2.5
• 3.5
• Blank for DBF (FMC or FMD)
Device Capacity Drive capacity (GB or TB)
Drive Version Drive firmware version (4-digit hexadecimal number)
DKB1 Name of the DKB1 controlling the PDEV
DKB2 Name of the DKB2 controlling the PDEV
Serial Number # Serial number of this drive (yymm xxxxxx), where:
• yy Year (last 2 digits)
• mm Month (2 digits)
• xxxxxx: Serial number of this drive
RAID Level RAID level of the parity group indicated by "ECC Group"
Blank if the "ECC Group" is Spare Drive or Free Drive

RAID Concatenation #0 Number of parity group to be concatenated to parity group (#0) identified by "ECC
Group"1
Group"1
Group"1
Resource Group ID (ECC Resource group ID of parity group (0 to 1023, decimal number)
Group)
Resource Group Name (ECC Resource group name of parity group
Group)
Encryption Encryption status of the parity group to which the PDEV belongs
• Enabled: Encryption enabled
• Disabled: Encryption disabled
Accelerated Compression Accelerated compression setting.
• Enabled: accelerated compression is enabled.
• Disabled: accelerated compression is disabled.
If the parity group with PDEV does not support accelerated compression, or if the ECC
Group is Spare Drive, a blank space is displayed.
Notes:
1. Blank if the parity group is not concatenated to another parity group or is Spare Drive.

PdevStatus.csv
This CSV file contains information about the status of physical devices
(PDEVs). A record is created for each PDEV.
Table 49 PdevStatus.csv file (Title: <<PDEV Status>>)
Item Content

• XX: C#
• YY: R#
Pdev Status PDEV status1
Port0 Status Status of Port 0 on this PDEV1
Port1 Status Status of Port 1 on this PDEV1
Pdev Location Location name of this PDEV
Notes:
PECBInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about the PECB (PCIe channel board) and
connecting destination for VSP G800 or VSP F800.
For all other VSP Gx00 models or VSP Fx00 models, hyphens are displayed
for all contents.
Table 50 PECBInfo.csv file (Title: <<PECB Information>>)
Item Content
Location PECB location name
Status Whether the PECB is installed

• Installed
• Not Installed
Type Destination module type of the PECB

• CHBB
Expansion mode Expansion mode set in the destination module of the PECB
• 1:2
PkInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about channel boards (CHBs). A record is
created for each CHB.

Table 51 PkInfo.csv file (Title: <<PK>>)
Item Content
CHB Location CHB name
CHB-1A/1B/1C/1D or CHB-2A/2B/2C/2D if "Package Type" is NAS module.

Port# Number of the port installed on the CHB (2-digit hexadecimal number)
Port Name of port installed on the CHB
Package Type CHB type indicated on the CHB Location
• Fibre: 8FC4 (CHB), 16FC2 (CHB), 32FC4R (CHB)
• NAS module: NAS module (CHB)
SFP Kind SFP (Small Form factor Pluggable) Kind
• Short Wave
• Long Wave
• Blank if "Package Type" is 10iSCSI2c (CHB) or NAS module (CHB).
SFP Status SFP Status:
• Normal
• Failed
• Not Fix
• Blank if "Package Type" is 10iSCSI2c (CHB) or NAS module (CHB).
Fabric One of the Fibre topology settings indicating the setting status of the Fabric switch:
• On
• Off
• Blank if "Package Type" is iSCSI or NAS module.
Connection One of the Fibre topology settings
• Point to Point
• FC-AL
• Blank if "Package Type" is iSCSI or NAS module.
Port Address Port address (00 to ff, 2-digit hexadecimal number)
Blank if "Package Type" is iSCSI or NAS module.

Resource Group ID (Port) Resource group ID of port (0 to 1023, decimal number)
Resource Group Name (Port) Resource group name of the port.
Port Internal WWN Port WWN
Blank if "Package Type" is iSCSI or NAS module.

• Enabled
• Disabled
SFP Data Transfer Rate Maximum transfer rate of SFP which the mounted package supports.
• 8G
• 10G
• 16G
• 32G
• Blank if the "Package Type" is 10iSCSI2c (CHB) or NAS module (CHB).

PpInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about the software. A record is created for
each software product.
For details about the license key, see License keys on page 229.
Table 52 PpInfo.csv file (Title: <<PP Information>>)
Item Content
Program Product Name Software name.

Install Information about whether the installed license key is enabled or not
• Enabled: Installed and the software can be used
• Disabled: Installed but the software cannot be used
Key Type Installed license key type
• Permanent
• Temporary
• Emergency
• Term
If no license key is installed, "Not Installed" is output.

Permitted Volumes(TB) Permitted volume capacity for this software (in TB)
If no upper limit value is set for the capacity, "Unlimited" is output.

Expiration Date Expiration date of the software.
The format is mm/dd/yyyy (Month/Day/Year).

Status License key status of the software
• Installed
• Not Enough License
• Grace Period
• Expired
• Not Installed
• Installed (Disabled)
SMfundat.csv
This CSV file contains information about SM functions. A record is created for
each of the classifications shown in "SM Install Function".
Table 53 SMfundat.csv file (Title: <<SM Install function>>)
Item Content
SM Install function The following classifications are output for VSP G200:
1. Base
2. Extension 1
3. Extension 2
The following classifications are output for VSP G400, G600, G800 or VSP F400, F600,
F800:
1. Base
2. Extension1

Item Content
3. Extension2
4. Extension3
5. Extension4
Availability Information about whether the function of "SM Install function" is enabled
• Enabled
• Disabled
SsdDriveInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about SSDs. A record is created for each
SSD.
Table 54 SsdDriveInfo.csv file (Title: <<SSD Drive Status>>)
Item Content
ECC Group Number of the parity group of which this SSD is a component.
• Spare Drive: The SSD is a spare drive.
• Free Drive: The SSD is a free drive.

• XX: C#
• YY: R#
PDEV Location Drive type code of the PDEV location name for this drive
Device Type-Code Drive type code
Output example: SLR5A-M800SS

Device Capacity Drive capacity in GB or TB
SSD Device Type SSD drive type
• MLC
• FMC
• FMD
Used Endurance Indicator SSD life (0 to 100)
(%)
Used Endurance Indicator SSD life threshold (0 to 100)
Threshold (%)
Used Endurance Indicator Warning SIM threshold (0 to 100)
Warning SIM (%)
FMD Battery Life Indicator Threshold of battery life warning SIM (0 to 100)
Warning SIM (%)
Blank if SSD is other than FMD
FMD Battery Life Indicator Used battery life (0 to 100)
(%)
Blank if SSD is other than FMD
SsidInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about SSIDs. A record is created for each
SSID.

Table 55 SsidInfo.csv file (Title: <<Subsystem ID >>)
Item Content
DEV# Start First LDEV number for the SSID

DEV# End Last LDEV number for the SSID
SSID Subsystem ID (hexadecimal)
SysoptInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about system options.
Table 56 Sysoptinfo.csv file (Title: <<System Option Information>>)
Item Content
Spare Disk Recover Speed of copying data to the spare drive.

• Interleave mode
• Full Speed mode
Dynamic Sparing Information about whether to perform automatic copy to a spare drive if the
occurrences of drive failures exceed the threshold.
• On
• Off
Correction Copy Information about whether to perform correction copy to a spare drive if a drive is
blocked.
• On
• Off
Disk Copy pace Speed of copying the spare drive in the Interleave mode.
• Faster
• Medium
• Slower
System Option On System options that are set to ON.
Output example: modeXXXX (0 to 2047, decimal number)

Link Failure Threshold Threshold to notify the link failure (0 to 255, decimal)
WwnInfo.csv
This CSV file contains information about hosts. A record is created for each
host.
For details about the host setting, see the Provisioning Guide.
Table 57 WwnInfo.csv file (Title: <<World Wide Name Information>>)
Item Content
Port Port name.

iSCSI target alias is output if the "Package Type" is iSCSI.

Item Content
Host Mode Host mode that is set for the host group (0 to 127, hexadecimal)
Host Mode Option Host mode option that is set for the host group (decimal)
Multiple options are separated by semicolons (;)

WWN World Wide Name of the host bus adapter registered to the host group (hexadecimal
number)
Blank if the "Package Type" is iSCSI or NAS module.

Nickname Nickname of the host
Blank if the "Package Type" is iSCSI or NAS module.

Host Group# Host group number (00 to ff, hexadecimal)
iSCSI target ID will be output if the "Package Type" is iSCSI.

CHB Location Name of port installed on the CHB
CHB-1A/1B/1C/1D or CHB-2A/2B/2C/2D if "Package Type" is NAS module.

Package Type CHB type indicated on the CHB Location
• Fibre: 8FC4 (CHB), 16FC2 (CHB), 32FC4R(CHB)
• NAS module: NAS module (CHB)
• Enabled
• Disabled

Glossary
#
2DC
two-data-center. Refers to the local and remote sites, or data centers, in
which TrueCopy (TC) and Universal Replicator (UR) combine to form a
remote replication configuration.
In a 2DC configuration, data is copied from a TC primary volume at the

local site to the UR master journal volume at an intermediate site, then
replicated to the UR secondary volume at the remote site. Since this
configuration side-steps the TC secondary volume at the intermediate
site, the intermediate site is not considered a data center.
3DC
three-data-center. Refers to the local, intermediate, and remote sites, or
data centers, in which TrueCopy and Universal Replicator combine to form
a remote replication configuration.
In a 3DC configuration, data is copied from a local site to an intermediate

site and then to a remote site (3DC cascade configuration), or from a
local site to two separate remote sites (3DC multi-target configuration).
A
array
See disk array
audit log
Files that store a history of the operations performed from Device
Manager - Storage Navigator and the commands that the storage system
received from hosts, and data encryption operations.
Glossary 331
B
back-end director (BED)
The hardware component that controls the transfer of data between the
drives and cache. A BED feature consists of a pair of boards. A BED is also
referred to as a disk board (DKB).
BED
See back-end director.
bind mode
In bind mode the Cache Residency Manager extents are used to hold read
and write data for specific extent(s) on volume(s). Data written to the
Cache Residency Manager bind area is not destaged to the drives. For
bind mode, all targeted read and write data is transferred at host data
transfer speed.
blade
A computer module, generally a single circuit board, used mostly in
servers.
C
cache logical partition (CLPR)
Consists of virtual cache memory that is set up to be allocated to different
hosts in contention for cache memory.
capacity
The amount of data storage space available on a physical storage device,
usually measured in bytes (MB, GB, TB, and so on).
CCI
Command Control Interface
CHAP
challenge handshake authentication protocol
CLPR
See cache logical partition (CLPR).
332 Glossary
cluster
Multiple-storage servers working together to respond to multiple read and
write requests.
command device
A dedicated logical volume used only by Command Control Interface and
Business Continuity Manager to interface with the storage system. Can be
shared by several hosts.
controller
The component in a storage system that manages all storage functions. It
is analogous to a computer and contains a processors, I/O devices, RAM,
power supplies, cooling fans, and other sub-components as needed to
support the operation of the storage system.
copy pair
A pair of volumes in which one volume contains original data and the
other volume contains the copy of the original. Copy operations can be
synchronous or asynchronous, and the volumes of the copy pair can be
located in the same storage system (local copy) or in different storage
systems (remote copy).
A copy pair can also be called a volume pair, or just pair. A pair created by
Compatible FlashCopy® is called a relationship.
copy-on-write (COW)
Point-in-time snapshot copy of any data volume within a storage system.
Copy-on-write snapshots only store changed data blocks, therefore the
amount of storage capacity required for each copy is substantially smaller
than the source volume.
COW
See copy-on-write (COW).
COW Snapshot
Hitachi Copy-on-Write Snapshot
custom volume (CV)

A custom-size volume whose size is defined by the user using Virtual LVI/
Virtual LUN.
Glossary 333
CV
See custom volume.
CVS
custom volume size
CXFS
clustered version of XFS file system
D
data drive
A physical data storage device that can be either a hard disk drive (HDD)
or a flash drive (also called a solid-state device).
DBV
Hitachi Database Validator
DC
data center
delta resync
A disaster recovery solution in which TrueCopy and Universal Replicator
systems are configured to provide a quick recovery using only differential
data stored at an intermediate site.
device
A physical or logical unit with a specific function.
device emulation
Indicates the type of logical volume. Mainframe device emulation types
provide logical volumes of fixed size, called logical volume images (LVIs),
which contain EBCDIC data in CKD format. Typical mainframe device
emulation types include 3390-9 and 3390-M. Open-systems device
emulation types provide logical volumes of variable size, called logical
units (LUs), that contain ASCII data in FBA format. The typical open-
systems device emulation type is OPEN-V.
disaster recovery
A set of procedures to recover critical application data and processing
after a disaster or other failure.
334 Glossary
disk array
Disk array, or just array, is a complete storage system, including the
control and logic devices, storage devices (HDD, SSD), connecting cables,
and racks
disk controller (DKC)

The hardware component that manages front-end and back-end storage
operations. The term DKC can refer to the entire storage system or to the
controller components.
DKC
See disk controller (DKC).
DKCMAIN
disk controller main. Refers to the software for the storage system.
DKU
disk unit. Refers to the cabinet (floor model) or rack-mounted hardware
component that contains data drives and no controller components.
dump
A collection of data that is saved to a file when an error or crash occurs.
The data is used by support personnel to determine the cause of the error
or crash.
Dump tool
Downloads Device Manager - Storage Navigator configuration information
onto recording media for backup and troubleshooting purposes.
E
emulation
The operation of a storage system to emulate the characteristics of a
different storage system. For device emulation, the mainframe host
recognizes the logical devices on the storage system as 3390-x devices.
For controller emulation, the mainframe host recognizes the control units
(CUs) on the storage system as 2105 or 2107 controllers.
The storage system operates the same as the storage system being
emulated.
emulation group
A set of device emulation types that can be intermixed within a RAID
group and treated as a group.
Glossary 335
external application
A software module that is used by a storage system but runs on a
separate platform.
external volume
A logical volume whose data resides on drives that are physically located
outside the Hitachi storage system.
F
FC
Fibre Channel; FlashCopy
FC-AL
fibre-channel arbitrated loop
FCP
fibre-channel protocol
FCSP
fibre-channel security protocol
FICON
Fibre Connectivity
flash drive
A data drive that uses a solid-state memory device instead of a rotating
hard disk.
flash module
A high speed data storage device that includes a custom flash controller
and several flash memory sub-modules on a single PCB.
FMD
See flash module
H
HBA
host bus adapter
336 Glossary
HDD
hard disk drive
HDT
Hitachi Dynamic Tiering
HDU
hard disk unit
head LDEV
See top LDEV.
host group
A group of hosts of the same operating system platform.
host mode
Operational modes that provide enhanced compatibility with supported
host platforms. Used with fibre-channel ports on RAID storage systems.
host mode option

Additional options for fibre-channel ports on RAID storage systems.
Provide enhanced functionality for host software and middleware.
HP XP7 CVAE
HP XP7 Command View Advanced Edition - a set of software applications
included in the system firmware. Via the GUI, they are used to configure,
control, and monitor the storage system.
I
in-system replication
The original data volume and its copy are located in the same storage
system. ShadowImage in-system replication provides duplication of
logical volumes; Thin Image in-system replication provides "snapshots" of
logical volumes that are stored and managed as virtual volumes (V-
VOLs).
See also remote replication.
initiator
An attribute of the port that is connected to the port with RCU target
attribute.
Glossary 337
internal volume
A logical volume whose data resides on drives that are physically located
within the storage system. See also external volume.
J
JNL
journal
journal volume
A volume that records and stores a log of all events that take place in
another volume. In the event of a system crash, the journal volume logs
are used to restore lost data and maintain data integrity.
In Universal Replicator, differential data is held in journal volumes on until

it is copied to the S-VOL.
JRE
Java Runtime Environment
K
key management server
A server that manages encryption keys. Encryption keys can be backed
up to, and restored from, a key management server that complies with
the Key Management Interoperability Protocol (KMIP).
keypair
Two mathematically-related cryptographic keys: a private key and its
associated public key.
L
LBA
logical block address
LCP
local control port; link control processor
LD
local directory; logical device
338 Glossary
LDAP
lightweight directory access protocol
LDEV
logical device
LDKC
See logical disk controller (LDKC).
LDM
Logical Disk Manager
license key
A specific set of characters that unlocks an application and allows it to be
used.
local control port (LCP)

A serial-channel (ESCON) port configured to receive I/Os from a host or
remote I/Os from a TrueCopy main control unit (MCU).
local copy
See in-system replication.
local storage system

A storage system connected to the management client.
logical device (LDEV)

An individual logical data volume (on multiple drives in a RAID
configuration) in the storage system. An LDEV may or may not contain
any data and may or may not be defined to any hosts. Each LDEV has a
unique identifier or "address" within the storage system composed of the
logical disk controller (LDKC) number, control unit (CU) number, and LDEV
number. The LDEV IDs within a storage system do not change.An LDEV
formatted for use by mainframe hosts is called a logical volume image
(LVI). An LDEV formatted for use by open-system hosts is called a logical
unit (LU).
logical disk controller (LDKC)

A group of 255 control unit (CU) images in the RAID storage system that
is controlled by a virtual (logical) storage system within the single
Glossary 339
physical storage system. For example, the Hitachi Universal Storage
Platform V storage system supports two LDKCs, LDKC 00 and LDKC 01.
logical partition (LPAR)

A subset of a system's hardware resources that is virtualized as a
separate system. For a storage system, logical partitioning can be applied
to cache memory and/or storage capacity.
logical unit (LU)

A logical volume that is configured for use by open-systems hosts (for
example, OPEN-V).
logical unit (LU) path

The path between an open-systems host and a logical unit.
logical volume (LV)

See volume.
logical volume image (LVI)

A logical volume that is configured for use by mainframe hosts (for
example, 3390-9).
LU
See logical unit (LU).
LUN
See logical unit number
LUN volume
A custom-size volume whose size is defined by the user using Virtual LUN.
Also called a custom volume (CV).
LV
logical volume
LVI
See logical volume image.
340 Glossary
M
MF, M/F
mainframe
modify mode
The mode of operation of Device Manager - Storage Navigator that allows
changes to the storage system configuration. See also view mode.
O
OPEN-V
A logical unit (LU) of user-defined size that is formatted for use by open-
systems hosts.
OPEN-x
A logical unit (LU) of fixed size (for example, OPEN-3 or OPEN-9) that is
used primarily for sharing data between mainframe and open-systems
hosts using Hitachi Cross-OS File Exchange.
P
P-VOL
This term is used only in the earlier version of the Device Manager -
Storage Navigator GUI (still in use) for the primary volume. See primary
volume.
pair
Two logical volumes in a replication relationship in which one volume
contains original data to be copied and the other volume contains the
copy of the original data. The copy operations can be synchronous or
asynchronous, and the pair volumes can be located in the same storage
system (in-system replication) or in different storage systems (remote
replication).
parity group
See RAID group.
PAV
Hitachi Compatible PAV
Glossary 341
PCB
printed circuit board
PDEV
physical device
PG
parity group. See RAID group.
physical device
See device.
pool
A set of volumes that are reserved for storing pool volumes (pool-VOL),
and used by Thin Image, Dynamic Provisioning, Dynamic Tiering, or
active flash data.
pool volume (pool-VOL)

A logical volume that is reserved for storing snapshot data for Thin Image
operations or write data for Dynamic Provisioning, Dynamic Tiering, or
active flash.
port attribute
Indicates the type of fibre-channel port: target, RCU target, or initiator.
primary volume (P-VOL)

The volume in a copy pair that contains the original data to be replicated.
The data on the P-VOL is duplicated synchronously or asynchronously on
the secondary volume (S-VOL).
The following Hitachi products use the term P-VOL: Thin Image, Copy-on-
Write Snapshot, ShadowImage, TrueCopy, Universal Replicator, Universal
Replicator for Mainframe, and High Availability Manager.
See also secondary volume.
prio
priority mode. Used in Cache Residency Manager.
342 Glossary
Q
quick format
The quick format feature in Virtual LVI/Virtual LUN in which the formatting
of the internal volumes is done in the background. This allows system
configuration (such as defining a path or creating a TrueCopy pair) before
the formatting is completed. To execute quick formatting, the volumes
must be in blocked status.
quick restore
A reverse resynchronization in which no data is actually copied: the
primary and secondary volumes are swapped.
R
RAID
redundant array of inexpensive disks
RAID group
A set of RAID disks that have the same capacity and are treated as one
group for data storage and recovery. A RAID group contains both user
data and parity information. This allows user data to be accessed in the
event that one or more of the drives within the RAID group are not
available. The RAID level of a RAID group determines the number of data
drives and parity drives and how the data is "striped" across the drives.
For RAID1, user data is duplicated within the RAID group, so there is no
parity data for RAID1 RAID groups.
A RAID group can also be called an array group or a parity group.
RAID level
The type of RAID implementation. RAID levels include RAID0, RAID1,
RAID2, RAID3, RAID4, RAID5 and RAID6.
RCU
See remote control unit.
RCU target port

A fibre-channel port that is configured to receive remote I/Os from an
initiator port on another storage system.
Glossary 343
remote control unit (RCU)
A storage system at a secondary or remote site that is configured to
receive remote I/Os from one or more storage systems at the primary or
main site.
remote copy
See remote replication.
resync
resynchronize.
RMI
Remote Method Invocation
S
S-VOL
See secondary volume or source volume. When used for "secondary
volume", "S-VOL" is only seen in the earlier version of the Device
Manager - Storage Navigator GUI (still in use).
SAS
serial-attached SCSI
secondary volume (S-VOL)

The volume in a copy pair that is the copy of the original data on the
primary volume (P-VOL). The following Hitachi products use the term
"secondary volume": Thin Image, Copy-on-Write Snapshot,
ShadowImage, TrueCopy, Universal Replicator, Universal Replicator for
Mainframe, and High Availability Manager.
See also primary volume.
service information message (SIM)

Messages generated by a RAID storage system when it detects an error or
service requirement. SIMs are reported to hosts and displayed on Device
service processor
The computer in a storage system that hosts the Device Manager -
Storage Navigator software and is used to configure and maintain the
storage system.
344 Glossary
severity level
Applies to service information messages (SIMs) and Device Manager -
Storage Navigator error codes.
SFP
small form-factor pluggable
shared memory
Memory that exists logically in the cache. It stores common information
about the storage system and the cache management information
(directory). The storage system uses this information to control exclusions
and differential table information. Shared memory is managed in two
segments and is used when copy pairs are created.
In the event of a power failure, the shared memory is kept alive by the
cache memory batteries while the data is copied to the cache flash
memory (SSDs).
shredding
See volume shredding.
SIM
See service information message.
size
Generally refers to the storage capacity of a memory module or cache.
Not usually used for storage of data on disk or flash drives.
SM
shared memory
SMTP
simple mail transfer protocol
snapshot
A point-in-time virtual copy of a Hitachi Thin Image primary volume (P-
VOL). The snapshot is maintained when the P-VOL is updated by storing
pre-updated data (snapshot data) in a data pool.
SNMP
See Simple Network Management Protocol.
Glossary 345
SOM
See system option mode.
source volume (S-VOL)

Used only in the earlier version of the Device Manager - Storage
Navigator GUI (still in use). This is the volume in a mainframe copy pair
containing the original data that is duplicated on the target volume (T-
VOL). The following Hitachi products use the term source volume:
ShadowImage for Mainframe, Dataset Replication, and Compatible
FlashCopy®.
In the current version of the GUI, "target volume" and "T-VOL" are
replaced with "primary volume".
See also source volume.
space
Generally refers to the data storage capacity of a disk drive or flash drive.
SRM
Storage Replication Manager
SSD
solid-state drive. Also called flash drive.
SSID
See storage subsystem identifier.
SSL
secure socket layer
storage cluster
See cluster.
storage tiers
See tiered storage.
SVP
See service processor.
SVS
Storage Virtualization System
346 Glossary
SW, sw
short wavelength, software
syslog
The file on the SVP that includes both syslog and audit log information,
such as the date and time.
system disk
The volume from which an open-systems host boots.
system option mode (SOM)

Additional operational parameters for the RAID storage systems that
enable the storage system to be tailored to unique customer operating
requirements. SOMs are set on the service processor.
T
T-VOL
See target volume.
target
An attribute of the port that is connected to the host.
target port
A fibre-channel port that is configured to receive and process host I/Os.
target volume (T-VOL)

The volume in a mainframe copy pair that is the copy of the original data
on the source volume (S-VOL). The term is used only in the earlier
version of the Device Manager - Storage Navigator GUI (still in use), for
the following Hitachi products: ShadowImage for Mainframe, Dataset
Replication, and Compatible FlashCopy® V2.
See also source volume.
TC
Hitachi TrueCopy
TI
See Thin Image.
Glossary 347
tiered storage
A layered structure of performance levels, or tiers, that matches data
access requirements with the appropriate performance tiers. The tiers
are:
Tier 1: Static content. Tier 1 is fully supported computing expected to be

production quality.
Tier 2: Application logic. Tier 2 platforms are not supported by the

security officer and release engineering teams. Tier 2 systems are
targeted for Tier 1 support, but are still under development.
Tier 3: Database. Tier 3 platforms are architectures for which hardware is

not or will not be available or that are considered legacy systems unlikely
to see broad future use.
Tier 4 systems are not supported.
total capacity
The aggregate amount of storage space in a data storage system.
TPF
Transaction Processing Facility
V
V-VOL
virtual volume
VDEV
See virtual device.
view mode
The mode of operation of Device Manager - Storage Navigator that allows
viewing only of the storage system configuration. The two Device
Manager - Storage Navigator modes are view mode and modify mode.
virtual device (VDEV)

A group of logical devices (LDEVs) in a RAID group. A VDEV typically
consists of some fixed volumes (FVs) and some free space. The number
of fixed volumes is determined by the RAID level and device emulation
type.
348 Glossary
virtual volume (V-VOL)
A logical volume in a storage system. A V-VOL has no physical storage
space.
Thin Image uses V-VOLs as secondary volumes of copy pairs.
In Dynamic Provisioning, Dynamic Tiering, and active flash, V-VOLs are

called DP-VOLs.
VLUN
Hitachi Virtual LUN
VM
volume migration; volume manager
volume (VOL or vol)

A logical device (LDEV), or a set of concatenated LDEVs in the case of
LUSE, that has been defined to one or more hosts as a single data storage
unit. An open-systems volume is called a logical unit (LU), and a
mainframe volume is called a logical volume image (LVI).
volume shredding
Deleting the user data on a volume by overwriting all data in the volume
with dummy data.
Glossary 349
350 Glossary
Index
A C
accelerated data compression 75 Cache Memories report 283
accessing a storage system certificate files 213
without the management software 58 certificates
account obtaining 208
release lock 154 certificates, obtaining 208
Active Directory authentication 188 changing 113, 121
adding changing a user’s password 151
RADIUS servers 198 Changing assigned resource groups 161
adding SVP to trusted zone 49 changing permissions 152
administration changing the date and time 116
tasks 18 controller settings 116
tools 18 SVP clock 116
administrator password 118 Channel Boards report 285
Adobe Flash 46 cipher suite 212
Alert notifications 217–219 client computer
configuring 218 UNIX requirements 43
email 220 Windows requirements 42
SNMP 222 Configuration files
Syslog 220 creating 166
audit log configuring Active Directory groups 192
exporting 241 configuring active directory servers 189
Audit logs creating
settings 240 user accounts 148
authentication server 162 Creating a keypair 206
Authentication server creating a report 123, 245
protocols 163 creating a user account 159
authentication servers 165 CSV files 295
Authentication servers 164
authorization server 162
authorization servers 165
D
Authorization servers
dashboard 21
requirements 164
analyzing data 24
data compression 75
Data Retention Utility license
B removal 236
backing up user accounts 143 date 121
block storage deduplication 96
configuring 63 deleting a report 245
built-in groups 156 deleting a user account 154
built-in user 47 Device Manager - Storage Navigator 26
accessing 89
using 89
Index 351
Device Manager- Storage Navigator H
client setup for 41 HCS certificates 204
disabling a user account 153 deleting 204
disabling user accounts 137 registering 204
displaying HduInfo.csv 308
RADIUS servers 200 HDvM - SN configuration files
displaying RADIUS servers 197 restoring 115
DKU 299, 303 HDvM SN configuration files
Dump files backing up 114
collecting 246 hosts
updating 96
Hosts report 265
E HTTP communication to SVP 132
EVS blocking 132
details 107
inventory 106
EVSs I
creating 106 installation
exports in a DHCP environment 33
creating 110 in a static environment 35
details 110 using the application installer 32
updating 110 installation verification 38
external parity groups 75 Internet Explorer
configuring 45
inventory 25
F IPv6, configuring communications 117
fabric switches
adding 52, 64
supported models 66 K
system requirements 66 Kerberos configuration file 172
file pool
details 105
file pools
creating 104
L
expanding 105 LDAP configuration file 166
inventory 103 license capacities
managing 102 unlicensed software 232
file storage license keys
configuring 102 expiration 238
file system overview 230
inventory 107 permanent 230
file systems term 231
creating 108 types 230
deleting 108 viewing information 237
expanding 109 License keys 229
managing 107 disabling 235
mounting/unmounting 108 emergency 231
updating 109 enabling 235
viewing details 108 installing 235
Firefox managing 232, 233
configuring 45 removing a software license 236
firewall setup 44, 117 temporary 231
force release system lock 119 logging in 39, 47
Logical Devices report 266
login message 119
LUNs report 268
G
general 219
352 Index
M viewing details 82
maintenance utility 27 pools, creating 78
starting 56 ports
management client enabling security 64
setup 41 Ports report 273
management software architecture 18 Power Consumption report 275
modules 121 primary SVP 120
MP Unit Details report 269
MP Units report 268
R
RADIUS configuration file 169
N RADIUS server
NAS 121 adding 198
NAS Manager 28 RADIUS server, accessing 164
accessing 91 RADIUS servers
using for advanced file storage configuration displaying 197, 200
91 raidinf add relocationlog 256
network communication settings 117 raidinf add report 252
Network permissions 118 raidinf delete relocationlog 258
Network settings 117 raidinf delete report 253, 254, 259, 260
raidinf download relocationlog 257
raidinf get relocationloginfo 258
raidinf get reportinfo 255
O releasing 132
onboard removing user accounts 141
workflow 51 Report Configuration Tool Command Reference
overview 249
Hitachi Storage Advisor 19 Report Viewer window 245
reports
Cache Memories 283
P Channel Boards 285
parity groups CHAP Users 262
creating 54, 67 Disk Boards 263
initializing 72 downloading 244
inventory 72 Host Groups 264
reserved for NAS firmware 72 Hosts 265
status 72 iSCSI Targets 264
Parity Groups report 270, 277 Logical Devices 266
parity groups, creating LUNs 268
advanced method 70 MP Unit Details 269
basic method 68 MP Units 268
password Parity Groups 270, 277
allowable characters and symbols 148 Physical Devices 271
changing a user’s 151 Physical View 289
local, changing 21 Ports 273
passwords power consumption 275
changing 180 Spare Drives 276
permissions, changing 152 Storage System Summary 278
Physical Devices report 271 table view 262
Physical View report 289 requirements
PKCS#12 format 210 management clients 41
pool creation resetting passwords 180
basic method, calculation of pool sizes 80 resource groups 156
pools Resource groups
creating 76 changing 161
creating with advanced method 80 resources 25
expanding 82 restoring user account information 144
inventory 76 roles 134, 156
updating 82 Roles 90, 155
Index 353
root password storage systems
changing 38 adding 51
deleting 87
details 87
editing 87
S
inventory 86
Security certificates 213
managing 86
self-signed certificate 208
SVP
servers
host name 120
adding 53, 93
SVP, adding to trusted sites 49
attach existing volumes 94
Syslog server
create and attach volumes 94
send test message 242
delete 94
setup 240
details 95
system 121
edit 94
inventory 94
system architecture 18
Servers
connecting authentication and authorization
system lock 119
servers 165
setting up management client 41
setting up user accounts 135
Settings menu 21 T
shares Test messages 222
adding AD groups to 111 email 223
creating 110 SNMP 224
details 111 Syslog 223
updating 112 There is a problem with this website's security
shares and exports certificate 213
inventory 109 tiers
managing 109 managing 92
signed certificates 208 time 121
updating 210
Signed certificates 208
notes 211
U
returning to default 211
unified management
signed private key 208
overview 20
signed public key 208
UNIX
Spare Drives report 276
requirements 43
spares
user accounts
managing 72
creating 148, 159
SsdDriveInfo.csv 327
deleting 154
SSdDriveInfo.csv 327
disabling 153
ssl certificate 40
managing 147
SSL certificate passphrase 209
user administration 134, 146
SSL certificates 205
overview 146
converting 210
user groups
SSL communication settings 205
deleting 161
SSL-encrypted communications
managing 155
creating a private keypair 206
names 160
creating a public key 207
roles 90, 155, 156, 158
starting
User groups
maintenance utility 56
permissions 160
Storage Navigator
creating a user account 159
storage system
editing 93 V
updating 93 viewing a report 244
storage system information 113 virtual file server
Storage system reports 244 deleting 106
Storage System Summary report 278 details 107
354 Index
enabling/disabling 106
inventory 106
renaming 107
virtual file servers
creating 106
volumes
attaching 85, 98
create and attach 83
expanding 100
inventory 101
managing 96
updating 100
volumes, creating 83, 97
W
web browser
configuring Firefox 45
configuring Internet Explorer 45
Web browser
configuring 44
Windows requirements 42
Index 355
356 Index
Hitachi Data Systems
Corporate Headquarters
2845 Lafayette Street
Santa Clara, California 95050-2639
U.S.A.
www.hds.com
Regional Contact Information
Americas
+1 408 970 1000
[email protected]
Europe, Middle East, and Africa

+44 (0) 1753 618000
[email protected]
Asia Pacific
+852 3189 7900
[email protected]
Contact Us
www.hds.com/en-us/contact.html
MK-94HM8016-06
October 2016

HM 80166

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HM 80166

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HM 80166

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

System Administrator Guide

Hitachi Virtual Storage Platform G200, G400, G600, G800

1 System administration overview....................................................... 17

2 Preparing your management software.............................................. 31

4 User Administration....................................................................... 133

5 Setting up security........................................................................ 203

7 License keys................................................................................. 229

8 Configuring audit logs....................................................................239

9 Managing storage system reports................................................... 243

B Storage configuration reports......................................................... 261

□ Changes in this revision

□ Conventions for storage capacity values

□ Accessing product documentation

Readers of this document should be familiar with the following:

Changes in this revision

• Product Overview, MK-92HM8051

• Hitachi Virtual All of the following storage systems:

• Hitachi Virtual All of the following storage systems:

This document uses the following typographic conventions:

• Indicates a variable, which is a placeholder for actual text provided by the

< > angle brackets Indicates variables in the following scenarios:

[ a | b ] indicates that you can choose a, b, or nothing.

{ a | b } indicates that you must choose either a or b.

This document uses the following icons to draw attention to information:

Icon Label Description

Note Calls attention to important or additional information.

Tip Provides helpful information, guidelines, or suggestions for performing

Caution Warns the user of adverse conditions and/or consequences (for

Conventions for storage capacity values

1 kilobyte (KB) 1,000 (10 3) bytes

Logical capacity unit Value

1 block 512 bytes

Accessing product documentation

Hitachi Data Systems Community is a global online community for HDS

□ System management architecture

□ Ways to administer the storage system

System administration overview 17

Ways to administer the storage system

18 System administration overview

• Storage Subsystem Administration Guide (MK-92HNAS012)

For more information about HSA, see the following documentation:

• Hitachi Storage Advisor Getting Started Guide (MK-94HSA001)

Overview of Storage Advisor

Storage Advisor reduces infrastructure management complexities and

Some of the key Storage Advisor capabilities include:

System administration overview 19

Unified management of block storage and file storage

Understand block and file storage

Adding block and file storage together

20 System administration overview

The dashboard has three distinct sections:

System administration overview 21

Resource side panel

22 System administration overview

The right side of the resource summary offers alternate views:

System administration overview 23

Analyzing data shown in alert tiles

Analyzing data in the information gauge

24 System administration overview